SOFTWARE OPERATING GUIDE

Software Version 32.*

AFS® Pro 700

Display
Framework
Precision Farming
As Applied
E-Notes
Printer
Virtual Terminal
Telematics
AFS AccuSync

Part number 90430857

1st edition English
January 2021
 Contents

1 GENERAL
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Manual scope. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8

2 ICONS AND WINDOWS

TOUCH CONTROLS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

"HOME" SCREEN
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12
"Home" screen area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Status and warning icon area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Left-hand area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

"TOOLBOX" SCREENS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
"Display Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
"Operator Setup" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
"Run Layout" screen ("Run" screen customization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
"Vehicle Name" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
"Precision Farming Setup" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
"Feature Activation" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
"Manual Control Setup" screen (manual product mapping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

3 SETUP
"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: BUILDING BLOCKS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
"Profile Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Additional windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: RADAR, DISTANCE, AND

AREA CALIBRATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Radar and distance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
Area calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: GPS RECEIVER SETUP

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33
"GPS Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
 Real Time Kinematic (RTK) setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
CenterPoint™ RTX™ setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
OmniSTAR® setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
RangePoint™ RTX™ setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)/European Geostationary Navigation Overlay
System (EGNOS) setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-93
Autonomous (raw GPS) setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94
GPS setup for the AFS VectorPro receiver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: GPS AND RESOURCE

STATUS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
"GPS Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
"Constellation Map" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
"GPS Receiver" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
"Resource Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115

SATELLITE AVAILABILITY
Planning software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Planning online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: FIELD BOUNDARIES, OB-

STACLES, AND MARKS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Field boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
"Headland" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
Field obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
Field marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: MAPS AND MAP TOOLS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
Work maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176
Swath map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196

"E-NOTES" APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-203
"Field Notes" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
"Weather Notes" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
"Xtra Notes" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209

4 OPERATION
DATA MANAGEMENT
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
"Import" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
"Filter List" screen (crop type filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
"Delete" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
"Map Management" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
"Import2" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
 MEMORY STICK MANAGEMENT
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Data management best practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Multiple vehicle practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48
Rotating memory stick practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49
Seasonal data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Formatting the memory device - Format the memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51

5 AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Feature activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
"AFS AccuSync Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
AFS AccuSync™ Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Change swath and boundary export setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Change the CAN node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Boundary import setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
User-Defined Windows (UDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Create a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
From the ”AFS AccuSync” window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
From the “Toolbox” screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
View job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Filter the job list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Sort the job list. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Join a job from the “Jobs List” screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Join a job by creating a new task. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Add boundaries and swaths to an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Leave a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Share swaths and boundaries with the current job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
View shared coverage map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
View job and cloud connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
View Controller Area Network (CAN) status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
Fault code index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

6 "PRINTER" APPLICATION
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
"Printer Settings" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
Print to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Connect to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Print to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

7 VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Setup the "Virtual Terminal" application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Enable the “Virtual Terminal” application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Configure the “Virtual Terminal” application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
 "VT Preferences" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
"Auxiliary Controls" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Working with an application in the Virtual Terminal (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
"Run" screen windows for the Virtual Terminal (VT). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
"Diagnostics" screens for the Virtual Terminal (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25

8 "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION
"Telematics" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
"Text Messages Received" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
"Backup Management" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
"Telematics Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

9 DIAGNOSTICS
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
"Version" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
"CAN Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
"Fault Archive" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4

10 THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Rawson Accu-Rate system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Raven variable rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
HARDI control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
Flexi-Coil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
 1 - GENERAL

1 - GENERAL
Introduction
The AFS Pro 700 display can serve as the operator interface for:
• Precision planting, harvesting, and spraying
• Vehicle-specific applications – for example, yield monitoring, “as applied” or prescription planting, performance
monitoring
• AFS AccuGuide™
• The virtual terminal for vehicles, implements, and systems that conform to the ISO 11783 standard
Layered architecture
The display uses a layered software architecture to greatly
simplify the learning curve for any operator. Each layer
inherits the capabilities of the previous layer. This creates
standard resources, tools, and screens for all applications
on the display.

Framework
Shared resources, tools, and screens – the “Framework”
layer in the illustration – mean that the operator can spend
less time learning and more time using the applications on
the display.

Shared resources may be operator preferences, imple-

RCIL11DSP074BBG 1
ment descriptions, crop types, grower-farm-field-task
structure, etc. The operator enters this information once.
The information is then available in any application on
the display, even if the operator moves the display to a
different vehicle.

Standard pop-up keypads and options windows are ex-

amples of shared tools. The same tools are used to create
lists, select options, and enter names or values. The op-
erator only needs to learn these tools once because they
are the same in every application on the display.

Common icons and "Home" screen organization simplify

navigation through all applications on the display.

Vehicle
Increasingly, the AFS Pro 700 display will be an opera-
tor’s primary tool for interfacing with the vehicle, whether
a tractor, combine, or sprayer. On many vehicles, the op-
erator controls automated steering with the display. On
some combines today, the operator not only monitors har-
vest operations, but also controls them directly from the
display.

The vehicle uses the display to communicate its unique

control and monitoring needs to the operator, while offer-
ing greater performance control and feedback.

1-1
 1 - GENERAL

ISO 11783 (ISOBUS)

Created by the International Organization for Standard-
izations (ISO), ISO 11783 is an electronic standard for
agricultural equipment.

The goal of ISO 11783 is to increase farmers’ equipment

options. The standard accomplishes this goal by
standardizing and simplifying control and communication
in:
• Agricultural vehicles
• Displays
• Implements
• Software
• Data storage
• Cables
• Connectors
RAIL12DSP1007BA 2
When used as the Universal Terminal (UT) for an ISOBUS
implement, the “Virtual Terminal” application on the AFS
Pro 700 display receives implement control and report-
ing functions for the implement from the implement itself.
These functions and windows are the responsibility of the
implement manufacturer.

Read the operator’s manual from the implement manu-

facturer before using the implement. Obey all safety mes-
sages in the manual and on the implement decals when
using the implement.

See 7-1 for information about setting up and using the

“Virtual Terminal” application.

1-2
 1 - GENERAL

Manual scope
The CASE IH software applications that are available for
the AFS Pro 700 display takes full advantage of its layered
architecture. There is vehicle software, farming software
(for example, harvesting, planting, etc.), and extended
feature software (for example, “Precision Farming,” “Trip
Computer,” etc.) that can be layered together in your dis-
play.

This display manual is the base manual for all software

applications. A software operating guide is then available
for any vehicle-specific or farming function application.

The purpose of this display manual is to explain:

• The standard tools that are used by all applications on
the display
• Navigation through the various screens in any applica-
tion
• “Toolbox” screens that are used by all applications
• Components of the “Precision Farming” application
• Generic calibrations
• Common “Data Management” screens
• Common “Diagnostics” screens
• Additional applications: “E-Notes,” “Printer,” “Virtual
Terminal,” and “Telematics”

By reading this manual, an operator will gain the basic

knowledge and skills that are required to learn any appli-
cation that is available for the AFS Pro 700 display.

1-3
 1 - GENERAL

Display
Installation and removal
The AFS Pro 700 display can be easily moved from
one vehicle to another. First, disconnect the electrical
connector from the display. Then:
• Remove the four screws that connect the display to the
support. Transfer only the display to another vehicle.

RAIL12DSP1045BA 1

OR

• Loosen the knob on the supporting arm and move the

display to another vehicle that already has an available
supporting arm.

RAIL12DSP1048BA 2

OR

• Remove the display with its support from the vehicle

mounting. Transfer both the display and all mounting
hardware another vehicle.

RAIL12DSP1046BA 3

1-4
 1 - GENERAL

Memory stick
The AFS Pro 700 display uses a 4 GB Universal Serial
Bus (USB) memory stick, part number 47962967, to store
and retrieve information during farming operations.
NOTE: You can also use any USB memory stick that ships
with a new Precision Farming-equipped vehicle.

RAIL12DSP1042AA 4

Insert the memory stick in the slot located on the back of

the AFS Pro 700. Push the stick in until it is fully seated.

The memory stick must be inserted before the display is

powered for the system to detect the presence of the stick.
NOTE: To avoid data corruption, never remove the mem-
ory stick until the display is powered down completely.

RCIL11DSP073BBG 5

1-5
 1 - GENERAL

Screen care
Clean the screen area of the display with a soft nonabra-
sive cloth and window cleaner.
NOTICE: Do not use solvent cleaners, which can damage
the screen area.

RAIL12DSP1043BA 6

Storage case
A case may be provided to protect the display:
• During transport between vehicles

OR

• For storage

During the winter months, place the display in the case

and store it in a controlled environment.

RAIL12DSP1044BA 7

1-6
 1 - GENERAL

Power ON and power OFF

When the ignition switch is turned ON, the display loads
its startup page.

The Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the front of the display

should be green, indicating that the display is both pro-
grammed and powered ON.

If the LED is not lit, check the harness connector to the

display. Then check the cab power fuses for the display.
To function properly, the display requires switched power,
unswitched power, and ground.

If the LED is lit, but is not green, contact your CASE IH

dealer for assistance.
RAIL12DSP1369BA 8

When the ignition switch is turned OFF, there is a short

delay before the screen goes blank. During this delay,
the display uses unswitched power to save the current
settings and to close all files in display memory or on the
memory stick.

The screen displays a message: “Your data is being

saved. Please do not turn off battery key while display is
shutting down." Data loss may occur if the memory stick
is removed before all files are properly closed.

The display sounds three short beeps when the process

is complete.

The absence of the short beeps may indicate that

unswitched power to the display is not present. Absence
of unswitched power can result in the loss or corruption RAIL15DSP0026BA 9
of information on the memory stick.

Check the cab unswitched power fuses for the display, or

contact your CASE IH dealer for assistance. This problem
must be resolved for the display to function properly.

1-7
 1 - GENERAL

Desktop software
“Desktop software” is a generic phrase that is used The desktop software will operate on any personal or
throughout this manual. The phrase refers to the software business computer with these requirements:
that is loaded on your home or business computer for
organizing and analyzing your farming data and activities. Component Minimum Recommend
NOTE: The desktop software is only used with applica- Processor 1 GHz 2 GHz or
tions that log data. faster
Operating system Windows XP Windows 7
To take full advantage of the farming applications on your SP3
display, you must use: Memory 256 MB RAM 1 GB RAM
• Case IH AFS Harvest and Application Control Systems Free hard drive 4 GB 4 GB+
version 12 or higher space
Media drive CD or DVD CD-RW
OR DVD-RW
Monitor size 17" 19"
• AFS Office version 2012 or higher Display resolution 800 x 600 at 1280 x 1024 at
16-bit color 24/32-bit color
Contact your CASE IH dealer for more information. Printer Color
Both software packages offer a clean migration path for Modem 56K baud
all of your accumulated CASE IH harvesting and product Port for memory USB 1.0 port USB 2.0 port
application data from previous years. Other harvest logs, stick
created with JD Greenstar™, New Holland, or Ag Leader
yield monitor systems, can form the building blocks for
your farming needs.

Whether your experience level with the “Precision Farm-

ing” application is expert or novice, check with your dealer
for training on the tools that are available for the desktop
software and the display software.

“Desktop computer” is another generic phrase used in this

manual to refer to the computer that runs the desktop soft-
ware.

1-8
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

TOUCH CONTROLS

Introduction

RAIL16DSP0796GA 1

Your display features a touch sensitive screen. The operator makes selections and enters information by pressing
windows, icons, or buttons that are displayed on the screen.

2-1
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Windows
All screens on the display are composed of windows (ex-
cept for the "Home" screen, explained later). The example
shown has ten windows that are separated by grid lines.

There are two types of window: control windows and re-

porting windows.

The operator uses control windows to stop or start a func-

tion, or to select the operational mode for a function –
for example, “On,” “Off,” “Manual,” and “Automatic.” Other
control windows allow the operator to input a required pa-
rameter – for example, name, date, time, crop type, im-
plement, distance, and height.

Reporting windows report status or a measurable value

– for example, speed, position, fuel consumption, seed
population, yield, and area. As such, reporting windows RCIL11DSP080BBG 1

are seldom user-modifiable, and resetting a counter is the

only permitted user action.
Window components always include a label (1) and a field
(2). A graphic icon (3) is optional.

The label describes what a window is displaying. The icon

identifies graphically what the window is displaying.

The field is a container for information.

RAIL14DSP1598BA 2

Predefined option windows

The shape of the field indicates how it functions.

A field with a down arrow indicates that a pop-up options

window with predefined options is available.
NOTE: The options are predefined by the application.

Press the field to display the pop-up options window.

NOTE: The window changes color when selected.

RAIL12DSP1000BA 3

2-2
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The pop-up options window displays in the center of the

screen.

Press any option in the window to select it for the field.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

RCIL11DSP086BBG 4

Depending on the field selected, the options list may be

quite extensive. Pop-up windows automatically expand to
two columns as required.

RCIL11DSP084BBG 5

When the options exceed the space viewable on a single

screen, a scroll bar appears on the right side of the pop-up
options window.

Press the down arrow in the scroll bar to page down

through the options. Press the up arrow in the scroll bar
to page up through the options. Press an arrow multiple
times to page through an extensive list of options in the
direction selected.

RCIL11DSP085BBG 6

2-3
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The location box in the scroll bar indicates the location of

the current page in the scrolling list: this page is located
midway through the list.

The size of the location box decreases as the number of

scrollable pages increases in the scrolling list.

RCIL11DSP085BBG 7

Information input windows

A field without a down arrow indicates:
• A field that requires the operator to input text (or select
among text entries that were previously created by the
operator)

OR

• A field that requires the operator to input a number

The label and context indicate what type of input or selec-

tion is required. A name field requires a name, a distance
field requires a measured distance, etc.

Press the field to display the pop-up options window or

keypad.
NOTE: The window changes color when selected. RAIL12DSP1001BA 8

Text windows
The pop-up options window displays in the center of the
screen.

If no entries were previously entered for the field, the only

option is “New” – to create a new entry.

Thereafter, the choices are “Select,” “Edit Name,” and

“New.”

Use “Select” to choose an entry from the user-created list.

Use “Edit Name” to edit the name for the currently se-
lected entry on the list.

Use “New” to add an entry to the current list. RCIL11DSP098BBG 9

Press the desired option.

2-4
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

If the operator presses “Select,” a pop-up options window

of existing entries displays.
NOTE: This window also expands to two columns as re-
quired and supports a scroll bar for large lists.

Press any entry in the window to select it for the field.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the field.

RCIL11DSP086BBG 10

If the operator presses "Edit Name" or "New," the alphanu-

meric keypad displays.

Use the keypad to create or edit an entry.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the entry.

See 2-7 for more information about keypads.

RCIL11DSP087BBG 11

Numeric windows
Month, day, year, hour, and minute are examples of nu-
meric windows – windows that only accept a number.

Press the field to access the numeric keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the number.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the num-

ber.

See 2-7 for more information about keypads.

RCIL11DSP088BBG 12

2-5
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Bar graph windows

Bar graph windows appear in many shapes and sizes
throughout the various applications. They generally work
in the same manner.

Press the bar graph to access the pop-up bar graph win-
dow.

RCIL11DSP089BBG 13

Press anywhere on the bar graph to immediately adjust

the field to a new setting.

OR

Press the right or left arrow buttons to increase or de-

crease the value by a preset increment – for example, 1%,
5% or 10% – provided for this type of bar graph.

Press the “Enter” button to save the setting. Settings take

effect when they are saved.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the setting.

RCIL11DSP090BBG 14

2-6
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Keypads
Alphanumeric and numeric keypads are part of the
“Framework” software on the display. They are available
to all of the applications on the display.

RCIL11DSP091BBG 1

Each application changes the keypads to fit its needs.

Because ISO 11783 implements upload their own soft-

ware to the display, the character sets on the alphanu-
meric keypad may vary between your CASE IH farming
software and software that is loaded into the “VT” appli-
cation (virtual terminal).

In general, applications support both uppercase and low-

ercase alphabets (toggle using the up arrow button), and
extended character sets beyond the alphabet.

RCIL11DSP092BBG 2

2-7
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Some applications support both alphanumeric keypads

and numeric keypads. The selected window determines
which keypad is appropriate for the operator to input the
required information.

Use both uppercase and lowercase letters when creating

entries to improve readability on the display.

RCIL11DSP093BBG 3

Applications customize the numeric keypads as well.

The decimal point (or comma) and minus sign are present
on some numeric keypads and absent on others, depend-
ing on whether decimal increments or negative numbers
are appropriate for a given window – for example, GPS
receiver offset values.

RCIL11DSP493BBG 4

2-8
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Keypad access
Whenever a keypad is needed to enter a name or value,
the keypad is displayed when the operator presses:
• "New" or "Edit" on a pop-up options windows

OR

• A numeric field – a field that only accepts a numeric

value.

The keypad displays in the center of the current screen.

Press the “Delete All” button to clear the current

entry in the keypad.

Press the “Delete” button to clear the previous char-

acter or number.

Press the “Shift” button to toggle between uppercase

and lowercase letters.

Press the “123” button to toggle between the numeric

RCIL11DSP091BBG 5
and special characters and the alphabet windows.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to

save the name or value. The keypad closes, and the win-
dow displays the newly created name or value.

Press the “Close” button to exit without making a

change.

2-9
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Input errors
Text entry windows are limited in length to a maximum of
18 characters. The keypad does not accept any additional
characters when this limit is reached.

If an operator attempts to enter a name that already exists

for the selected field, an input error message appears.

The message occurs when the operator presses the “En-

ter” button on the keypad to save the name. The message
prompts the operator to use another name.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage. The operator has the option of editing an existing
name or entering a variation on the existing name.

RCIL11DSP094BBG 6

If an operator attempts to enter a number that exceeds

the range allowed for the selected window, an input error
message appears.

The message occurs when the operator presses the “En-

ter” button on the keypad to save the value.

The message shows the valid range for the selected field.
The valid range is defined by the application that is using
the keypad.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage. Limit the number to the specified range.

RCIL11DSP095BBG 7

2-10
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Buttons
A buttons is a three-dimensional icon that, when pressed,
performs the action that is described by the text or graphic
label on the button.

Common text buttons include “OK,” “Yes,” “No,” “None,”

“Enter,” “Start,” and “Stop.”

Common icon buttons include Close” , “Select” , and

arrows (up , down , left , right ).

Buttons, although present on a screen, are not available

when they are dimmed. A dimmed button indicates that
something else is required to perform the action. The soft-
ware operating guide for the selected field explains the
steps required to complete the action that is associated
with the button.

RCIL11DSP096BBG 1

When all of the prerequisites are met, the button is active

and performs the action that its text or graphic label de-
scribes.

RCIL11DSP097BBG 2

2-11
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"HOME" SCREEN

Introduction
When the vehicle ignition switch is turned ON, the display
loads its startup page and sounds one long beep to indi-
cate that it is starting.

RAIL12DSP1369BA 1

When the installed applications are ready, the "Run 1"

screen displays. The “Run 1” screen is the default startup
page for all applications.
NOTE: The contents and arrangement of information on
the “Run” screens are determined by the operator. Place
the windows that are most useful for the current operation
on the “Run 1” screen.

Press the “Back” icon on the navigation bar to return to

the "Home" screen.

RCIL11DSP099BBG 2

The vehicle application – tractor, combine, or other – creates:

• The "Home" screen (A) for the vehicle and other farming applications on the display
• The status and warning icon area (B) for all applications on the display
• The left-hand area (C) which may be configurable for some vehicles
• The current time and date (D) may also be shown somewhere on the screen

The icons and content of the "Home" screen, as shown in the examples, vary with the vehicle.

2-12
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

RCIL11DSP001GBG 3
"Home" screen - combine example

RCIL11DSP002GBG 4
"Home" screen - tractor example

2-13
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Home" screen area

The icons on the “Home” screen organize the screens for
all farming applications by function.

Autoguidance, performance, planting, harvesting, and

any vehicle-specific applications can add components to
these navigation icons.

RCIL11DSP003ABG 1

Press the “Toolbox” icon to

access screens for setting
display preferences and operator
preferences, customizing the
“Run” screens, setting up the
GPS receiver, etc. The selections
vary with the applications that are
installed. The “Toolbox” screens
provide the location where shared
RCIL11DSP001ABG 2
tools can be configured.

Press the “Run” icon to access the

six customizable screens for all
applications that are installed on the
display. These are the screens that
the operator normally uses while
operating the equipment.

RCIL11DSP004ABG 3

Press the “Diagnostics” icon to

access screens for checking
software versions, controller status,
specific sensor signals, resource
usage, GPS signal status (if
equipped), GPS receiver interface
(if equipped), and fault codes.

RCIL11DSP012ABG 4

Press the “Calibration” icon to

access the screens for vehicle-
and application-specific calibrations
such as distance, area, crop,
steering sensor, etc.

RCIL11DSP005ABG 5

2-14
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Press the “Performance” icon to

access screens for viewing the
active data set and analyzing
operational results.

RCIL11DSP006ABG 6

Press the “Data Management” icon

to access screens for importing
data, filtering data, deleting data,
and managing map items.

NOTE: The remaining icons are more vehicle-specific.

Refer to the vehicle operator’s manual.
RCIL11DSP002ABG 7

When any "Home" screen icon is pressed, the application

uses “last screen recall” to determine which screen to dis-
play.
NOTE: The “Toolbox” screens are shown as an example.

The first time an operator enters the “Toolbox” screens in

the current work session, the first screen (“Display Setup”)
is shown by default.

Thereafter, when the operator enters the “Toolbox”

screens, the last screen that was viewed displays.

“Last screen recall” is used uniformly through all the func-

tional icons. “Last screen recall” persists until the display
is powered OFF at the end of the work session.
All “Toolbox” screens share the same navigation bar (1)
at the bottom of the screen.

Each “Toolbox” screen displays the "Toolbox" icon (2) and

a screen label (3).

Press any icon in the navigation bar to access the screen

for that icon.

Press the “Back” icon on the navigation bar to return to

the previous screen or the "Home" screen.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 8

2-15
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The number of “Toolbox” screens depends on the vehicle

applications and the mix of other applications that are in-
stalled on your display.

Your “Toolbox” screens may have fewer or more naviga-

tion icons than those shown.

The navigation bar adds an arrow to indicate when there

are additional icons beyond those that are visible.

Press the forward arrow to view the next page of naviga-

tion icons.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 9

Press the back arrow to view the previous page of navi-

gation icons.

RAIL16DSP0797BA 10

Some navigation icons open

sub-menus. These icons are
shaped like down arrows.

Press the down arrow icon to access the sub-menu

screens.
NOTE: The example shown is for the optional “Virtual Ter-
minal” application and its “Toolbox” screens. See 7-1 for
information about setting up and using the “Virtual Termi-
nal” application.

RAIL16DSP0798BA 11

2-16
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The navigation icons for the sub-menu displays.

The presence of a second icon (1) in the screen label indi-

cates that these screens are a sub-menu of the “Toolbox”
screens.

Press the “Back” icon (2) on the navigation bar to return

to the main “Toolbox” screens.

RAIL14DSP1360BA 12

This same operating pattern applies to all of the functional

icons and their screens.

2-17
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Status and warning icon area

The vehicle determines the location and the size of the
status and warning icon area. The status and warning
icon area may have two or three rows. It may be located
at the top or at the bottom of the left-hand area.

Nonetheless, the status and warning icon area has the

same function across all vehicles and applications. The
icons behave in the same way across all vehicles and
applications.

The status and warning icon area is present on all

screens and has two basic functions:
• The warning icons alert the operator that some compo-
nent is not functioning as expected.
• The status icons alert the operator about the current
1
state of an event. RCIL11DSP104BBG

Red is the color of danger. Icons that report danger flash

continuously and are always shown first in the status area.
These icons only clear when the dangerous condition is
removed.

Danger icons mean:

• Safe operation of the vehicle is not possible. Stop the
vehicle.
• An immediate hazardous situation is present. If not
avoided, the situation will result in death or serious in-
jury.

OR

• A critical component or condition required for proper

vehicle operation is not present. RCIL11DSP105BBG 2

2-18
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The window contains:

• The danger icon
• The fault message
• An icon for the problem area
• A fault code reference
• A brief explanation of the dangerous condition
• An instruction that explains where to find more informa-
tion.

A danger message can only be acknowledged and mo-

mentarily cleared by pressing the “OK” button. The fault
must be corrected to stop the message from reoccurring.

More information is available in the "Fault Archive" screen

in Diagnostics (Home > Diagnostics > Fault).

RCIL11DSP106BBG 3

Yellow is the color of caution. Caution icons

are shown after danger icons in the status
area, or are shown first when no danger
icons are present. Caution icons only clear
when their cause is removed.

Caution icons mean:

• Operation of the vehicle is possible with the loss of one
or more functions. The operator must decide whether
to continue operating with the loss of the function indi-
cated.
• A potentially hazardous situation is present. If not
avoided, the situation could result in loss of vehicle
control, loss of data, or minor to moderate system
damage
• A default value has been manually overridden by an
operator using a window on a “Run” screen.
RCIL11DSP107BBG 4
OR

• An unsafe practice is in progress

Caution icons are accompanied by a pop-up window (ex-

cept when an operator overrides a default value).

2-19
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The window contains:

• The caution icon
• The fault message
• An icon for the problem area
• A fault code reference
• A brief explanation of the condition
• An instruction that explains where to find more informa-
tion
A caution message can be acknowledged in two ways:

Press the “OK” button to clear the message

and leave fault detection enabled for the
specific item that caused the fault. As long
as the fault condition is present, the warning
icon continues to flash in the status and
warning area, and an audible alarm sounds
every 10 s. If the fault condition clears,
the caution icon clears and the alarm is
suppressed, but the system continues to
monitor the specific item.

Press the “Ignore” button to acknowledge

the message and disable fault detection
for the specific item that caused the fault.
The caution icon remains in the status
and warning area as a reminder that the
condition is still present, but the icon is
dimmed (or disabled) and no longer flashes.
The audible alarm is also suppressed.

NOTICE: Do not use Ignore to acknowledge a message

unless there is a known sensor problem for which repairs
must be delayed until a replacement sensor is available.

Fault detection for the specific item is re-enabled at the

next power cycle or by operator activation on the "Fault
Archive" screen in diagnostics (Home > Diagnostics >
Fault).

The message window does not redisplay.

Refer to the "Fault Archive" screen in Diagnostics for more

information on the active fault code (Home > Diagnostics
> Fault).

2-20
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Most status icons communicate simpler messages:

• An object is present or missing.
• A function is enabled or disabled.

OR

• A tool is raised or lowered.

The table below lists some of the more common icons you
may encounter in the “Framework,” “Precision Farming,”
“Virtual Terminal,” and “Telematics” applications.

Some status icons are unique to the vehicle or the various

farming applications. Refer to the vehicle operator’s man-
ual or the software operating guide for information about
other unique status icons. RCIL11DSP265BBG 5

NOTE: Many status and warning icons are interactive.

Press the icon to display additional information.

RCIL11DSP376BBG 6

The GPS receiver has acquired a valid Differential GPS (DGPS) correction
GPS signal, but not a valid Differential signal is in use.
GPS (DGPS) signal, if applicable.

Real Time Kinematic (RTK) correction xFill™ Premium is providing correction

signal has been interrupted. xFill™ is signal.
providing correction signal temporarily.

A latching “Field Mark” button is actively

marking its selected condition.

Field boundary recording is in progress. The vehicle (with its implement or

header) is approaching a field boundary
or the end of the swath.

Field obstacle recording is in progress. The vehicle (with its implement or

header) is approaching a field obstacle.

The display detects the presence of Recording to the memory stick is in

the memory stick. The memory stick progress.
must be inserted before powering the
display for it to be detected.
An active grower, farm, field, and task Recording to the display memory is in
must be selected before data can be progress. Data is not being recorded to
recorded. the memory stick.

2-21
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The implement is raised. The implement is lowered.

The object pool icon displays while an The diskette icon displays when the
ISOBUS implement or tool uploads its object pool from an ISOBUS implement
components to the display. is saved to or loaded from Non-Volatile
Memory (NVM) in the display.
Telematics is enabled and connected Telematics is enabled, but there is no
to the cellular network. cellular network connection.

Telematics in enabled and connected to Telematics is enabled, but is unable to

the cellular network in vehicles in which communicate with the modem. This
the Telematics modem is a Processing icon accompanies the TL-100 and
and Connectivity Module (PCM). TL-101 telematics fault codes. See 8-1.
The telematics file transfer server is The display is downloading from the
connected but idle. telematics file transfer server.

The display is uploading to the The file transfer feature is configured

telematics file transfer server. for an RS-232 port that has conflicts.

A new file from the telematics file

transfer server is ready to install on the
display.

2-22
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Left-hand area
The left-hand area is created by the vehicle. Refer to the
vehicle operator’s manual and accompanying software
operating guides for more information about this area.
The left-hand area is always displayed regardless of
whether the “Home” screen is selected.

In some vehicles, the left-hand area is not configurable by

the operator: the vehicle determines the content.

If the area is configurable, a window placed in the left-

hand area has priority over the same window placed on
a “Run” screen. When the operator selects the “Run”
screen that contains a window that is also used in the
left-hand area, the window on the “Run” screen is blank.

RCIL11DSP383BBG 1

2-23
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"TOOLBOX" SCREENS

Introduction
This chapter introduces basic “Toolbox” screens that are common to all applications on the AFS Pro 700 display. The
information entered on these screens is a shared resource for all farming applications on the display.

The techniques used to set up the display, operators, “Run” screen layouts, and vehicle name can be used in any
other application.

"Display Setup" screen

Use the “Display Setup” screen:
• To set the current date and time on the display,
• To select time format
• To select display language
• To select the operator’s interface level
• To set the display backlight level for all applications
• To select the current vehicle type
On the "Home" screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

The “Display Setup” screen displays by default.

If a different “Toolbox” screen displays, press the “Disp”

(display) icon on the navigation bar to access the “Display
Setup” screen.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 2

2-24
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Month,” “Day,” and “Year”

Press the “Month” window to access the numeric keypad

The display must be set to the correct date, since all saved
information is date stamped.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 3

Use the numeric keypad input the current month.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the

change.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the current setting.

RAIL16DSP0732BA 4

Use the same process to change the “Day” window (1)

and the “Year” window (2) as required:
1. Press the window to display the numeric keypad.
2. Use the keypad to input a number.
3. Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
change.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 5

2-25
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Hour,” “Minute,” and “Day/Night”

Press the “Hour” window to access the numeric keypad.

The display must be set to the correct time, since all saved
information is time stamped.

Use the keypad to input the current hour.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the

change.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the current setting.

Repeat this process to adjust the “Minute” window.

RAIL16DSP0733BA 6

Press the “Day/Night” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

Press “AM” or “PM” to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

RAIL16DSP0734BA 7

2-26
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Language”
A language change on the “Display Setup” screen
changes language for all applications on the display. If
the selected language is not available for an application,
the application will use its default language.

Press the “Language” window to display the pop-up op-

tions window for available languages.

Press the desired language to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

RAIL16DSP0735BA 8

If a new language is selected, a message displays: “This

change requires the display to perform a full reset. To
continue select Yes, or [select] No to cancel.

Press the “Yes” button to load the new language into

memory.

Press the “No” button to cancel the request.

The new language remains active until it is changed.

RAIL16DSP0736BA 9

2-27
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Interface Level”
Two interface levels are available: “Basic” and “Ad-
vanced.”

Choose “Advanced” if you intend to record the results of

your farming operations for analysis with the desktop soft-
ware. This includes summary data, “as applied” data, and
harvest results (yield and moisture). Choose “Basic” if you
do not intend to record production results.
NOTE: To enable mapping and data logging to the mem-
ory stick (for analysis with the desktop software), set the
“Interface Level” window to “Advanced.”

Each individual application – harvesting, planting, spray-

ing – controls the effect of the “Basic” or “Advanced” set-
ting on that application.

Choosing ”Basic” simplifies the structure of farming data:

fewer windows are required to perform operations and
temporarily store information in display memory. The “Ba-
sic” setting prevents logging to the memory stick, so the
increased simplicity also means that the summary data
and the production results will not be available for analy-
sis in the desktop software.
Press the “Interface Level” window to display the pop-up
options window.

Press the desired interface level to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

RAIL16DSP0737BA 10

If the interface level is changed, a message displays: “The

change requires the display to perform a full reset. To
continue select Yes, or [select] No to cancel.”

Press the “Yes” button to confirm the change and restart

the display.

Press the “No” button to cancel the request.

RAIL16DSP0738BA 11

2-28
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Backlight”
Press the “Backlight” window to access the pop-up bar
graph window.
NOTE: Some vehicles support both a daytime and a night-
time setting for display brightness. Turn the headlights
OFF when selecting the daytime setting. Turn the head-
lights ON when selecting the nighttime setting.

Press anywhere on the bar graph to immediately adjust

the backlight to the new level.

OR

Press the right or left arrow button to increase or decrease

the backlight in 5% increments.

The backlight of the display immediately reflects the new RAIL16DSP0739BA 12

setting as changes are made.

Press the “Enter” button to save the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

“Current Vehicle”
NOTE: Select the correct vehicle type!

Vehicle selection chooses the core application for the dis-

play: for example, “Large Tractors” or “Medium Tractors.”
The selected vehicle type interacts with other applications
and determines setup and calibration requirements.

Each vehicle type has different “Run” screens, "Home"

screen icons, and menus. “Generic Tractor" and “Generic
Combine” applications are available so that the display
can operate on early CASE IH vehicles that do not have
full Controller Area Network (CAN) bus systems, or, in
some cases, on non- CASE IH equipment.

Press the “Current Vehicle” window to access the pop-up

options window.
RAIL16DSP0731BA 13

2-29
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Press the vehicle type in which the display is installed.

Refer to the table below.

Name Series
“AFX" Axial-Flow® 10/20/30/
40/50 series
”Axial Flow 88 Series” Axial-Flow® 8088
“Cotton picker” Cotton Express®
Module Express™
“Generic combine” Axial-Flow® 2X00
“Large tractor” Magnum™
Steiger®
“Medium tractor” CVX
Magnum™ – Mid range
Optum®
Puma® RAIL16DSP0740BA 14
Vestrum
”Generic Sprayer” Patriot®
Trident™

RAIL16DSP0741BA 15

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the current setting.

If the vehicle type is changed, the display restarts to

load the new vehicle application into display memory. A
message displays with the options to allow the display to
restart or to cancel the vehicle change.

The vehicle type remains active until it is changed.

2-30
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Operator Setup" screen

Use the “Operator Setup” screen:
• To create the operator list for all applications on the display or select your name for work tracking
• To select preferences for each operator. Any changes made to the “Operator Setup” screen’s windows while an
operator is selected are automatically stored to that operator.
On the "Home" screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press The “Oper” (operator) icon on the navigation bar to

access the "Operator Setup" screen.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 2

Create or select an operator before changing the prefer-

ence windows on this screen.

RAIL16DSP0743BA 3

2-31
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

If a window is changed before an operator is selected,

a message displays: “In order to save display settings,
please select a valid operator.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage if required.

RAIL16DSP0744BA 4

“Operator”
Every operator must have a unique ID for reporting pur-
poses within the software. To share a common list of op-
erators with multiple vehicles, create the list on one vehi-
cle, and then transfer the list, via the memory stick, to the
other vehicles. This ensures that the operator uses the
same internal ID across all vehicles.

A maximum of 20 operators can be created.

NOTE: An operator can also be created with the desktop
software and then imported.

Press the “Operator” window to access the pop-up options

window.

If no operators have been created, the only option is “New”

to create a new operator. RAIL16DSP0745BA 5

If “New” is chosen, the alphanumeric keypad displays.

Use the keypad to create a name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

NOTE: Be consistent when entering operator names, par-
ticularly if the display is used on different vehicle types.
The software interprets the names “PETER,” “Peter,” and
“peter” as three different operators. Your ability to mea-
sure productivity or summarize production results may be
complicated if work tasks are linked to operators that are
named inconsistently.

RAIL16DSP0746BA 6

2-32
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit Name,” or

“New.”

RAIL16DSP0747BA 7

If “Select” is chosen, a pop-up options window of current

operators displays.

Press your name in the window. Any display preferences

associated with this name take effect upon selection.

The screen updates with the selected operator name.

RAIL16DSP0748BA 8

If “Edit Name” is chosen, the alphanumeric keypad dis-

plays.

Use the keypad to edit the selected operator name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

NOTE: Do not use “Edit Name” to replace one operator
name with another name: “Edit Name” does not change
the unique ID that is assigned for reporting purposes.
NOTE: Be consistent when entering operator names, par-
ticularly if the display is used on different vehicle types.
The software interprets the names “PETER,” “Peter,” and
“peter” as three different operators. Your ability to mea-
sure productivity or summarize production results may be
complicated if work tasks are linked to operators that are
RAIL16DSP0746BA 9
named inconsistently.

2-33
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Duplicate names are not permitted. If you attempt to save

a name that already exists, a message displays: “Dupli-
cate name exists. Enter another name.”

The message occurs when the “Enter” button on the key-

pad is pressed.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the original name, or use the keypad to modify
or select a variation on the name to continue.

RAIL16DSP0749BA 10

Operator preferences
Operator preferences can be changed at any time by
modifying selections on the "Operator Setup" screen.
The settings are immediately recorded for the selected
operator as the settings are changed. The settings are
used across all applications that are installed on the
display.

“Units”
Press the “Units” window to display the pop-up options
window for units of measurement. Available selections
are:
• “Metric”
• “USA”
• “Imperial”

Press your preference to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0750BA 11

“Grid Lines”
Grid lines are the vertical and horizontal lines that sepa-
rate the windows.

Press the “Grid Lines” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

Press “No” to turn grid lines OFF or press “Yes” to turn

grid lines ON.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0751BA 12

2-34
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Time Format”
Press the “Time Format” window to access the pop-up
options window.

Press your preference to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0752BA 13

“Display Volume”
Press the “Display Volume” window to access the pop-up
bar graph window. This bar graph sets the volume for any
warning or message beeps sounded on the display.

Press anywhere on the bar graph to immediately adjust

the volume to the new level.

OR

Press the right or left arrow to increase or decrease the

volume level in 5% increments.

The speaker beeps at the new volume level as each new

setting is selected.
RAIL16DSP0753BA 14
Press the “Enter” button to save the change.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

“Display Mode”
Press the “Display Mode” window to choose one of four
display modes from the pop-up options window:
• “Icon/Icon”
• “Mixed/Icon”
• “Mixed/Text”
• “Text/Text”

See the illustrations on the next page to understand

the differences among the four modes before making a
choice.
NOTE: Every window does not change appearance for all
four modes. RAIL16DSP0754BA 15

Press your preference to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

2-35
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Display modes - "GPS Status" screen

“Icon/Icon” mode “Mixed/Icon” mode

RAIL14DSP1600BA 16 RAIL14DSP1599BA 17
In “Icon/Icon” mode, the navigation bar and the windows In “Mixed/Icon” mode, the navigation bar displays with
display with icons only - that is, without any text labels. icons only (no text labels), and the windows display with
icons and text labels.

“Mixed/Text” mode “Text/Text” mode

RAIL14DSP1595BA 18 RAIL14DSP1601BA 19
In “Mixed/Text” mode, the navigation bar displays with In “Text/Text” mode, the navigation and the windows
text labels (no icons), and the windows display with icons display with text labels (no icons).
and text labels.

2-36
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Date Format”
Press the “Date Format” window to access the pop-up
options window. Use this window to select the format in
which dates will appear on the display.
“dd” denotes the two-digit day of the month (01-31)
“mm” denotes the two-digit month of the year (01-12)
“yyyy” denotes the four-digit year (for example, “2013”)

Press your preference to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0755BA 20

“Decimal Symbol”
Press the “Decimal Symbol” window to access the pop-up
options window. Use this window to select the symbol to
display when a decimal value is displayed.

Press your preference to change the setting.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0756BA 21

2-37
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Run Layout" screen ("Run" screen customization)

Six “Run” screens are shared by all applications on the display – for example, harvesting with combine control and
autoguidance OR tractor performance with autoguidance. Each “Run” screen is accessible from the navigation bar.
If the “Precision Farming” application is installed, two “Summary Data” screens can also be customized with the "Run
Layout" screen.

Use the "Run Layout" screen in the “Toolbox” screens:

• To customize the layout for each “Run” screen
• To select control windows or reporting windows for the six “Run” screens
• To customize the layout and select windows for the left-hand area
• To customize the layout and select windows for the “Summary Data” screens, if applicable
On the "Home" screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

The "Display Setup" screen displays by default.

Press the “Layout” icon on the navigation bar to access

the "Run Layout" screen.

RAIL16DSP0731BA 2

2-38
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Current Layout”
“Default” is the default selection in the “Current Layout”
window (1). The default layout for all six “Run” screens,
the left-hand area (if applicable), and the “Summary Data”
screens (if applicable) cannot be changed. The windows
are dimmed to indicate their locked condition. The display
uses the default layout for all screens whenever “Default”
is selected in the “Current Layout” window.
NOTE: Each farming application provides default layouts.
The operator can restore the default layout by selecting
“Default” in the “Current Layout” window.

“Run1” is the default selection in the “Run screen” window

(2), which indicates that this is the layout for the first “Run”
screen. RAIL16DSP0757BA 3

“2 x 6” is the default selection in the “Number of Windows”

window (3), which indicates that the “Run 1” screen is
organized in two columns with six rows.

“Run1” is the default name in the “Run Tab Name” window

(4) for the “Run 1” screen.

“Run” screen layouts

“Run” screen layouts are saved to the vehicle type and are
not saved with the other operator preferences. The oper-
ator creates screen layouts for the vehicle in use. “Run”
screen layouts created for one vehicle type can be shared
with other vehicles of the same type, but cannot be ac-
cessed on another vehicle type, nor imported into another
vehicle type.

To change the layout of the “Run” screens, the operator

must create a new layout.

A new layout may include an operator’s preferences for

all six “Run” screens, the left-hand area (if applicable),
and the two “Summary Data” screens (if applicable). A
RAIL16DSP0757BA 4
maximum of 20 layouts may be created.

Press the “Current Layout” window to access the pop-up

options window.
If no other layouts exist, the only option is “New.”

RAIL16DSP0758BA 5

2-39
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit Name,” or

“New.”

RAIL16DSP0759BA 6

Select a layout
If “Select” is pressed, a pop-up window of current layouts
displays.

Press your desired layout.

Press the “Close” button to exit without changing the

current setting.

RAIL16DSP0760BA 7

2-40
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Create or edit a layout

If “Edit Name” or “New” is pressed, the alphanumeric key-
pad displays.

Use the keypad to create or edit the name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

NOTE: How the “Run” screen layouts are organized de-
pends on how the display is used. When the display is
widely used across different vehicle types, the selection
list consists of layouts created on that vehicle type. When
multiple operators share the display for a single vehicle
type, each operator may prefer their own layout. Use the
provided worksheets at the end of this section to plan the
layout of the “Run” screens. RAIL16DSP0761BA 8

The selected or new layout screen can be edited – no

windows are dimmed.

RAIL16DSP0762BA 9

Select a “Run” screen

Press the “Run Screen” window to select one of the six
“Run” screen layouts for customization.

The pop-up window of “Run” screens displays.

Press the desired “Run” screen.

The layout for the selected “Run” screen displays.

NOTE: The options window in this example is for a vehicle
with a customizable left-hand area. Some vehicles do not
permit this, and “Left Area” does not display in the options
window for those vehicles. The “Summary Data” screens
only display in the options window if the “Precision Farm-
ing” application is installed on the display. RAIL16DSP0763BA 10

2-41
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Number of Windows” (columns and rows)

Press the “Number of Windows” window to change the
number of columns and rows on the selected “Run”
screen. The number of columns and rows can be different
for each “Run” screen.

The first number always indicates the number of columns.

The second number indicates the number of rows.
NOTE: A “Run” screen has a fixed size. Selecting fewer
columns and rows increases the size of the windows to
fill the screen area. Selecting more columns and rows
decreases the size of the windows to fill the screen area.

The pop-up options window displays.

RAIL16DSP0764BA 11
Press the desired setting.
The layout for the selected “Run” screen immediately up-
dates to reflect the selection. In this example, the “Run 3”
screen has a two column layout with four rows for placing
eight or fewer windows.

RAIL16DSP0765BA 12

Choose windows
Most windows use only one location on a “Run” screen.
There are exceptions, however. For example, map win-
dows require multiple rows and/or columns. Refer to the
appropriate software operating guide to identify windows
that span multiple rows and/or columns.

The "Run Layout" screen shows the overall area used by

such windows by repeating the window label in italics.

RAIL16DSP0766BA 13

2-42
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Any window can appear only once on any “Run” screen.

The same window can also appear on different “Run”
screens, but never more than once on the same “Run”
screen.

When you place a window for the second time on any

“Run” screen, the window is placed at the new location
(1) and removed from its previous location (2).
NOTE: Some applications will not display the same win-
dow in the left-hand area and on a “Run” screen at the
same time. If a window appears in the left-hand area, it
gets priority since it displays on every screen. If the same
window is also present on a “Run” screen, a blank area
appears in its place. See the appropriate software oper-
ating guide for further information.
RAIL16DSP0767BA 14

Press any window on the "Run Layout" screen to access

the pop-up options window.
NOTE: These examples are representative. They show
the operation of the "Run Layout" screen and do not doc-
ument the available windows from a specific farming ap-
plication.

RAIL16DSP0765BA 15

Press the desired window for this location on the layout

screen.

Use the up and down arrows in the scroll bar to page up

and page down through the options window.

RAIL16DSP0768BA 16

2-43
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The window label appears at the selected location on the

"Run Layout" screen.

To place more windows, proceed in the same fashion:

1. Press a layout location to access the window list.
2. Press the desired window for placement.

RAIL16DSP0777BA 17

“Run Tab Name” window (optional)

Use the “Run Tab Name” window to change the name
that appears on the icon (tab) in the navigation bar for the
selected “Run” screen.

The default names are “Run1,” “Run2,” “Run3,” “Run4”,

“Run5,” and “Run6.”
NOTE: The “Run Tab Name” window is disabled when a
“Summary Data” screen or the left-hand area is selected
in the “Run Screen” window.

Press the “Run Tab Name” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL16DSP0777BA 18

Press “Default” (1) to reset the window to the default name

for the selected “Run” screen.

Press “Edit Name” (2) to access the alphanumeric key-

pad.

RAIL16DSP0778BA 19

2-44
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the keypad to enter the desired name.

NOTE: Use a name with seven or fewer characters to
ensure that the whole name fits on the icon.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RAIL16DSP0771BA 20

To check the appearance of the “Run” screen being

customized at any time:
1. Press the “Back” icon on the navigation bar to return
to the "Home" screen.

RAIL16DSP0779BA 21

2. Press the “Run” icon to access the “Run” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 22

2-45
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

3. Press the appropriate “Run” screen on the navigation

bar to review the layout results.

RAIL16DSP0525BA 23

Left-hand area
Customize the left-hand area, if applicable, in the same
fashion as the “Run” screens.
NOTE: Some vehicles determine the total content of the
left hand area and do not allow any customization.

To customize the left-hand area:

1. Select “Left Area” in the “Run Screen” window.
2. Select your preferred layout (number of rows) in the
“Number of Windows” window.
3. Press a location on the "Run Layout" screen to display
the window options list.
4. Press a window label for placement. RAIL16DSP0773BA 24

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the layout is complete.

Because the vehicle owns the left-hand area, there
are some differences between the selections for “Run”
screens and the selections for the left-hand area:
• The left-hand area is a single column layout with fewer
row selections to ensure readability.

RAIL16DSP0774BA 25

2-46
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

• The vehicle limits the selection of windows to reporting

windows that are appropriate to the left-hand area.

RAIL16DSP0775BA 26

“Summary Data” screens (“Precision Farm-

ing” application required)
An operator can also use the "Run Layout" screen to
customize the “Summary Data” screens (Home > Per-
formance > Sum1/Sum2). The “Summary Data” screens
contain performance information that is appropriate to
the vehicle and its function. For example, the summary
content for tractors differs from the summary content for
combines.

Refer to the appropriate software operating guide to

understand the purpose and operation of the “Summary
Data” screens before customizing these screens.

RCIL11DSP167BBG 27

To customize a “Summary Data” screen:

1. Select “Summary Data 1” or “Summary Data 2” in the
“Run Screen” window.
2. Select your preferred layout (number of columns and
rows) in the “Number of Windows” window.
3. Press a location on the layout screen to display the
pop-up options list.
4. Press a window label for placement.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the layout is complete.
NOTE: Some windows are only appropriate to the “Sum-
mary Data” screens, and therefore are not available on
the “Run” screens. Other windows are common to both
the “Run” screens and the “Summary Data” screens.
RAIL16DSP0776BA 28

2-47
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Layout worksheets
Use the following worksheets to plan your “Run” screen layouts for your farming applications.

2 x 4 Layout

RCIL11DSP001FBG 29

2-48
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

2 x 5 Layout

RCIL11DSP002FBG 30

2-49
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

2 x 6 Layout

RCIL11DSP003FBG 31

2-50
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Vehicle Name" window

Use the “Vehicle Name” window to create a user-friendly name for the vehicle in which the display is currently installed.
With the AFS Pro 700 display, information can be shared:
• Between farming applications
• Between vehicles of the same type (tractor to tractor)
• Between vehicles of different types (combine to tractor
and vice versa)
• Between the display and the desktop software

The information exchange occurs by sharing the memory

stick between vehicles and/or the desktop software. To
accomplish this, the display and the farming applications
need a means to differentiate one vehicle from another.

Each vehicle already has a unique identification number –

its Product Identification Number (PIN) or serial number.
No other vehicle, whether a combine, a tractor or sprayer,
has the same PIN or serial number.

The display transparently identifies the information from

each vehicle using its PIN or serial number.
RCIL11DSP171BBG 1
The “Vehicle Name” window allows an operator to supply
a more user-friendly name for the vehicle. This vehicle
name, once created, is what appears in the display and
the desktop software.
NOTE: The “Vehicle Name” window can be placed on any
“Run” screen for operator convenience.
NOTE: The vehicle PIN or serial number is entered at soft-
ware installation on the display. On tractors, the "Vehicle"
screen (Home > Toolbox > Vehicle) is the only location
where the PIN displays. On large combines, the "Com-
bine" screen (Home > Toolbox > Comb) is the only lo-
cation where the serial number displays. When using a
generic vehicle, the “Vehicle Name” window is only avail-
able on the “Run” screens, and there is no identification
of the vehicle by its Product Identification Number (PIN)
or serial number.
NOTE: See 4-1 for more information on sharing informa-
tion between vehicles.

2-51
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Vehicle" screen - tractor examples

On the "Home" screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 2

Press the “Vehicle” icon on the navigation bar to access

the "Vehicle" screen.

An example PIN is shown. This is a reporting window that

the operator cannot select or modify.
NOTE: Contact your CASE IH dealer if this window is
blank or if it contains the wrong information.

RAIL16DSP0780BA 3

The software creates a default name for the vehicle.

Press the “Vehicle Name” window to change the name.

Press “Edit Name” to access the alphanumeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0781BA 4

2-52
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the keypad to enter a new name for the vehicle.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RAIL16DSP0782BA 5

On some tractor series, the "Vehicle" screen contains the

model and PIN windows, but the windows are both report-
ing windows that the operator cannot select or modify.

The tractors are identified by PIN or serial number, and the

display does communicate with the vehicle controllers on
the Controller Area Network (CAN) bus. Vehicle-specific
calibrations are saved to the vehicle’s PIN or serial num-
ber.

With these tractors, the “Vehicle Name” window is only

available on the “Run” screens:
1. Press the “Vehicle Name” window to change the name.
2. Press “Edit Name” to access the alphanumeric key-
pad.
RAIL16DSP0783BA 6
3. Use the keypad to enter a new name for the vehicle.
4. Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
name.

RAIL16DSP0787BA 7

2-53
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Combine" screen - large combines

On the "Home" screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP175BBG 8

Press the “Comb” (combine) icon on the navigation bar to

access the “Combine Setup” screen.
NOTE: Contact your CASE IH dealer if this window is
blank or if it contains the wrong information.

RCIL11DSP469BBG 9

The software creates a default name for the vehicle.

Press the “Vehicle Name” window to change the name.

Press “Edit Name” to access the alphanumeric keypad.

RCIL11DSP471BBG 10

2-54
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the keypad to enter a new name for the vehicle.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RCIL11DSP178BBG 11

Generic vehicles
When the display is on a generic vehicle – generic tractor,
generic combine, or generic sprayer – the “Vehicle Name”
window is only available on the “Run” screens. The “Ve-
hicle Name” window is not a part of the default layout and
can be added by an operator when customizing the “Run”
screens, if desired.

When analyzing harvesting, product application, or other

farming operation results from generic vehicles with the
desktop software, the ability to differentiate results from
different vehicles of the same type depends on the vehicle
in question.

Combines and cotton pickers using the generic vehicle

RAIL16DSP0787BA 12
application differentiate results by using the display PIN
instead of the vehicle PIN.

The generic tractor application and the generic sprayer

application do not differentiate results by the vehicle PIN
or the display PIN, and the desktop software cannot com-
pare results from different vehicles of the same type.
NOTE: Planters communicate with the display on the CAN
bus. The planter’s PIN is among the information that is
communicated. Even when used with generic tractor soft-
ware, each planter’s product application results can be
distinguished by the specific planter on the desktop soft-
ware.

2-55
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Precision Farming Setup" screen

Use the "Precision Farming Setup" screen:
• To set the start date of the operating season
• To set up boundary and obstacle alarm behaviors
• To enable or disable automatic completion of recorded boundaries
• To enable or disable direction monitoring alarms
On the “Home” screen, press the "Toolbox" icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “PF” (Precision Farming) icon on the navigation

bar to access the "Precision Farming Setup" screen.

RAIL16DSP0788BA 2

2-56
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Season Setup”
In many cases an operator may wish to keep data from
several years on a single memory stick. The date selected
in the “Season Setup” window is the date that marks a new
season of operations.

On this date, all tasks from the ending season are cleared
from the maps and are no longer selectable on the Sum-
mary Data and “Run” screens. A new task is created for
the current operation, and its operational instance is reset
to 1. The “Operational Instance” window is also reset to
the first instance for all other operations during the new
season.
NOTE: All data from the past seasons remains accessi-
ble in the “Data Management” screens and the desktop RAIL16DSP0788BA 3
software.

Press the “Season Setup” window to access the pop-up

options window.
Press the date that should mark the beginning of the next
operating season.

RAIL16DSP0789BA 4

“Guidance System”
If the vehicle is equipped with AFS AccuGuide™ or AFS
ElectriSteer, use the “Guidance System” window to select
the kind of guidance system.
NOTE: You must make a selection in the “Guidance Sys-
tem” window before you can use autoguidance or assisted
steering.

Press the “Guidance System” window to access the

pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0788BA 5

2-57
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Press “Autoguidance” if the vehicle is equipped with the

AFS AccuGuide™ autoguidance system.

Press “Assisted Steer” if the vehicle is equipped with the

AFS ElectriSteer assisted steering system.
NOTE: The “Autoguidance” option and the “Assisted
Steer” option are available only if the corresponding
software is installed on the display.

The display must perform a full reboot after you make this
selection.

RAIL16DSP0790BA 6

“Boundary Alarm Audio”

The “Boundary Alarm Audio” window
determines whether an audible alarm
sounds when the vehicle (with its implement
or header) enters the boundary warning
zone.

See 3-128 for detailed information about field boundaries

and boundary alarm behavior.

Press the “Boundary Alarm Audio” window to access the

pop-up options window.

Press “Off” to disable any audible alarm when approach-

ing a field boundary.
RAIL16DSP0791BA 7

Press “On” to enable the audible alarm.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the setting.
NOTE: When the ”Autoguidance” application or the “As-
sisted Steer” application is in use, the “Boundary Alarm
Audio” window is set to “On” and cannot be changed.

RAIL16DSP0792BA 8

2-58
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Obstacle Alarm Audio”

The “Obstacle Alarm Audio” window
determines whether an audible alarm
sounds when the vehicle (with its implement
or header) enters the obstacle warning zone.

See 3-159 for detailed information about field obstacles

and obstacle alarm behavior.

Press the “Obstacle Alarm Audio” window to access the

pop-up options window.

Press “Off” to disable any audible alarm when approach-

ing a field obstacle.

Press “On” to enable the audible alarm. RAIL16DSP0793BA 9

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the setting.
NOTE: When the ”Autoguidance” application or the “As-
sisted Steer” application is in use, the “Obstacle Alarm
Audio” window is set to “On” and cannot be changed.

RAIL16DSP0792BA 10

2-59
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Alarm Look Ahead”

The value in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window, along with
a minimum default distance, determines when the alarm
behavior for boundaries and obstacles occurs.

The alarm zone is different for forward and reverse oper-

ation.

If the vehicle is operating in a forward gear, the

approaching boundary or obstacle warning occurs:
• When the vehicle is within 5 m (16 ft) of the boundary
or obstacle

OR
RAIL16DSP0788BA 11
• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the
alarm look ahead distance of the boundary or obstacle,
as defined in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window

If the vehicle is operating in a reverse gear, the

approaching boundary or obstacle warning occurs:
• When the vehicle is within 10 m (33 ft) of the boundary
or obstacle

OR

• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the

alarm look ahead distance of the boundary or obstacle,
as defined in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window
The alarm look ahead value is specified in seconds: the
time in which the vehicle (with its implement or header),
at its current speed, will close the distance between the
obstacle or boundary and the vehicle. The value range is
from 5 – 15 s. The default value is 5 s.

Increase the value when working at higher speeds; de-

crease the value when working at slower speeds. The
operator should have enough time to comfortably perform
whatever actions are required to avoid the obstacle or
boundary and continue operating productively.

Press the “Alarm Look Ahead” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.

Use the keypad to enter a value from 5 – 15 s.

RAIL16DSP0794BA 12
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

2-60
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Boundary Auto-Complete”
The “Boundary Auto-Complete” window determines
boundary completion behavior when creating a boundary
with the “Rec Boundary” window.

When set to “On,” the boundary being recorded is auto-

matically completed if the vehicle comes within one imple-
ment width of the starting point.

When set to “Off,” the boundary being recorded is only

completed if the operator presses the “Stop” button in the
“Record Boundary” window.

RAIL16DSP0795BA 13

NOTE: “On” is the default setting for the “Boundary Auto-

Complete” window. If, when recording a boundary, the
corner of the field gets cut off, try recording the same
boundary with the “Boundary Auto-Complete” window set
to “Off.” Drive the entire boundary to the desired end point,
then press the “Stop” button in the “Record Boundary”
window.

RCIL11DSP482BBG 14

“Direction Monitoring”
While direction monitoring is enabled, a warning message
appears when the vehicle reverses direction. You must
acknowledge the message to remove it from view. A re-
verse icon appears in the left-hand area (LHA) when the
vehicle is in reverse.

You can disable direction monitoring to stop seeing the

warning message and reverse icon.
NOTE: When the ”Autoguidance” application or the “As-
sisted Steer” application is in use, the “Direction Monitor-
ing” window is not visible in the “Precision Farming Setup”
screen.

2-61
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Ensure the “Guidance System” window (1) is configured

to the “None” setting.

Press the “Direction Monitoring” window (2). The “Direc-

tion Monitoring” menu appears.

RAIL19PLM0567BA 15

Press to select the desired setting.

RAIL19PLM0571BA 16

If you choose to disable direction monitoring, a warning

message appears.

Press the “OK” button (1) to disable direction monitoring.

Press the “Cancel” button (2) to close the “Direction Mon-

itoring” message without disabling direction monitoring.

The “Direction Monitoring” message reads, “Direction

tracking is used to maintain coverage location behind the
vehicle. Turning this off will stop the reverse icon, but will
cause problems mapping coverage.”

RAIL19PLM0569BA 17

2-62
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Direction monitoring remains disabled after a key power

cycle.

RAIL19PLM0570BA 18

2-63
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Feature Activation" screen

Some software features, such as the “Task Controller” application for ISOBUS implements, require activation on the
display. Use the “Feature Activation” screen to enter activation codes or to transfer software features to another
display.

The activation code is a 32-character sequence of numbers and letters that is unique to the serial number of your
display. When you contact your CASE IH dealer for an activation code, your dealer will require the serial number of
your display.
NOTE: Perform actions on this screen only under the instruction of qualified CASE IH service personnel only. Do not
transfer an activation code unless you are certain that you no longer need the software feature on the current display.
NOTE: Use the “Feature Activation’” screen to enter activation codes for software features ONLY. Use the “Activation
Code’” window on the “GPS Setup” screen to enter activation codes for GPS signal correction upgrades ONLY.
NOTE: The activation of tractor-specific features, such as ISOBUS Class III and Anti-lock Braking System (ABS), is
not possible through the display interface. Contact your CASE IH dealer to activate tractor-specific features.
On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Activate” icon on the navigation bar to access

the “Feature Activation” screen.

RAIL16DSP0718BA 2

2-64
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The serial number of the display (1) and a sequence num-

ber (2) automatically populate the “Display Serial Number”
window.

The sequence number increases by one each time you

activate a software application on the display.

You cannot change the information in the “Display Serial

Number” window.

RAIL16DSP0718BA 3

There are two ways to enter an activation code into the

display:
• import the activation code from the \Activations\ folder
on your memory stick

OR

• manually enter the activation code into an alphanumeric

keypad

2-65
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Import an activation code

Your CASE IH dealer may provide an activation file for
a software feature. Use the activation file to activate a
software feature without manually entering the activation
code.

The activation file is a simple text file with an activation

code in the first line of the file (1).

Make sure that the activation file is in the correct location

on your memory stick. For example, if the drive letter
of your memory stick is x:, the file must be in the folder
x:\Activations\ (2).
RAPH16DSP0889AA 4

RAPH16DSP0888AA 5

Press the “Activate” button to import the activation code

or codes from the activation file on the memory stick.

RAIL16DSP0718BA 6

If a valid activation file exists on the memory stick, a

pop-up message displays: “Valid Activation File(s) found.”

Press the “Import” button to import the activation code or

codes.

If a valid activation file does not exist on the data stick,

a different pop-up message displays: “Valid Activation
File not found.”
• Copy the activation file to the correct folder on the mem-
ory stick and try again.

OR

• Press the “Manual” button to enter an activation code

manually with an alphanumeric keypad.
RAIL16DSP0719BA 7

2-66
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

If the import is successful, a pop-up message displays:

“Code Activated.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL16DSP0720BA 8

The screen updates to list all of the applications that have

been activated on the display. (1).

The sequence number in the “Display Serial Number” win-

dow (2) increases by one to indicate that the new software
application is active.
NOTE: You may need to reboot the display before you
can access the screens and windows of the new software
application.

RAIL16DSP0721BA 9

2-67
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Input an activation code manually

If you wish to input an activation code manually, press the
“Activate” button.

RAIL16DSP0718BA 10

Because no activation file exists on the memory stick,

a pop-up message displays: “Valid Activation File not
found.”

Press the “Manual” button to enter an activation code

manually.

RAIL16DSP0722BA 11

The “Activation Code” window becomes active.

Press the “Activation Code” window to access the al-

phanumeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0723BA 12

2-68
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the alphanumeric keypad to enter the 32-character

code supplied by your dealer.

If the operator enters more than 32 characters, an input er-

ror message reminds the operator that the activation code
must be exactly 32 characters. Press the “OK” button to
clear the message. Confirm that the code is complete and
correct as entered.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the code

and close the keypad.

RAIL16DSP0724BA 13

Press the “Activate” button to activate the application.

RAIL16DSP0725BA 14

A pop-up message displays: “Code Activated.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL16DSP0720BA 15

2-69
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The screen updates to list all of the applications that have

been activated on the display. (1).

The sequence number in the “Display Serial Number” win-

dow (2) increases by one to indicate that the new software
application is active.
NOTE: You may need to reboot the display before you
can access the screens and windows of the new software
application.

RAIL16DSP0721BA 16

If the activation code is not valid, a pop-up window dis-

plays when you press the “Enter” button on the keypad:
“Invalid activation code.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

Make sure that the code in the “Activation Code” window
is correct and press the “Activate” button again. If the
code is correct but still fails to activate, contact your
CASE IH dealer.

RAIL16DSP0726BA 17

2-70
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Transfer a software feature to another display

Certain activation codes are transferable from one display
(the “original display”) to another display (the “destina-
tion display”). Contact your CASE IH dealer to confirm
the transferability of a software feature and to learn the
process to obtain a feature activation code for the desti-
nation display.

As a part of the transfer process, you must deactivate the

feature on the original display. Use the “Transfer” button
to deactivate a software feature in the original display.
NOTE: Do not transfer an activation code unless you are
certain that you no longer need the software feature on the
original display. The transfer process removes the soft-
ware feature from the original display completely and you
cannot re-import or re-enter the original activation code.
RAIL16DSP0721BA 18
Press the “Transfer” button. A pop-up message displays:
“View previous transfer (history) or make new transfer?”
If you have already transferred activation codes from this
display in the past, you can press the “History” button to
view information about previous transfers.

Press the “Transfer” button to select the activation codes

that you wish to transfer.

RAIL16DSP0727BA 19

A pop-up window displays a list of all software applications

that are activated on the current display.

For each activation code that you wish to transfer, press

the box next to the name of the appropriate software ap-
plication.

Press the “All” button to select all transferable software

features in the list. Press the “None” button to deselect all
software features.

When the correct feature names are selected, press the

“Enter” button (3) on the keypad to submit the selection.

RAIL16DSP0728BA 20

2-71
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

A pop-up message displays: “Are you sure you want to

transfer out the selected feature(s)?”

Press the “Yes” button to confirm your selection.

NOTE: You cannot reverse this process after you press
the “Yes” button.

Press the “No” button to cancel the transfer.

RAIL16DSP0729BA 21

A pop-up message displays: “Use the File: \Activa-

tions\ActKey_n_n.txt. Please shut down the display using
key off before removing the USB stick.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

Cycle power to the display to complete the deactivation of

the software feature.

Provide the resulting file in the \Activations\ folder of the

memory stick to your CASE IH dealer.

RAIL16DSP0730BA 22

2-72
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

"Manual Control Setup" screen (manual product mapping)

You may wish to record coverage or “As Applied” data for
an application that the AFS Pro 700 display does not con-
trol—for example, a standalone liquid application system
or a tillage tool.

The “As Applied” application provides a maximum of four

“Manual Apply” windows for the operator to manually con-
trol mapping of such applications on the “Run” screens.
Before you can use the “Manual Apply” windows, you
must use the “Manual Control Setup” screen to set up
each control channel that you wish to map manually.

RAIL16DSP0498BA 1

From the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to ac-

cess the “Toolbox” screens.

Press the “Manual” icon on the navigation bar to access

the “Manual Control Setup” screen.

The first control channel is selected by default. To make

map layer selection and manual mapping more intuitive
later, you may wish to rename the control channel.
NOTE: The name in the “Control Channel” window deter-
mines the name of the map layer on the “Layer Assign-
ment” screen and displays in the label of the “Manual Ap-
ply” window for the “Run” screens.

Press the “Control Channel” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL16DSP0500BA 2

2-73
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Press “Edit Name” in the options window to access the

alphanumeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0501BA 3

Use the keypad to enter a new name for the channel. In

this example the new name is “Manual Liquid.”

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RAIL16DSP0502BA 4

2-74
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

You must select a product form for the control channel so

that the “As Applied” application uses appropriate units for
the application rate.

Press the “Product Form” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL16DSP0503BA 5

Press the appropriate product form for the control chan-

nel. In this example the appropriate product form is liquid.

RAIL16DSP0504BA 6

2-75
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The software needs information about the sections of

your implement to record accurate data.
• If the sections for manual mapping align exactly with
an existing implement control system that you are con-
trolling with the AFS Pro 700 display at the same time,
use the “Link to Layout” window to automatically popu-
late the measurements based on values from that im-
plement.
• If the sections for manual mapping do not align exactly
with an existing implement control system that you are
controlling with the AFS Pro 700 display at the same
time, leave the “Link To Layout” window set to “No Con-
trol” and continue to the “Number Sections” window.

Press the “Link to Layout” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL16DSP0505BA 7

Press the control channel that you wish to link, e.g.

“Seed.”

RAIL16DSP0533BA 8

2-76
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

All of the required implement measurements populate au-

tomatically based on your selection.

No further action is required on the “Manual Control

Setup” screen. You can now assign the new control
channel to a map layer on the “Layer Assignment” screen
(Home > Work Condition > Layer). See the software
operating guide for your implement for information about
using the “Layer Assignment” screen.

See the end of this section for information about using the
“Manual Apply” windows on the “Run” screens.

RAIL16DSP0534BA 9

If the sections for manual mapping do not align exactly

with an existing implement control system that you are
controlling with the AFS Pro 700 display at the same time,
use the “Number Sections” window to enter the number of
sections on the implement.

Press the “Number Sections” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0505BA 10

2-77
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the keypad to enter the number of sections.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

RAIL16DSP0531BA 11

Three new windows display for each section:

• “Section n Width” (1)
• “Section n Forward Offset” (2)
• “Section n Right Offset” (3)
NOTE: The letter “n” represents the number of the sec-
tion. Section 1 is the leftmost section from the perspec-
tive of the operator in the operator’s seat. Section 2 is the
next section to the right, etc.

RAIL16DSP0532BA 12

2-78
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the “Section n Width” windows to enter the width of

each section.

Press the “Section 1 Width” window to access the numeric

keypad.

RAIL16DSP0532BA 13

Use the keypad to enter the width.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the width.

Repeat this step for each remaining “Section n Width” win-

dow.

RAIL16DSP0535BA 14

2-79
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the “Section n Forward Offset” windows to enter the Forward offset for Mechanical Front Wheel Drive
distance from the vehicle reference point to the point of (MFWD) tractors
application for each section.
• If the point of application is forward of the vehicle refer-
ence point, use a positive value.
• If the point of application is behind the vehicle reference
point, use a negative value.

RAIL16DSP0538BA 15

Forward offset for articulated steer tractors

RAIL16DSP0539BA 16

Press the “Section 1 Forward Offset” window to access

the numeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0536BA 17

2-80
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Use the keypad to enter the offset value.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Repeat this step for each remaining “Section n Forward

Offset” window.

RAIL16DSP0537BA 18

Use the “Section n Right Offset” windows to enter the Right offset example, two sections
distance from the tractor centerline to the left edge of
each section.
• If the left edge of the section is to the left of the tractor
centerline (1), use a negative value.
• If the left edge of the section is aligned with the tractor
centerline (2), use a value of 0 (zero).
• If the left edge of the section is to the right of the tractor
centerline (3), use a positive value.

RAIL16DSP0541BA 19

Right offset example, three sections

RAIL16DSP0542BA 20

2-81
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

Press the “Section 1 Right Offset” window to access the

numeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0540BA 21

Use the keypad to enter the offset value.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Repeat this step for each remaining “Section n Right Off-

set” window.

You can now assign the new control channel to a map

layer on the “Layer Assignment” screen (Home > Work
Condition > Layer). See the software operating guide for
your implement for information about using the “Layer As-
signment” screen.

See the end of this section for information about using the
“Manual Apply” windows on the “Run” screens.

RAIL16DSP0543BA 22

2-82
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

“Manual Apply” windows

Placement labels: Manual Apply 1, Manual Apply 2, Man-
ual Apply 3, Manual Apply 4
NOTE: Use the “Run Layout” screen (Home > Toolbox >
Layout) to place “Manual Apply” windows on the “Run”
screens as required. Each “Manual Apply” window corre-
sponds to the control channel of the same number.

Use the “Manual Apply” windows to control data logging

for any control channels that you set up on the “Manual
Control Setup” screen.

Press the “Manual Apply” window to access the pop-up

control window.

RAIL16DSP0544BA 23

Use the “On” button to enable data logging whenever the

implement is in work.

The “On” button is a simple toggle switch.

• If data logging is enabled (highlighted button), press the
“On” button to disable data logging.
• If data logging is disabled (gray button), press the “On”
button to enable data logging.

When you enable data logging, the logged rate is the last
rate that you used in the “Manual Apply” window.

RAIL16DSP0548BA 24

2-83
 2 - ICONS AND WINDOWS

The black value in the center of the window (1) is the rate
that the display is currently logging.

The red line on the bar graph (2) represents the default
rate for the product.

The blue values below the bar graph (3) represent the
minimum application rate and the maximum application
rate for the product.

RAIL16DSP0548BA 25

To change the application rate that the display logs:

• Press anywhere on the bar graph (1) to immediately
change the logged application rate for the product.

OR

• Press the left arrow button (2) or the right arrow button
(3) to decrease or increase the logged application rate
by the delta application rate.

Press the “Reset” button (4) to reset the logged applica-

tion rate to the default application rate as required.

Press the “Enter” button (5) on the keypad to save the

value.

RAIL16DSP0548BA 26

2-84
 3 - SETUP

3 - SETUP
"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: BUILDING BLOCKS

Introduction
The “Precision Farming” application adds a unique set of tools to enable data collection. “Precision Farming” is trans-
parent when present, but it can be used by most applications on the display. Its presence is indicated by a common
set of screens that it adds to the “Performance,” “Diagnostics,” and “Toolbox” screens.

This chapter explains:

• The building blocks of the “Precision Farming” application – grower, farm, field, task, crop type, tag – on the “Profile
Setup” screen (Home > Performance > Profile) and on the “Run” screens
• The additional tools – implement, work condition, operator, operation, operational instance – that may be present
on the “Profile Setup” screen or the “Run” screens as required

"Profile Setup" screen

The “Grower,” “Farm,” “Field,” “Task,” “Crop Type,” and
“Tag” windows are the basic building blocks of the “Pre-
cision Farming” application and are the primary filters for
viewing production results. With the exception of the “Tag”
window, these windows must be populated whenever the
“Precision Farming” application is present.

With the exception of tasks, the information for the win-

dows can be created on the display and shared between
vehicles. Task information is vehicle-specific and can only
be entered on the display.

RCIL11DSP179BBG 1

Individual applications determine whether the “Imple-

ment”, “Work Condition,” “Operator,” “Operation,” or
“Operational Instance” windows are required. The “Im-
plement” window is added to the “Profile Setup” screen
for tractors.

The “Work Condition” window is required:

• On combines when the Automatic Crop Settings (ACS)
feature is used
• On tractors when the “Hitch Notebook” screen is used
• On planters (with the “As Applied” application) for tying
the implement to product and layer assignments

The “Operator,” “Operation,” and “Operational Instance”

windows can be added to the “Run” screens (not the “Pro- RCIL11DSP180BBG 2
file Setup” screen) based on operator preference or need.

3-1
 3 - SETUP

The selections in the windows on the “Profile Setup”

screen describe the active data set for which production
results are logged. The windows are grouped on the
“Profile Setup” screen for easy access. Any of the win-
dows can be added to any “Run” screen for the operator’s
convenience.

The data set has an hierarchical structure:

• For each grower, there can be many farms.
• For each farm, there can be many fields.
• For each field, there can be many tasks.
• Task is the lowest level in which data is stored, and each
task can only have one crop type and one tag. RCIL11DSP181BBG 3

NOTE: To enable mapping and data logging to the mem-

ory stick (for analysis with the desktop software), set the
“Interface Level” window on the “Display Setup” screen to
“Advanced.” (Home > Toolbox > Disp)
On the “Home” screen, press the “Performance” icon to
access the “Performance” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 4

Press the “Profile” icon in the navigation bar to access the

“Profile Setup” screen.

RCIL11DSP179BBG 5

3-2
 3 - SETUP

“Grower”
The “Precision Farming” application organizes data
collected on the display for your farming operations by
growers, farms, fields, tasks and tags. A maximum of
150 growers can be created. Each grower is assigned a
unique identification number.

A grower is an independent agri-business.

A grower may work a single farm or many farms. A grower

may also provide contract services – planting, spraying,
harvesting – to other growers.

As such, the grower is always linked to a farm to en-

able the user to view all crop operations for an individual
grower. RCIL11DSP182BBG 6

To add, edit or create a grower with the display, press the

“Grower” window to access the pop-up options window.

If no growers are available, the only option is “New.”

Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit Name,” or
“New.”

Press “Select” to choose a grower from the user-defined

list.

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a grower.

NOTE: Do not use the edit function to create a new grower
because it does not change the unique identification num-
ber assigned for the grower.

Press “New” to add a grower to the current list.

Press the desired option.

RCIL11DSP183BBG 7

If “Select” is pressed, a pop-up options window of current

growers displays.

Press the required grower.

The screen updates with the selected grower.

RCIL11DSP185BBG 8

3-3
 3 - SETUP

If “Edit Name” or “New” is pressed, the alphanumeric key-

pad displays.

Use the keypad to create or edit the name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RCIL11DSP187BBG 9

Operating notes
A grower can only be created or changed when the vehicle
is not working – that is, no data is being collected.

When a new grower is created, the “Farm” and “Field”

windows are blank since no farms or fields have been
created.

When the grower is changed, the “Farm” and “Field” win-

dows display the last farm and the last field that the oper-
ator used for that grower. Only the farms and fields asso-
ciated with the grower are available for selection.

If “None” is selected for the “Grower” window, the “Farm”

and “Field” windows are blank. The windows cannot be
populated until a grower is created or selected. An in- RCIL11DSP179BBG 10

structional message displays if the action is attempted.

3-4
 3 - SETUP

“Farm” and “Field”

To the display and the desktop software, a farm is a large
geographical entity that is composed of smaller entities
called fields. All crop production tasks occur within a field
that is defined by GPS coordinates.

As such, all crop production tasks are linked to a field, and

the field is linked to a farm.

A field contains one crop type this season. Next season,

the same field may contain a different crop type. In areas
where two crops per growing season are typical, the same
field may contain two different crop types in the same sea-
son.

The display and the desktop software treat the field as a RCIL11DSP189BBG 11

geographical container in which the crop tasks and pro-

duction data are recorded for this season. Those crop
tasks and their production results have a relatively short
life span when compared to the life span of the field and
farm, so field, task and crop type are independent.
The window options for a farm are the same as those for
a grower.

Press “Select” to choose a farm from the user-defined

list of farms:
1. If “Select” is pressed, a pop-up options window of cur-
rent farms/fields displays.
2. Press the required farm. The screen updates with the
selected farm

RCIL11DSP191BBG 12

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a farm.

Press “New” to add a farm to the current list of farms.

1. If “Edit Name” or “New” is pressed, the alphanumeric

keypad displays.
2. Use the keypad to create or edit the farm name.
3. Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
name.

RCIL11DSP193BBG 13

3-5
 3 - SETUP

Operating notes
A farm cannot be created or selected until the “Grower”
window is populated. An instructional message displays
if the action is attempted.

When the farm is changed, the “Field” window displays

the last field that the operator used for the farm.

A farm can only be created or changed when the vehicle

is not working – that is, no data is being collected.

A maximum of 150 farms can be created.

Field “Auto Select”
The options window for a field adds one important selec-
tion that is not present for the “Grower” or “Farm” windows:
“Auto Select.” With “Auto Select,” based on the current lo-
cation of the vehicle in a field, the software searches all
boundaries for all growers and farms on the memory stick
to locate the current field.
NOTE: For the “Auto Select” function to work, the vehicle
must be equipped with an active GPS receiver, and an
outer boundary must exist for the field.

RCIL11DSP195BBG 14

A message displays: “Search [is] in progress. Please

wait.”

Press the “Cancel” button, if required, to clear the mes-

sage and return to other display operations.

RCIL11DSP197BBG 15

3-6
 3 - SETUP

When the field is located, another message displays:

“Field [was] found. (Field name) is now active.” The
“Grower,” “Farm,” and “Field” windows automatically
populate with the correct information for the field.

Press the “OK” button to clear the message and proceed

to task selection or creation.

RCIL11DSP199BBG 16

If the vehicle is located between fields (outer boundaries)

when the search starts, a pop-up options window lists the
fields in proximity to the vehicle.

Press the desired field in the options window.

RCIL11DSP200BBG 17

If the field cannot be located, a message displays: “A

field was not found at the current GPS position. Please
manually select [a] field.”

This may occur if a boundary does not exist for the field
or if the field is not on the memory stick.

Press the “OK” button to clear the message. Select a field

manually.

RCIL11DSP202BBG 18

3-7
 3 - SETUP

The other selections in the options window for a field are

identical to those for a grower or farm. Press “Select” to
choose a field from the user-defined list of fields:
1. If “Select” is pressed, a pop-up options window of cur-
rent fields displays.
2. Press the required field. The screen updates with the
selected farm.

RCIL11DSP195BBG 19

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a field.

Press “New” to add a field to the current list of fields.

1. If “Edit Name” or “New” is pressed, the alphanumeric

keypad displays.
2. Use the keypad to create or edit the field name.
3. Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
name.

RCIL11DSP204BBG 20

Operating notes
A field cannot be created or selected until the “Farm” win-
dow is populated. An instructional message displays if the
action is attempted.

A field can only be created or changed when the vehicle

is not working – that is, no data is being collected.

A maximum of 350 fields can be created.

An advisory message appears if you select a pre-existing

field and its tasks contain crop types that are different than
the last crop type monitored by the display. The message
reads, “Crop Change. Active crop was changed to <New
Crop> due to change in field setup. <Machine settings
may change. Please confirm crop type is correct for se- RAIL19PLM0525BA 21

lected field.”

3-8
 3 - SETUP

“Task”
A task is the performance of work (with an implement or
header) on a specific crop type in one field of one farm
for one grower. For example:
• When planting, an operator (using planter Z) may plant
corn of a certain seed brand and coating (tag) in the
field FD321 on the Plank Road farm for the grower AB
Farms.
• When spraying, an operator (using sprayer Y) may
spray herbicide of a certain brand (tag) in the field
FD321 on the Plank Road farm for the grower AB
Farms.
• When harvesting, an operator (using combine X) may
harvest soybeans of a certain seed brand (tag) in the RCIL11DSP206BBG 22
field FD321 on the Plank Road farm for the grower AB
Farms.

A new task is automatically created when a field is cre-

ated. The software creates the task name with the date
and time stamp for the task – yy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss.

yy = year
mm = month
dd = day
hh = hour
mm = minute
ss = second
NOTE: The format for the auto-generated task name can-
not be changed and is not influenced by the selection in
the “Date Format” window on the “Operator Setup” screen
(Home > Toolbox > Oper).

An operator may edit the task name, if desired. A new

task can be created at any time.

Each task is limited to approximately 8 h of operation (sys-

tem collecting GPS data). After that time period, a mes-
sage displays to alert the operator that a new task has
been created automatically.

As a result, the work performed in the field, depending on

its duration, may be composed of multiple tasks.

A maximum of 1200 tasks can be created.

3-9
 3 - SETUP

Operating notes
All summary data and GPS data is stored at the task
level. To make this information more usable:
• Only one tag may be assigned to a task. When a differ-
ent tag is required during the current work, the operator
must create a new task. Change the task first, and then
change the tag.
• Only one operator may be assigned to a task. When a
different operator takes over the current work, the oper-
ator must create a new task. Change the task first, and
then change the operator.
• Only one operation may be assigned to a task. When a
new operation is selected for the same field, the oper-
ator must create a new task. Change the task first, and
then change the operation.
• Only one vehicle may be assigned to a task. Tasks
cannot be shared between vehicles.
• Only one implement may be assigned to a task. If a new
implement takes over the current operation in the same
field, the operator must create a new task. Change the
task first, and then change the implement.
• Only one work condition may be assigned to a task.
If a new or a modified work condition is needed, the
operator must create a new task. Change the task first,
and then change the work condition.
Press the “Task” window to access the pop-up options
window.

If no tasks are available, the only option is “New.”

Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit Name,” or

“New.”

Press “Select” to choose a task from the current list.

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a task.

Press “New” to add a task to the current list.

Press the desired option.

RCIL11DSP208BBG 23

If “Select” is pressed, a pop-up options window of current

tasks displays.
NOTE: The options window may contain entries in italics.
These entries are not selectable because they were cre-
ated by a different vehicle, by a different application, or by
a different sensor during crop calibration.

Press the required task.

The screen updates with the selected task.

RCIL11DSP210BBG 24

3-10
 3 - SETUP

If “New” is pressed, the software immediately generates

a new task name in this format: yy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss

The operator may accept this name for the task.

OR

The operator may press the “Task” window again, fol-

lowed by “Edit Name” to change the name.

RCIL11DSP212BBG 25

If “Edit Name” is pressed, the alphanumeric keypad dis-

plays.

Use the keypad to edit the name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RCIL11DSP213BBG 26

3-11
 3 - SETUP

“Crop Type”
The crop type is linked to the task, and thereby to the
field, the farm, and the grower. The crop type cannot be
changed once data has been recorded for the selected
task.

Press the “Crop Type” window to select a crop from the

filtered list in the pop-up window.
NOTE: The content of the crop list is controlled by the
“Filter List” screen in “Data Management” (Home > Data
Management > Filter). See 4-6 for more information.

Press the required crop to save the setting.

RCIL11DSP544BBG 27

“Tag”
A tag acts like an electronic note for the grower or operator
to save another variable in crop production and to filter
production results for that variable. This may be useful,
for example, to identify seed varieties when harvesting.

The tag is linked to the task, and only one tag may be as-
signed to a task. A maximum of 100 tags can be created,
and a unique ID is assigned to each tag.

When multiple vehicles are used, the tags should be cre-

ated on one vehicle and then transferred to the other ve-
hicles via the memory stick. This ensures that tags are
identified by a uniform set of IDs across all vehicles.
NOTE: Tags can also be created with the desktop soft- RCIL11DSP215BBG 28
ware and then imported.

Operating notes
Change the task first, and then change the tag to ensure
that data is retained for the previous and subsequent tags.

Whenever the “As Applied” application is present, use the

“Product” window, not the “Tag” window, to describe dif-
ferences in seed varieties and brands.
Press the “Tag” window to access the pop-up options win-
dow.

RCIL11DSP216BBG 29

3-12
 3 - SETUP

Press “Select” to choose a tag from the user-defined list.

RCIL11DSP217BBG 30

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a tag.

Press “New” to create a tag.

RCIL11DSP218BBG 31

“Implement” (if present)

The “Implement” window is only available in farming ap-
plications for tractors. A unique identification number is
assigned to each implement that is created. When using
multiple vehicles, create implements on one vehicle and
then transfer them to the other vehicles via the memory
stick. This ensures that implements are identified by a
uniform set of identification numbers across all vehicles.
Refer to the tractor software operating guide for additional
information. In some cases, specific vehicle settings are
stored to the implement so the settings are recalled when-
ever that implement is used.

An implement can only be created or changed when the

vehicle is not working – that is, no data is being collected.
RCIL11DSP219BBG 32

Press the Implement window to access the pop-up options

window.

3-13
 3 - SETUP

Press “Select” to choose the desired implement from the

user-defined list.

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of an implement.

Press “New” to create an implement with the alphanu-

meric keypad.

RCIL11DSP220BBG 33

3-14
 3 - SETUP

Additional windows
The individual farming applications determine whether the
“Work Condition,” “Operator,” “Operation,” and “Opera-
tional Instance” windows are required. These windows
are not a part of the “Profile Setup” screen (Home > Per-
formance > Profile). The operator can add the windows to
any “Run” screen or view them on screens that are unique
to the vehicle.
“Work Condition”
In many instances, vehicle settings must change based
on:
• The work being performed
• Weather conditions
• Field conditions

OR

• Crop conditions

The “Work Condition” window describes the settings for

the condition. For example, a vehicle can have different
settings for dry product versus wet product, or for dry field
RCIL11DSP221BBG 1
conditions versus wet field conditions. Storing the settings
by the different conditions allows an operator to quickly
change vehicle setup by selecting the proper work condi-
tion. Refer to the vehicle operator’s manual to learn the
specific settings that can be saved under a work condi-
tion.

A maximum of 40 work conditions can be created.

Tractors have a special use for the “Work Condition” win-
dow: saving hitch settings for a mounted implement. On
tractors, the work condition is linked to the implement.

RCIL11DSP381BBG 2

3-15
 3 - SETUP

Some combines with the Automatic Crop Settings (ACS)

feature have a special use for the “Work Condition” win-
dow: saving the work condition for a crop type that re-
quires specific combine settings.

On combines with the ACS feature, the work condition is

linked to the crop type. Refer to the combine operator’s
manual for more information on the ACS feature.

RCIL11DSP222BBG 3

Press the “Work Condition” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press “Select” to choose the desired work condition from

the user-defined list.

RCIL11DSP223BBG 4

RCIL11DSP224BBG 5

3-16
 3 - SETUP

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of a work condi-

tion.

Press “New” to create a work condition with the alphanu-

meric keypad.

RCIL11DSP225BBG 6

“Operator”
Press the “Operator” window to access the pop-up options
window.

See 2-31 for information about creating operators and se-

lecting personal settings.

See 4-8 for information about deleting operators.

NOTE: When logging data, only one operator can be as-
signed to a task. Change the task first, and then change
the operator to ensure that data is retained for the previ-
ous and subsequent operator.

RCIL11DSP226BBG 7

Press “Select” to choose your name from the user-defined

list.

Press “Edit Name” to change the name of an operator.

NOTE: Do not use “Edit Name” to replace one operator
name with another name: “Edit Name” does not change
the unique ID that is assigned for reporting purposes.

Press “New” to add an operator to the current list.

RCIL11DSP227BBG 8

3-17
 3 - SETUP

“Operation” (if present)

The “Operation” window provides a predefined list of op-
erations from which to choose. The “Operation” window is
only visible in farming applications for tractors, since ve-
hicles such as combines or cotton pickers have one oper-
ation – harvesting. Refer to the tractor software operating
guide for additional information.
NOTE: The software supplies the harvesting operation for
combines and cotton pickers where needed.
NOTE: When logging data, only one operation can be as-
signed to a task. Change the task first, and then change
the operation to ensure that data is retained for the previ-
ous and subsequent operation.
RCIL11DSP483BBG 9
Press the “Operation” window to display the pop-up op-
tions window.

Press the desired operation or choose “Other” if your cur-

rent activity is not listed.

RCIL11DSP228BBG 10

3-18
 3 - SETUP

“Operational Instance” (if present)

In many cases, an operation is only performed once in a
field for a crop type in a growing season: plowing, seed-
ing, harvesting, etc. However, there are circumstances
where the same operation needs to be performed more
than once in a growing season for a crop type. The “Oper-
ational Instance” window is available to separate the data
that is collected for the first operation from any repeated
operations.

For example:
• When heavy rains flood areas of a field, and a crop
type must be replanted, increment the value in the “Op-
erational Instance” window to “Plant 2” for the second
planting. The coverage data from the first planting does RCIL11DSP483BBG 11
not effect the second planting in section or overlap con-
trol, and the total applied acreage does not conflict with
the total field acres.
• It may be necessary to apply herbicide multiple times
to control invasive weeds. The same product is ap-
plied to the same crop type in the same field on two or
more separate occasions. Use a different operational
instance for each application of herbicide. In this way,
the coverage data from the first application does not af-
fect the second application in section or overlap control,
and the total applied acreage does not conflict with the
total field acres.

Unique data – coverage, “as applied,” or performance –

is stored for each instance of the operation. When a new
instance is created or selected with the window, data col-
lection begins for the new instance, and a new task is cre-
ated.

A new operational instance can only be created or se-

lected when the vehicle is not working – that is, no data is
being collected.

Press the “Operational Instance” window to access the

pop-up options window.

3-19
 3 - SETUP

Press “Select” to choose an existing operational instance

for the current field. Any coverage data or “as applied”
data that is associated with the instance is loaded.
NOTE: You do not need to select the first instance for any
operation. The system automatically supplies the first in-
stance – Plant 1 or Seed 1, for example – for all operations
that are performed for a crop type in a field.

RCIL11DSP484BBG 12

Press “New” to create a new operational instance.

A new operational instance is created for the current op-

eration.
NOTE: Only one operation and one operational instance
are assigned to a task. Additional tasks inherit the opera-
tion and instance from the previous task. If no data exists
for the current field and operation, the instance defaults
to 1.
NOTE: A maximum of 10 operational instances can be
created for an operation during a season.

RCIL11DSP485BBG 13

3-20
 3 - SETUP

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: RADAR, DISTANCE, AND AREA CALIBRATION

Introduction
This chapter explains:
• The radar and distance calibration procedures for generic vehicles
• The area calibration procedure for adjusting acreage discrepancies for all vehicle types

Radar and distance calibration

The values from radar or distance calibration are used
for calculating speed, area, and application rates. Radar
and/or distance calibration are required for the highest
working accuracy. The calibration synchronizes vehicle
equipment to the display.

Perform distance or radar calibration:

• At the beginning of each season
• When working in markedly different soil conditions
• When vehicle setup, implement or header setup, or tires
change

The closer that the working conditions are duplicated

when performing the calibration, the more reliable the
results will be. To get the best results from the procedure:
• The vehicle (with its implement or header) must be fully
set up and operational.
• Tires must be inflated to the proper pressure.
• Calibration must be performed in the field in soil and
conditions like those where work will be performed.
• The storage container(s) on the vehicle and/or imple-
ment – tank, hopper, basket, etc. – should be half full
to average the fill level.

3-21
 3 - SETUP

Radar calibration - generic tractor

On the “Home” screen, press the “Calibration” icon to ac-
cess the “Calibration” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Radar” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Radar Cal” screen.
NOTE: The “Radar Cal” screen is not available if radar is
not enabled on the “Vehicle” screen (Home > Toolbox >
Vehicle).

RCIL11DSP378BBG 2

To perform radar calibration:

1. Measure a course with a distance of at least 121.9 m
(400 ft) and place a marker at the beginning and end
of the measured course.

A 121.9 m (400 ft) course is shown in this procedure.

This procedure shows metric measurement. If U.S.
Standard units were selected, screen values will be in
feet.
NOTE: When determining course length, a measuring
tape is preferred over a measuring wheel because a
measuring tape provides greater accuracy.

RCIL11DSP378BBG 3

3-22
 3 - SETUP

2. Enter the actual length of the course as it was mea-

sured by tape measure.

Press the “Distance” window to access the numeric key-

pad.
Use the keypad to enter the value in meters (feet).
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
value.

RCIL11DSP379BBG 4

3. Drive to the start of the course and press the “Start”

button. The vehicle can be moving or stationary when
the “Start” button is pressed.
NOTE: Careful alignment with the start position is crit-
ical for the most accurate results.

A “Stop” button appears, and the “Radar”

icon flashes in the status and warning
icon area. The icon indicates that radar
calibration is in progress.

RCIL11DSP380BBG 5

4. Drive to the end of the course at the intended work-

ing speed and press the “Stop” button. The vehicle
can be moving or stationary when the “Stop” button is
pressed.
NOTE: Careful alignment with the stop position is crit-
ical for the most accurate results.

When the “Stop” button is pressed, the “Radar Mea-

sured” window displays the length of the course as it
was measured by radar. The flashing icon disappears
from the status and warning icon area.

RCIL11DSP382BBG 6

3-23
 3 - SETUP

5. Press the “Cal” (calibrate) button to update the vehi-

cle's radar calibration value.

RCIL11DSP384BBG 7

If the difference between the value in the “Distance” win-

dow and the value in the “Radar Measured” window is
too great, a warning message displays: “Radar calibra-
tion result is out of range and will not take effect. Please
verify distance and repeat calibration.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the

message.
Restart radar calibration.

RCIL11DSP385BBG 8

6. Repeat this procedure at least four times and calculate

the average calibration value – sum the calibration val-
ues from each run and divide the total by the number
of runs performed.

7. Manually enter the average calibration value.

Press the “Radar Cal Value” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.
Use the keypad to enter the average calibration value.
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
value.

RCIL11DSP386BBG 9

3-24
 3 - SETUP

Distance calibration - generic harvester

(combine, cotton picker)
On the “Home” screen, press the “Calibrations” icon to
access the “Calibration” screens.

RAIL12DSP1031BA 10

Press the “Distance” icon in the navigation bar to display

the “Distance Calibration” screen.

RCIL11DSP388BBG 11

To perform distance calibration:

1. Measure a course with a distance of at least 121.9 m
(400 ft) and place a marker at the beginning and end
of the measured course.

A 121.9 m (400 ft) course is shown in this procedure.

This procedure shows metric measurement. If U.S.
Standard units were selected, screen values would be
in feet.
NOTE: When determining course length, a measuring
tape is preferred over a measuring wheel because a
measuring tape provides greater accuracy.

RCIL11DSP388BBG 12

3-25
 3 - SETUP

2. Drive the vehicle to the start of the course and press

the “Start” button. The vehicle can be moving or sta-
tionary when the “Start” button is pressed.
NOTE: Careful alignment with the start position is crit-
ical for the most accurate results.

When the “Start” button is pressed, the accumulating

distance, as measured by radar, displays in the “Mea-
sured Distance” window.

RCIL11DSP388BBG 13

3. Drive to the end of the course at the intended work-

ing speed and press the “Stop” button. The vehicle
can be moving or stationary when the “Stop” button is
pressed.
NOTE: Careful alignment with the stop position is crit-
ical for the most accurate results.

When the “Stop” button is pressed, the “Measured Dis-

tance” window stops accumulating distance.

RCIL11DSP389BBG 14

4. Enter the actual length of the course as it was mea-

sured by tape measure.

Press the “Actual Distance” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.
Use the keypad to enter the value in meters or feet,
depending on the unit of measurement selected.
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
value.

RCIL11DSP390BBG 15

3-26
 3 - SETUP

5. Press the “Update Cal” button to adjust the stored cal-

ibration value for the current field conditions and vehi-
cle configuration.

The value in the “Measured Distance” window updates

to match the value in the “Actual Distance” window, and
a new calibration value displays.

RCIL11DSP391BBG 16

If the updated value is out of range, a warning message

displays: “Redo calibration. See operator’s manual if
problem continues.”
Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the
message.
Perform the procedure again with greater accuracy to
correct the problem.

RCIL11DSP392BBG 17

6. Repeat the calibration procedure to verify accuracy.

In general, there should not be a great difference be-
tween individual runs.

Multiple runs can be averaged for greater accuracy –

sum the calibration values from each run and divide the
total by the number of runs performed.

7. Manually enter the average value in the “Distance Cal

Value” window.

Press the “Distance Cal Value” window to access the

numeric keypad.
Use the keypad to enter the average calibration value.
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the av-
erage calibration value. RCIL11DSP393BBG 18

NOTE: The calibration values shown are for reference

only. Use the value that results from your vehicle con-
figuration operating in your field conditions.

3-27
 3 - SETUP

Area calibration
Use area calibration whenever there is a mismatch be-
tween the known area for a field and the recorded area
for the same field. The calibration adjusts the recorded
area in hectares or acres, including all work data in the in-
dividual tasks, to reflect the known area. The calibration
value is only stored for tasks in the field for which area
calibration was performed. The calibration value is not
applied to any other fields or newly created tasks.

This calibration is available whenever the “Precision

Farming” application is used.
On the “Home” screen, press the “Calibration” icon to ac-
cess the “Calibration” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Area” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Area Calibration” screen.

RCIL11DSP184BBG 2

3-28
 3 - SETUP

To perform area calibration:

1. Press the “Grower” window to select the grower for

the farm that contains the field that requires an area
adjustment.

Select the appropriate grower from the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP186BBG 3

2. Press the “Farm” window to select the farm that con-

tains the field that requires an area adjustment.

Select the appropriate farm from the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP188BBG 4

3. Press the “Field” window to select the field that re-

quires an area adjustment.

Select the appropriate field from the pop-up options win-

dow.

RCIL11DSP190BBG 5

3-29
 3 - SETUP

4. Press the “Operation” window, if present, to select the

desired operation.

Select the appropriate operation from the pop-up op-

tions window.
NOTE: This window is only present for vehicles that
perform multiple operations or apply multiple products.

RCIL11DSP192BBG 6

5. Press the “Operational Instance” window, if present, to

select the desired instance for the selected operation.

Select the appropriate operational instance from the

pop-up options window.
NOTE: This window is only present for vehicles that
perform multiple operations or apply multiple products.

RCIL11DSP507BBG 7

The “Area” window updates with the recorded area for

the selected field, operation, and instance. This is the
value that was recorded by the farming software and
saved to the memory stick.

RCIL11DSP508BBG 8

3-30
 3 - SETUP

6. Press the “Actual” window to access the numeric key-

pad.

Use the keypad to enter the known area for the field in
hectares or acres.
Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the
value.

RCIL11DSP509BBG 9

The “Error” window displays the percentage of error be-

tween the known field area and the recorded field area.
If the recorded area is greater than the known area, a
positive value is displayed. If the recorded area is less
than the known area, a negative value is displayed.

RCIL11DSP510BBG 10

7. Press the “Calibrate” button to begin area calibration.

RCIL11DSP510BBG 11

3-31
 3 - SETUP

The “Area” window updates with the value from the “Ac-
tual” window, and the “Error” window is set to 0.0%. The
“Calibrate” button displays “Calibrated.”

RCIL11DSP511BBG 12

3-32
 3 - SETUP

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: GPS RECEIVER SETUP

Introduction
This chapter continues information on the “Precision Farming” application and explains the “GPS Setup” screen (Home
> Toolbox > GPS).

Your GPS receiver supports a variety of signal correction technologies. The two primary measures of accuracy are:
• Pass-to-pass accuracy - Pass-to-pass accuracy measures the relative accuracy over an interval of 15 min. For
example, pass-to-pass accuracy of +/- 10.2 cm (4.0 in) means that 95% of the time there will be less than 10.2 cm
(4.0 in) of skip or overlap from one field pass to the next.
• Year-to-year accuracy - Year-to-year accuracy is the measure of repeatable accuracy a day, a week, a month, or
even a year later. For example, year-to-year accuracy of +/- 2.5 cm (1.0 in) means that 95% of the time a row that
you drive next year will be within 2.5 cm (1.0 in) of the same row this year.

The following tables describe each signal correction technology in terms of accuracy, ranging from broad accuracy to
high accuracy. Contact your CASE IH dealer to determine which technology is best for your operating conditions.

Accuracy Technology Pass-to-pass Year-to-year Convergence Description

accuracy accuracy time
WAAS/EGNOS 15.2 – 20.3 cm < 1.0 m < 1 min Available without
(6.0 – 8.0 in) (39.4 in) subscription
OmniSTAR® VBS 15.2 – 20.3 cm 50.8 cm < 1 min Appropriate for:
(6.0 – 8.0 in) (20.0 in)
• operators who desire a
quick start-up time and
don’t need the highest
level of accuracy or
repeatability
• broadacre crop spraying,
tillage applications, and
other applications in which
accuracy and repeatability
are not critical
RangePoint™RTX™1 15.2 – 20.3 cm 50.8 cm 1 – 5 min • Entry-level correction
(6.0 – 8.0 in) (20.0 in) service that is available
Broad in regions where Satellite
Based Augmentation
System (SBAS) correction
options such as EGNOS,
WAAS, and OmniSTAR®
are not readily accessible
• Does not require additional
receivers, modems, or
data plans
AFS 12 15 cm (5.9 in) 5 cm (2.0 in) 5 min The AFS 1 network allows
for a faster convergence
time and is a cost-effective
alternative to the AFS 2
network, but offers a lesser
accuracy that may not
be suitable for all farming
operations.
1 Technology requires an AFS 372 GNSS receiver
2 Technology requires an AFS AccuStar GNSS receiver

3-33
 3 - SETUP

Accuracy Technology Pass-to-pass Year-to-year Convergence Description

accuracy accuracy time
OmniSTAR® G21 5.1 cm (2.0 in) 10.2 cm < 40 min Appropriate for:
(4.0 in)
• operators who require
more reliable satellite
coverage than
the standard GPS
constellation alone
provides
• high-performance
broadacre spraying,
planting and land-tillage
applications
• operations in areas that
have an open view of the
sky at all times
OmniSTAR® XP 5.1 cm (2.0 in) 10.2 cm < 40 min Appropriate for:
(4.0 in)
• high-performance
broadacre spraying,
Mid planting and land-tillage
applications
• operations in areas that
have an open view of the
sky at all times
OmniSTAR® HP 5.1 – 10.2 cm 10.2 cm < 40 min Appropriate for:
(2.0 – 4.0 in) (4.0 in)
• high-performance
broadacre seeding,
planting, spraying, and
harvesting applications
• operations in areas that
have an open view of the
sky at all times
AFS 22 5 cm (2.0 in) 5 cm (2.0 in) 25 – 45 min The subscription-based AFS
2 correction offers medium
accuracy solutions for most
operations. The AFS 2
correction requires an unlock
on your display.
1 Technology requires an AFS 372 GNSS receiver
2 Technology requires an AFS AccuStar GNSS receiver

3-34
 3 - SETUP

Accuracy Technology Pass-to-pass Year-to-year Convergence Description

accuracy accuracy time
CenterPoint™RTX™1 3.8 cm (1.5 in) 3.8 cm (1.5 in) < 30 min Appropriate for:
• farms located anywhere in
the world
• farms outside of RTK base
station coverage areas
• row crops and other
applications requiring
3.8 cm (1.5 in) accuracy
CenterPoint™VRS™ < 2.5 cm < 2.5 cm < 1 min Appropriate for:
(1.0 in) (1.0 in)
• farms in areas with robust
cellular coverage
• operations that are spread
out over a large geographic
area
• row crops, strip tilling,
and other applications
High requiring accuracy of less
than 2.5 cm (1.0 in)
CenterPoint™ RTK < 2.5 cm < 2.5 cm < 1 min Appropriate for:
(1.0 in) (1.0 in)
• farms within 12.9 km
(8.0 miles) of an
established RTK base
station or base station
network
• farms without line-of-sight
obstructions such as hilly
terrain or an abundance of
trees
• row crops, strip tilling, land
leveling, and drainage
applications in which
the highest horizontal
accuracy and vertical
accuracy are required
1 Technology requires an AFS 372 GNSS receiver

3-35
 3 - SETUP

"GPS Setup" screen

On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “GPS” icon on the navigation bar to display the

“GPS Setup” screen.

“Not Installed” is the default status for the “GPS Location”

window. When “Not Installed” is selected, no receiver
setup options or GPS “Run” screen windows are avail-
able.

RAIL14DSP1500BA 2

3-36
 3 - SETUP

“Write to Card”
NOTE: The “Write to Card” window is only visible when
the “GPS Location” window is set to “Not Installed” and
the “Interface Level” window (Home > Toolbox > Disp) is
set to “Advanced.”
NOTE: This functionality is retained for some combines.
The combine must be equipped with ground speed,
header height, and crop sensors to use this option.

Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to view the second
“GPS Setup” screen.

The “Write to Card” window is available when farming soft-

ware supports data logging, but no GPS receiver is in-
stalled on the vehicle. Input from crop sensors and area RAIL14DSP1501BA 3
counters is recorded directly to the internal memory of the
display, but is not mapped.

When the “Write to Card” window is set to “No,” the system

does not check for the presence of the memory stick. Op-
erational summary data is logged to internal display mem-
ory only.

When the “Write to Card” window is set to “Yes,” the sys-

tem does check for the presence of the memory stick.
Operational summary data is logged to the memory stick
when supported by the vehicle software.

When the system is configured for GPS, the “Write to

Card” window is automatically set to “Yes.” The window is
not available since all GPS data is recorded to the mem-
ory stick.

Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to access the sec-
ond “GPS Setup” screen.

Press the “Write to Card” window to display the options

window.
Press “Yes” to enable the option.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the setting.

RAIL14DSP1502BA 4

3-37
 3 - SETUP

“GPS Location”
If a GPS receiver is installed on the vehicle, press the
“GPS Location” window to display the pop-up options
window. The options displayed in the window are
vehicle-dependent. The options include:
• Model-specific locations – the recommended factory or
field installed location for the GPS receiver with the
standard bracket
• “Custom” – when the GPS receiver is not installed in
the recommended factory or field location or when a
custom bracket is used.
NOTE: When the GPS receiver is used with the “Autogu-
idance” application, the GPS receiver must be installed
on the vehicle center line for best system performance. RAIL14DSP1500BA 5

The recommended factory or field installed locations for

the vehicle always use the vehicle center line.

Press the “GPS Location” window to access the pop-up

options window.
Press the appropriate setting for your vehicle. Tractor example

RAIL14DSP1503BA 6

Combine example

RAIL14DSP1507BA 7

3-38
 3 - SETUP

“Forward Offset,” “Right Offset,” and

“Height Offset”
When a model-specific location is selected in the “GPS
Location” window, default values populate the “Forward
Offset” and “Right Offset” windows. The windows are
dimmed and not editable. These values are accurate for
the factory-installed or field-installed location of the GPS
receiver with the standard mounting bracket. The “Height
Offset” window displays a default value that is based on
a vehicle equipped with standard tires This window is ed-
itable. When the “Autoguidance” application is present,
measure the height offset and adjust the value for accu-
racy. The value is used for roll correction to keep the ve-
hicle aligned to the swath.
RAIL14DSP1511BA 8
When “Custom” is selected in the “GPS Location” win-
dow, no default values populate the “Forward Offset,”
“Right Offset,” or “Height Offset” windows. Use this
selection when the GPS receiver is not mounted at the
recommended factory-installed or field-installed location,
or when a custom bracket is in use. You must measure
the forward offset and right offset and enter each value
into the appropriate window.
Offset values, which describe the distance between
the GPS receiver and the vehicle reference point, are
required to achieve more accurate swath alignment,
product application, and data mapping. The distances
are described in a three dimensional plane.

The GPS receiver location is its physical location on the

vehicle. Measure from the bottom center of the receiver.

RCIL11DSP302BBG 9

The vehicle reference point varies by vehicle:

• Front steer tractors: the ground below the center of the
rear axle

RAIL12DSP1510BA 10

3-39
 3 - SETUP

• Articulation steer tractors: the ground below the center

of the front axle

RAIL12DSP1511BA 11

• Combines: the ground below the center of the front

fixed axle

RAIL12DSP1512BA 12

• Sprayers and floaters: the ground below the center of

the rear axle

RAIL12DSP1513BA 13

3-40
 3 - SETUP

“Height Offset”
The height offset (z-axis) is the distance from the bottom
center of the GPS receiver to the ground. This value must
be a positive number.
NOTE: An accurate “Height Offset” value is critical for
good guidance performance. Tire size can affect this
value significantly, so always measure the offset for your
vehicle when you set up GPS for the first time or when
you change the tires on your vehicle.
NOTE: Position the vehicle on flat, level ground to mea-
sure height offset.

RCIL11DSP310BBG 14

The GPS receiver may be mounted on top of the AgGPS®

radio module as shown. Measure the height offset from
the base of the GPS receiver, not the radio module.

RCIL11DSP298BBG 15

Press the “Height Offset” window to access the numeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the value in meters (feet).

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the value.

RAIL14DSP1516BA 16

3-41
 3 - SETUP

“Forward Offset”
The forward offset (x axis) is the distance from the GPS
receiver to the vehicle reference point. Take the measure-
ment on the ground between the center of the appropri-
ate axle and the bottom center of the GPS receiver. If the
receiver is to the front of the corrected location, enter a
positive value. If the receiver is to rear of the corrected
location, enter a negative value [using the minus (-) sym-
bol].
NOTE: Directions are from the perspective of the operator
seated in the operator’s seat.
NOTE: Position the vehicle on flat, level ground to mea-
sure forward offset.
RCIL11DSP304BBG 17

Press the “Forward Offset” window to access the numeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the value in meters (feet). Enter

a negative value using the minus (-) symbol.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the value.

RAIL14DSP1517BA 18

“Right Offset”
The right offset (y axis) is the distance from the bottom
center of the GPS receiver to the center line of the vehi-
cle. If the receiver is to the right of the corrected location,
enter a positive value. If the receiver is to the left of the
corrected location, enter a negative value [using the mi-
nus (-) symbol].
NOTE: Position the vehicle on flat, level ground to mea-
sure right offset.

RCIL11DSP307BBG 19

3-42
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Right Offset” window to access the numeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the value in meters (feet). Enter

a negative value using the minus (-) symbol.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the value.

RAIL14DSP1518BA 20

“DGPS Alarm”
The “DGPS Alarm” window controls
status icon behavior for Differential
GPS (DGPS). WAAS/EGNOS,
OmniSTAR®, CenterPoint™RTX™,
RangePoint™RTX™, and RTK are
considered DGPS methods for this window.

For vehicles operating in conditions where DGPS correc-

tion signal is available and generally reliable, change this
setting to “Yes” to display the status icon when DGPS sig-
nal is lost.

For vehicles operating in conditions where DGPS correc-

tion is absent or frequently lost, change this setting to “No”
RAIL14DSP1519BA 21
to suppress the status icon.

Press the “DGPS Alarm” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the desired setting.

“GPS Reset”
Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to view the second
“GPS Setup” screen.

Use the “Reset” button to perform a soft reset of the GPS

receiver. A soft reset reinitializes all satellite fixes and
restarts the convergence process for the selected correc-
tion signal, if applicable.

Press the ”Reset” button as required to reset the GPS

receiver.

RAIL14DSP1520BA 22

3-43
 3 - SETUP

“Logging Interval”
The “Logging Interval” window indicates how frequently
GPS spatial data is logged to the memory stick for the
work in progress.

The default value is 1 s.

The “Logging Interval” window is inactive, and you cannot

change the value. The software controls this aspect of
GPS data logging.

RAIL14DSP1520BA 23

Press the “Logging Interval” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the appropriate interval.

Press the “Close” button to exit the options window

without changing the current selection.

RCIL11DSP398BBG 24

3-44
 3 - SETUP

“NMEA 2000”
(National Marine Electronics Association) NMEA 2000 is
a communication standard for sharing data between mul-
tiple vehicle instruments, regardless of brand, with any of
the display instruments installed on a NMEA 2000 net-
work.

When using a third party receiver, selecting the correct

NMEA 2000 retrieval method ensures the accuracy of the
retrieved information.
NOTE: If the wrong NMEA 2000 retrieval method is se-
lected, the positional data displayed will be skewed when
compared to the actual positional data.

The “NMEA 2000” field (2) indicates the selected RAIL19PLM1587BA 25

positional data retrieval method. Positional data
(obstacles, marks, boundaries, guidance lines, etc.)
storage retrieval is based on the display software version
used when the data was recorded:
• Legacy – recorded prior to v31.26
• Enhanced – recorded since v31.26

Press the “Info” button (1) to open a message window dis-

playing additional information concerning the two meth-
ods. Press the “OK” button (3) to close the message win-
dow.

“Enhanced” is the default setting for the “NMEA 2000”

section of the “GPS Setup” screen.

RAIL19PLM1588BA 26

To modify the selected NMEA 2000 retrieval method:

1. Navigate to the second half of the “GPS Setup” screen.
2. Press the “NMEA 2000” field. The “NMEA 2000 Con-
version” options window (4) opens.
3. Press the:
○ “Enhanced” option (6) if new positional data is be-
ing created and no positional data created before
v31.26 is being used.
○ “Legacy” option (7) if positional data was created
with display software prior to V31.26 and with a
third-party GPS source providing corrections.
○ “X” button (5) to close the “NMEA 2000 Conversion”
window without modifying the selected NMEA 2000
27
retrieval method. RAIL19PLM1589BA

3-45
 3 - SETUP

“Connection Type”
Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to view the second
“GPS Setup” screen.

Use the “Connection Type” window to select the method

by which the display receives input from the GPS receiver.

Press the “Connection Type” window to display the pop-up

options window.

RAIL14DSP1520BA 28

Press the correct setting for your vehicle.

NOTE: The RS-232B, DB-9 connector (located on the
back of the display) can be used for GPS input, but it re-
quires an adapter harness to provide ground for the re-
ceiver.

Press the “Close” button to exit the window without

changing the setting.

Connection Vehicle
Type
“CAN-A” Axial-Flow® 2x00 series combines
Generic tractors
Magnum™ series tractors
Optum® series tractors
Puma® series tractors RAIL14DSP1521BA 29
Steiger® series tractors
Vestrum series tractors
Patriot® series sprayers
“CAN-B” Axial-Flow® 10/20/30/40/50 series
combines
Axial-Flow® 88 series combines
“RS-232A” Axial-Flow® 21/2300 series combines
prior to 2007 model year
Generic combines
“RS-232B” Not Used

3-46
 3 - SETUP

“Activation Code”
Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to view the second
“GPS Setup” screen.

Use the “Activation Code” window to activate options for

the GPS receiver such as:
• Real Time Kinematic (RTK) correction signal
• CenterPoint™RTX™ correction signal
• OmniSTAR® correction signal
• RangePoint™RTX™ correction signal
• xFill™ Premium backup correction signal
NOTE: Contact your CASE IH dealer for an activation
30
code. Your dealer will require the serial number of your RAIL14DSP1509BA

GPS receiver. The serial number of your GPS receiver

displays at the top of this window for your convenience.

Press the “Activation Code” window to access the al-

phanumeric keypad.

Use the keypad to input the activation code from your

CASE IH dealer.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the acti-

vation code.

Press the “Activate” button to enable signal correction.

A pop-up message displays: “Code Activated.”

Press the “OK” button to dismiss the message.

The newly activated feature is now available on the “GPS

Setup” screen.

RAIL14DSP1510BA 31

3-47
 3 - SETUP

“Correction Type”
Use the “Correction Type” window to select the DGPS
correction technology that is in use.
• If an AFS 162, 252, 262, or 372 receiver (or an equiv-
alent Trimble® receiver) is in use, the software auto-
matically detects the type of DGPS correction in use
and displays it in the “Correction Type” window.
• If another brand of GPS receiver is in use, the “Correc-
tion Type” window does not display. These receivers
may be used as long as they provide valid GPS input to
the system.
NOTE: If you have an AFS 162, 252, 262, or 372 re-
ceiver (or an equivalent Trimble® receiver) and the “Cor-
rection Type” window does not display on the “GPS Setup” RAIL14DSP1522BA 32
screen, make sure that the “Connection Type” window has
the correct option selected. If the “Correction Type” win-
dow still does not display, check the connection to the
GPS receiver and reboot the display.

Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up

options window.
NOTE: The pop-up options window only includes the
types of correction signal that have been activated for
your receiver. The “Autonomous” option (no correction)
and the “WAAS/EGNOS” option are available without ac-
tivation. Other options display only if they are activated.

Press the correction type that you wish to use.

The setting in the “Correction Type” window determines
which additional windows display on the “GPS Setup”
screen.
• “RTK”: see 3-49
• “CenterPoint RTX”: see 3-71
• “OmniSTAR”: see 3-81
• “RangePoint RTX”: see 3-91
• “WAAS/EGNOS”: see 3-93
• “Autonomous”: see 3-94

3-48
 3 - SETUP

Real Time Kinematic (RTK) setup

There are two possible sources for RTK signal on a vehicle:
• Radio (AgGPS®): receives signal from a data radio at a local base station
• Modem: receives signal from a wireless connection via a network of municipally or privately owned reference sta-
tions
Use the “Correction Type” window to select the correction
technology that you intend to use.

Press the “Correction Type” window to display the pop-up

options window.
NOTE: The pop-up options window only includes the
types of correction that have been activated for your
receiver.

Press “RTK” in the options window.

RAIL16DSP0819BA 1

A pop-up message displays: “Correction level indicates

the source being used to receive the DGPS correction
signal. Press OK to close this pop up and to use the
Correction Level window.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL16DSP0820BA 2

Use the “Correction Level” window to establish how

the vehicle will receive the RTK correction signal. The
possible options are:
• “AgGPS Radio”
• “Modem”

Press the “Correction Level” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the correct option for your configuration.

RAIL16DSP0850BA 3

Each configuration has unique setup requirements that are described below.

Information about the windows that are common to both configurations – “Backup Source” and “Scintillation Mode” –
is at the end of this section.

3-49
 3 - SETUP

AgGPS® radio with base station

RCIL11DSP004GBG 4
Base station components

The base station consists of a GPS receiver with a small display screen (1), a GPS disk antenna (2), an RTK radio (3)
and a broadcast antenna (4) for communicating with multiple autoguidance-equipped vehicles (5) at the same time.

The autoguidance-equipped vehicle has its own GPS receiver for the GPS signal and a radio receiver to receive the
local information from the base station.

The tripod (6) is an optional, portable solution for locating the base station at a consistent location in a field during field
work. An alternative might be as simple as a steel post driven into the ground at a location where it will be available
from season to season without being disturbed.

A radio repeater (7) is also shown. This is a solution for extending the base station output around a large obstruction.
NOTE: The base station must be set up and operating before a successful connection between the vehicle and the
base station is possible.

3-50
 3 - SETUP

Some planning is needed to pick the optimal location or

locations for the base station(s) during field work. Your
CASE IH dealer is available to assist you with a site sur-
vey.

The GPS antenna is The component that requires the

most attention when picking locations.

For maximum repeatability and accuracy:

• install the GPS antenna at a height and field location
that will not change from one season to the next
• ensure that the GPS antenna is level

The RTK broadcast antenna, mounted with the same

bracket as the GPS antenna, is second in importance
since it must remain in communication with the vehicle
throughout the field. The location of the GPS receiver,
case, and battery power supply are a matter of conve-
nience.

Consider these factors when choosing field positions for

the base station:
• The position must be away from vehicle traffic patterns
to prevent accidental contact.
• The position must be repeatable – easily located from
season to season, year to year. RCPH11DSP017BAG 5

• Imagine the position through the entire growing season

when there may be tall standing crop between the loca-
tion and vehicle.
• The support for the GPS antenna must be sturdy and
solid, to prevent movement and tipping from normal
wind or rain during field work.
• The position must offer a clear view of the sky, away
from or above buildings or other large objects that can
reflect signals.
• The position must offer clear communication between
the broadcast radio antenna and the receiver on the
vehicle throughout the field. In general, use line of sight
as a guide. If you cannot see the radio receiver on
the vehicle when it is at the lowest point of a field or
behind a rise from the GPS antenna height position, the
broadcast may be lost at those locations.

Finally, test a location before you commit to it. Base sta-

tion components are portable and lend themselves to ex-
perimentation.

3-51
 3 - SETUP

The base station has an Autobase function which allows

it to determine the GPS coordinates for the receiver’s
current position. Once it determines its GPS location, it
stores that information in the base station.

Each time the base station is moved to a new location,

Autobase is used to save the GPS coordinates for that
position.

When the base station is returned to a previously saved

position, it searches its library for stored locations and
loads the correct coordinate file. Autobase is no longer
required for known locations.

At each new location, the operator must provide the base

station with the correct GPS antenna height before Auto-
base can be used. Measure antenna height (h) from the
ground to the base of the GPS antenna. Enter the value
with the keypad on the base station.

Refer to the base station operator’s manual for additional

information.

RCPH11DSP018BAG 6

When you select “AgGPS Radio” in the “Correction

Level” window, the screen updates with additional
windows for radio-based RTK correction:
• “Channel ID”
• “RTK Security”
• “Backup Source”

Press the “Channel ID ” window to access the numeric

keypad.
NOTE: The base station operator should provide you with
the current channel ID for the base station.

RAIL16DSP0822BA 7

Use the keypad to enter the correct ID number.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the setting.

RAIL16DSP0823BA 8

3-52
 3 - SETUP

If the “Channel ID” window displays the message “No Ra-

dio,” and the window cannot be selected, the NAV II/NAV
III navigation controller cannot communicate with the RTK
radio on the vehicle to retrieve its current network ID set-
ting.

This may be caused by a missing or loose cable or a port

configuration problem.

Contact your CASE IH dealer.

RAIL16DSP0824BA 9

You must input a subscription key to communicate with

any base station that is configured to use RTK security.
This key should be provided by the operator of the base
station.

Press the “Edit” button in the “RTK Security” window to

access the “RTK Security” pop-up window.

RAIL16DSP0822BA 10

The “RTK Security” pop-up window displays.

Press the “Key #1” window to access the alphanumeric

keypad.

RAIL16DSP0825BA 11

3-53
 3 - SETUP

Use the keypad to enter the subscription key for the base
station.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the key.

RAIL16DSP0555BA 12

If the RTK security key is not 16 characters, a message

displays: “RTK security key must be exactly 16 charac-
ters.”

Press the “Ok” button to acknowledge the message and

return to the keypad.

Enter a 16 character RTK security key.

RAIL16DSP0556BA 13

A green check displays beside the key

when the following three conditions are
true:
• The subscription key is correct.
• The subscription key is current (not
expired).
• The GPS receiver is connected to the
base station.

RAIL16DSP0826BA 14

3-54
 3 - SETUP

A black “X” displays beside the key if it is

not valid. If the key does not match the
key provided by the base station operator,
press the “Key #1” window to correct
it. Otherwise, contact the base station
operator for the correct key.

RAIL16DSP0827BA 15

A red exclamation point displays beside

the key if it is expired. Contact the base
station operator for the current key.

RAIL16DSP0828BA 16

Use the remaining windows in the “RTK Security” pop-up

window to enter subscription keys for up to four additional
base stations.

RAIL16DSP0829BA 17

3-55
 3 - SETUP

You can view the expiration date for each subscription key
in the “RTK Security” pop-up window.

Press the window at the bottom of the “RTK Security” win-

dow (1) to access the pop-up options window.

Press “Expiration Date” (2).

RAIL16DSP0830BA 18

An expiration date displays for each subscription key. The

dates shown are provided by the base station and cannot
be changed by the operator.

RAIL16DSP0842BA 19

You can also provide an optional description for each RTK

subscription key.

Press the window at the bottom of the “RTK Security” win-

dow (1) to access the pop-up options window.

Press “Key Description” (2).

RAIL16DSP0832BA 20

3-56
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Key #1” window to access the alphanumeric

keypad.

RAIL16DSP0833BA 21

Use the keypad to enter a description for the key.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the de-

scription.

Repeat this process for each key.

RAIL16DSP0555BA 22

Press the “OK” button on the “RTK Security” pop-up win-

dow to save the values.

RAIL16DSP0834BA 23

3-57
 3 - SETUP

Modem
NOTE: The modem must be properly installed in the cab
of the vehicle per the instructions that accompany the unit.
NOTE: Use this option to set up CenterPoint™ VRS cor-
rection.

When you select “Modem” in the “Correction Level” win-

dow, a pop-up message displays: “Modem transmits with
significant power that may harm personnel close to the
antenna. Locate the antenna at least 20 cm (8 in) away
from operator.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL16DSP0835BA 24

The screen updates with additional windows for AM53 modem

modem-based RTK correction:
• “Correction Format” (1) ( AM53 modem only)
• “NTRIP Account” (2)
• “Backup Source” (3)
• “GPRS Settings” (4)( DCM-300 modem only)

RAIL16DSP0837BA 25

DCM-300 modem

RAIL16DSP0836BA 26

3-58
 3 - SETUP

If you have an AM53 modem and the “Correction Format”

window is not visible, the display is unable to detect a mo-
dem on the Controller Area Network (CAN). As a result,
the “GPS Setup” screen provides only the required win-
dows for a DCM-300 modem, which does not communi-
cate with the display via CAN.

If your AM53 modem is not detected on the CAN,

navigate to the “CAN Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics
> CAN) and check the status of the controller “Modem.”
• If the modem is offline, verify that the CAN profile is as-
signed to the modem and check the CAN connections.
• If the modem is online, return to the “GPS Setup”
screen. If the “Correction Format” window is still miss-
ing, verify that you have a subscription for NTRIP or
RAIL16DSP0843BA 27
NTRIP plus telematics.
If you have an AM53 modem, use the “Correction
Format” window to choose the format of the correction
data stream. The available options are:
• “CMR” - Use this option for CMR or CMR+ streams.
• “RTCM” - Use this option for RTCM version 2 or RTCM
version 3 streams.
• “RTK Link”- Use this option for CMR or CMR+ streams.

Press the “Correction Format” window to access the

pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0837BA 28

Press the correct format for your correction data stream.

RAIL16DSP0841BA 29

3-59
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Edit” button in the “NTRIP Account” window to

access the “Modem Setup” pop-up window.

RAIL16DSP0837BA 30

Input the network information from the network provider.

Press the “OK” button to save the values to the display’s

memory.

RAIL16DSP0838BA 31

If you have a DCM-300 modem, press the “Edit” button in

the “GPRS Settings” window to access the “GPRS Set-
tings” pop-up window.
NOTE: If the modem has been properly configured, the
“GPRS Settings” window auto-fills with settings stored on
the modem's Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card.

RAIL16DSP0836BA 32

3-60
 3 - SETUP

A pop-up message displays: “Entering an incorrect CPIN

value may disable your modem. Do not change the CPIN
value unless directed by your cellular provider.”

Press the ”OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL16DSP0839BA 33

Press each window to access an alphanumeric keypad.

Enter the settings issued by your cellular provider.

Press the “OK” button to save the new values.

RAIL16DSP0840BA 34

3-61
 3 - SETUP

“Backup Source” (xFill™ correction signal)

NOTE: xFill™ technology is available for the RTK correc-
tion type regardless of whether your vehicle uses a radio
or a modem for RTK signal.

The AFS 372 GNSS receiver supports xFill™

technology. During RTK signal interruptions, xFill™
keeps the RTK solution in fixed mode while maintaining
a high level of accuracy.
• Up to 20 min of extended RTK operation keeps you in
the field longer with fewer interruptions.
• The transition to xFill™ mode is seamless, as is the
transition back to RTK once the correction signal has
been restored.

xFill™ technology is able to maintain a relatively high

35
level of precision throughout the RTK outage period. RAIL16DSP0822BA

However, accuracy will slowly decrease over time:

xFill™ run time (no RTK Estimated error

correction)
1 – 5 min + 1 – 5 cm (0.4 – 2 in)
6 – 10 min + 5 – 9 cm (2 – 3.5 in)
11 – 20 min + 10 – 15 cm (4 – 6 in)

Press the “Backup Source” window to access the pop-up

options window.
NOTE: If the “Backup Source” window is missing from
this screen, make sure that your AFS 372 GNSS receiver
firmware is at version 3.0 or higher.
Press “xFill.”

RAIL16DSP0844BA 36

3-62
 3 - SETUP

When xFill™ mode is enabled, the “xFill Setup Options”

window and the “xFill Setup” window display.

The “xFill Setup Options” window determines the

behavior of the “xFill Setup” window.
• If “Preset” is selected, the “xFill Setup” window allows
you to select the xFill™ satellite frequency from a list
of preset options.
• If “Custom” is selected, the “xFill Setup” window allows
you to enter the xFill™ satellite frequency with a nu-
meric keypad. Because the xFill™ satellite frequen-
cies are subject to change, you may need to enter an
xFill™ satellite frequency that is not available in the list
of preset frequencies.
• If “Auto” is selected, the receiver automatically detects RAIL19PLM0005AA 37
your location. It then automatically selects the correct
preset from the existing list of presets, and configures
the receiver accordingly.

Press the “xFill Setup Options” window to access the

pop-up options window.
Press the desired setting.

RAIL19PLM0004AA 38

• If you set the “xFill Setup Options” window to “Custom,”

a pop-up message displays: “These settings should
only be modified by an Advanced user. Refer to the
software operating guide for correct operation.”

Press the “Accept” button (1) to acknowledge the mes-

sage and use a custom xFill™ satellite frequency.
Press the “Cancel” button (2) to acknowledge the mes-
sage and use a preset xFill™ satellite frequency.

RAIL19PLM0020AA 39

3-63
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Edit” button in the “xFill Setup” window to ac-

cess the “xFill Setup” pop-up window.

RAIL19PLM0005AA 40

• If the “xFill Setup Options” window is set to “Preset,” use

the “xFill Satellite Frequency” window (1) and the “xFill
Baud Rate” window (2) to select the correct satellite
frequency and baud rate for your region. Refer to the
below table:

Region Satellite Baud rate

frequency
North America 1555.8080 MHz 2400 Bd
South/Central 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd
America
Europe/Africa 1545.4900 MHz 2400 Bd
Central Asia 1545.5300 MHz 600 Bd
Asia Pacific 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd

RAIL19PLM0007AA 41

Use the “xFill Datum Select” window to select the co-

ordinate system with which your base station was sur-
veyed. With the correct coordinate system selected, the
AFS 372 GNSS receiver translates your position and
minimizes drift. If your base station was properly sur-
veyed within the last five years, the xFill™ error will
typically be less than 15 cm (6 in) over 20 min.

Press the “xFill Datum Select” window (1) to access the

pop-up options window.
The available options are:
○ “WGS84”
○ “ITFR2008”
○ “NAD83”
RAIL19PLM0007AA 42
○ “ETRS89”
○ “GDA94”
Press the correct coordinate system.
Press the “OK” button (2) to save the new values.

3-64
 3 - SETUP

• If the “xFill Setup Options” window is set to “Custom,”

use the “xFill Satellite Frequency” window (1) to enter a
custom xFill™ satellite frequency with a numeric key-
pad. Press the “Accept” button (2) to save the new
value.

RAIL16DSP0849BA 43

If the “xFill Setup Options” window is set to “Auto (1),” the

receiver automatically detects your location. The receiver
then automatically selects from the list of presets and con-
figures itself accordingly.

In “Auto” mode the button In the “xFill Setup” window, is a

“View” button (2) instead of an “Edit” button.

Press the “View” button (2) to see the automatically con-

figured frequency and baud rate settings.

RAIL19PLM0029AA 44

Configure the “xFill Datum Select” option according to the

instructions given above.

RAIL19PLM0030AA 45

3-65
 3 - SETUP

An icon in the status and warning icon area indicates the

status of xFill™:

The xFill™ icon displays when xFill™ is

actively providing correction signal.

When the time remaining for xFill™ is

less than 4 min, the icon flashes and a
pop-up message displays: “xFill will expire
in less than 4 minutes. GPS quality will be
degraded after this time elapses.”

xFill™ expires after 20 min without

reconnecting to the base station or RTK
network. When this happens, the “GPS”
icon displays in the status and warning
icon area to indicate that there is no active
correction signal.

xFill™ Premium
The subscription-based xFill™ Premium option allows
unlimited use of xFill™ correction signal.
NOTE: See your CASE IH dealer for an xFill™ Premium
activation code. Use the “Activation Code” window on
the “GPS Setup” screen to activate the xFill™ Premium
option.

The xFill™ Premium option adds the “xFill Premium Op-

tions” window to the second page of the “GPS Setup”
screen.

The “xFill Premium Options” window allows you to select

among three operating modes:
• “Auto” - This operating mode enables xFill™ correc-
tion signal automatically whenever the RTK signal is
RAIL16DSP0572BA 46
degraded. This operating mode is identical to the free
xFill™ option, but is not limited to 20 min of continuous
usage.
• “Manual” - This operating mode allows you to enable
and disable xFill™ correction signal manually.
• “Time” - This operating mode enables xFill™ correction
signal at a specific time of day (chosen by the operator)
for a specific duration (also chosen by the operator).
Use this operating mode when RTK correction signal is
degraded at a predictable time each day.

Press the “xFill Premium Options” window to access the

pop-up options window.

3-66
 3 - SETUP

Press the desired option.

RAIL16DSP0573BA 47

• If you select “Auto” in the “xFill Premium Options” win-

dow, no additional setup is required.

The software automatically changes to xFill™ correc-

tion signal during RTK signal interruptions.

RAIL16DSP0572BA 48

• If you select “Manual” in the “xFill Premium Options”

window, no additional setup is required.

Use the latching button in the “xFill Premium (Manual)”

window to enable or disable xFill™ correction signal as
required.
NOTE: The “xFill Premium (Manual)” window is also avail-
able as a window in the run screens. If you wish to con-
figure a run screen with the “xFill Premium (Manual)” win-
dow, use the “Layout” screen.

RAIL16DSP0574BA 49

3-67
 3 - SETUP

• If you select “Time” in the “xFill Premium Options” win-

dow, a pop-up message displays: “Verify that the Hour
and Minute settings are correct in the Toolbox Display
Setup screen before adjusting xFill Premium start and
stop times.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

Verify the settings in the “Hour” window (1), the “Minute”
window (2), and the “Day/Night” window (3) on the “Dis-
play Setup” screen (Home > Toolbox > Disp).

RAIL16DSP0575BA 50

RAIL16DSP0576BA 51

After you verify the time settings on the “Display Setup”

screen, use the “xFill Premium (Time)” window to set
the period of time that you wish to use xFill™ correction
signal each day.
Press the “Edit” button in the “xFill Premium (Time)” win-
dow.

RAIL16DSP0577BA 52

3-68
 3 - SETUP

Use the pop-up window to select the time that you wish
to start using xFill™ correction signal each day (1) and
the time that you wish to stop using xFill™ correction
signal each day (2).
Press the “OK” button (3) to save the settings.
The software automatically changes to xFill™ correc-
tion signal during the selected period of time each day.

RAIL16DSP0578BA 53

The xFill™ Premium icon displays in the

status and warning icon area when xFill™
Premium is actively providing correction
signal.

3-69
 3 - SETUP

“Scintillation Mode”
NOTE: The “Scintillation Mode” window is available for the
RTK correction type regardless of whether your vehicle
uses a radio or a modem for RTK signal.

Use the “Scintillation Mode” window to enable additional

compensation for ionospheric scintillation. As signal from
a satellite passes through the earth’s ionosphere, elec-
trons cause refraction in the signal. The effect of this
refraction can be significant. Ionospheric scintillation is
most prevalent in equatorial regions and polar regions.
Enable this feature as required by your location and oper-
ating conditions.
NOTE: Operators outside of equatorial regions should
leave this window set to “Disable.”

Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to access the sec- RAIL14DSP1554BA 54
ond “GPS Setup” screen.

Press the “Scintillation Mode” window to access the

pop-up options window.
Press the desired option.

RAIL14DSP1555BA 55

3-70
 3 - SETUP

CenterPoint™ RTX™ setup

Select CenterPoint™ RTX™
NOTE: You must enter a valid activation code for CenterPoint™RTX™ in the “Activation Code” window before you
continue.
Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up
options window.

Press “CenterPoint RTX.”

RAIL14DSP1558BA 1

The following windows appear on the screen:

• “Correction Level”
• “Position Recall”
• “Converge Distance”

RAIL14DSP1559BA 2

Correction level
Use the “Correction Level” window to establish how the
vehicle will receive the CenterPoint™RTX™ correction
signal. The possible options are:
• “RTX/Sat-Std” (satellite, standard convergence)
• “RTX/Sat-Fast” (satellite, fast convergence)
• “RTX/Modem-Std” (modem, standard convergence)
NOTE: The pop-up options list only includes the options
that are activated.

Press the “Correction Level” window to access the pop-up

options window.
RAIL14DSP1559BA 3

3-71
 3 - SETUP

Press the desired option in the list.

RAIL14DSP1560BA 4

RTX setup options

Press the menu bar in the “RTX Setup Options” window.
The “RTX Setup Options” menu appears.

RAIL19PLM0018AA 5

Using presets for RTX setup

Press “Preset.” The “Edit” button in the “RTX Setup” win-
dow appears.

RAIL19PLM0017AA 6

3-72
 3 - SETUP

If you selected “RTX/Sat-Std” or “RTX/Sat-Fast,” the “RTX

Setup” and “RTX Setup Options” windows display.

Press the “Edit” button in the “RTX Setup” window to ac-

cess the pop-up “RTX Setup” window.

RAIL19PLM0018AA 7

Use the “RTX Satellite Frequency” window and the “RTX

Baud Rate” window to select the correct satellite fre-
quency and baud rate for your region. Refer to the below
table:

Region Satellite Baud rate

frequency
North America 1555.8080 MHz 2400 Bd
South/Central 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd
America
Europe/Africa 1545.4900 MHz 2400 Bd
Central Asia 1545.5300 MHz 600 Bd
Asia Pacific 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd

Press the “OK” button to save the entered information to

the display’s memory. RAIL19PLM0022AA 8

Custom RTX setup

You normally use the presets that already exist in the soft-
ware to set up RTX. However, the software provides an
option to customize the setup.

Press “Custom” in the “RTX Setup Options” menu. A

“Warning!” window appears.

RAIL19PLM0017AA 9

3-73
 3 - SETUP

The “Warning!” window states, “These settings should

only be modified by an advanced user. Refer to the
software operating guide for correct operation.”

Press the “Accept” button (1) to continue with a custom

setup. The custom dialog window appears.

Press the “Cancel” button (2) to cancel the custom setup.

RAIL19PLM0020AA 10

Press the “RTX Satellite Frequency” field. A keypad ap-

pears.

RAIL19PLM0027AA 11

Enter the desired satellite frequency. When you press

the “Enter” key, the keypad disappears and uncovers the
custom dialog window.

RAIL19PLM0028AA 12

3-74
 3 - SETUP

Press the “RTX Baud Rate” drop-down menu. The “RTX

Baud Rate” menu appears.

RAIL19PLM0027AA 13

Press the desired baud rate. The “RTX Baud Rate” menu
disappears and uncovers the custom dialog window.

RAIL19PLM0023AA 14

The custom dialog window shows the selected settings.

Press the “OK” button to accept the settings.

Press the “Cancel” button to cancel the custom setup.

RAIL19PLM0027AA 15

3-75
 3 - SETUP

Auto RTX setup

If the “RTX Setup Options” window is set to “Auto (1),” the
receiver automatically detects your location. The receiver
then automatically selects from the list of presets and con-
figures itself accordingly.

In “Auto” mode the button In the “RTX Setup” window, is

a “View” button (2) instead of an “Edit” button.

Press the “View” button (2) if you wish to see the automat-
ically configured frequency and baud rate settings.

RAIL19PLM0031AA 16

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the automatic pre-

sets.

RAIL19PLM0026AA 17

Converge distance
Use the “Converge Distance” window with RTX™ correc-
tion signal to reduce the convergence time associated
with this technology. The setting in this window affects
the signal accuracy required for initial convergence: the
system continues to converge to the full signal accuracy
of RTX™ technology, but the system becomes available
for use earlier.

Converge distance is the distance that Center-

Point™RTX™ uses to establish the location of a point
while converging. The system default is 0.102 m (4.0 in).
Increasing the distance allows the system to be ready for
use earlier, but with less accuracy.
RAIL19PLM0522BA 18
If the planned work does not require the highest level of
accuracy, increase the converge distance so that the sys-
tem will be available for use earlier. If the planned work
does require great accuracy, set the “Converge Distance”
window to the default value of 0.102 m (4 in). In both
cases, the system will ultimately converge to the full ac-
curacy of CenterPoint™RTX™ technology.
NOTE: Do not confuse the converge distance with the
accuracy of the technology.

3-76
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Converge Distance” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.

Use the keypad to enter a new converge distance. Ac-

ceptable values are 0.1 – 1 m (4 – 39 in).

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

RAIL14DSP1563BA 19

Position recall
Position recall is used with CenterPoint™RTX™ technol-
ogy to reduce convergence time.

To enable this feature, press the “Position Recall” window.

The pop-up options window displays.

RAIL19PLM0522BA 20

Press “Enable” to enable position recall.

RAIL14DSP1564BA 21

3-77
 3 - SETUP

When position recall is enabled, the system automatically

saves the current GPS location of the vehicle – specif-
ically, the receiver – before the ignition switch is turned
OFF. When the ignition switch is turned ON again, the
saved GPS location is used to restart the converging
process. Using the last known GPS coordinates reduces
the signal convergence time.

To take advantage of this feature:

• You must turn the system OFF while the signal is al-
ready converged to less than 5.0 cm (2.0 in). If the ve-
hicle is left in the field or an open outdoor area at the end
of the work session, the current coordinates are saved.
If the vehicle is moved inside a building, the signal is
blocked and no coordinates are saved. If the vehicle is
always powered down inside a building, position recall RAIL19PLM0522BA 22

should not be enabled since it will not reduce conver-

gence time.
• You must not move the vehicle—not even a short dis-
tance—between the time you turn the ignition switch
OFF and the time that initialization is complete.
NOTE: Initialization is not the same as convergence.
With position recall enabled, do NOT move the vehicle
until you check system status when the vehicle is turned
ON.

After the display starts up, an information message dis-

plays: “In progress, please wait. Do not move [the] vehicle
until complete or convergence time will be increased. Has
the vehicle been moved since [the system was] turned
off?

You must answer this question correctly. Failure to do so

may prevent the system from converging at all.

RAIL14DSP1566BA 23

• If the vehicle was moved, press the “Yes” button to clear

the message. Convergence will occur without position
recall. A message displays: “RTX convergence has
been restarted. A full convergence time can be ex-
pected. You may move the vehicle in the meantime.”

RAIL14DSP1567BA 24

3-78
 3 - SETUP

• If the vehicle was NOT moved, press the “No.” button.

Convergence will occur with the time saving of position
recall.

An icon flashes in the status and warning

icon area to remind the operator that the
vehicle must not be moved.

NOTE: If you accidentally answer the question incorrectly,

reset the convergence process with the “RTX Conver-
gence” window on the “GPS Status” screen (Home > Di-
agnostics > GPS).

RAIL14DSP1566BA 25

When the initialization process is complete, another mes-

sage displays: “You may now move the vehicle.”

This message does NOT mean that the signal is con-

verged, but rather that you can move the vehicle without
interrupting the ongoing signal convergence.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

RAIL14DSP1568BA 26

If position recall fails, the system automatically restarts the

convergence process.

Use the ”Reset” button in the “RTX Convergence”

window on the “GPS Status” screen to manually reset
the position calculation if:
You answered “No” at the initial recall message, but
then discover that the vehicle was moved

OR

• The “DGPS Convergence” bar graph window on the

“GPS Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics > GPS) does
not indicate any progress for 10 – 20 min
NOTE: If the bar graph in the “RTX Convergence” window
is progressing toward 100%, do not reset the process. If RAIL14DSP1569BA 27

the bar graph is stopped at a low percentage, reset the

process.

3-79
 3 - SETUP

Go to the “GPS Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics >

GPS) to reset the convergence process.

Press the “Reset” button to restart the convergence

process.

RAIL14DSP1570BA 28

3-80
 3 - SETUP

OmniSTAR® setup
For systems using DGPS correction, the GPS receiver is
initially configured to match the OmniSTAR® subscription
service selected for your system.

The four subscription choices available from

OmniSTAR® are:
• OmniSTAR® VBS - Available in most regions excluding
some areas in the extreme north
• OmniSTAR® HP - Available in many regions, but not
all
• OmniSTAR® XP - Available worldwide
• OmniSTAR® G2 - Available worldwide

With a subscription to OmniSTAR® XP, OmniSTAR® HP,

or OmniSTAR® G2, the system supports operating with
automatic VBS backup or manual backup.
NOTE: This software operating guide may refer to
RCIL11DSP327BBG 1
“OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2” to avoid duplicating operating
instructions. OmniSTAR® HP, OmniSTAR® XP, and
OmniSTAR® G2 are separate subscriptions with differ-
ent costs and accuracy levels, and you choose only one.
In terms of display operation, though, they are identical.
Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up
options window.

Press “Omnistar.”

RAIL14DSP1575BA 2

A pop-up message displays: “Correction level indicates

the source being used to receive the DGPS correction
signal. Press OK to close this pop up and to use the
Correction Level window.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

RAIL14DSP1576BA 3

3-81
 3 - SETUP

OmniSTAR® VBS setup

Press the “Correction Level” window to access the pop-up
options window.

RAIL14DSP1577BA 4

Press “VBS” in the options window.

OmniSTAR® VBS correction requires no further setup.

RAIL14DSP1578BA 5

3-82
 3 - SETUP

OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 setup

Press the “Correction Level” window to access the pop-up
options window.

RAIL14DSP1577BA 6

Press “HP/XP/G2" in the options window.

NOTE: You do not need to distinguish among the differ-
ent OmniSTAR® correction signals. After you make this
selection, your GPS receiver and display will operate with
the correction signal to which you subscribe.

RAIL14DSP1578BA 7

When OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 correction is in use,

additional setup windows display:
• “DGPS Backup”
• “Position Recall”
• “Converge Distance”
• “Convergence Status”

RAIL14DSP1513BA 8

3-83
 3 - SETUP

“DGPS Backup” (automatic backup with

VBS signal)
To overcome the long convergence time or sometimes
degraded signal associated with OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2
correction, precision farming systems offer OmniSTAR®
VBS correction as backup to OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2
enabled receivers.
• While OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 is converging, the sys-
tem uses OmniSTAR® VBS correction to enable field
operation with DGPS in the meantime.
• If the OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 signal degrades, the sys-
tem uses OmniSTAR® VBS correction as a backup.

Press the “DGPS Backup” window to access the pop-up RAIL14DSP1513BA 9

options window.
Press “VBS” to enable backup.

Press “None” to turn backup OFF.

When you use the “Precision Farming” application with-

out the “Autoguidance” application, the transition between
OmniSTAR® VBS and OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 is seam-
less with no notification when the change occurs. The
“GPS Status” window reports which technology is cur-
rently in use.

RAIL14DSP1580BA 10

If the “Autoguidance” application is present, messages

inform you when the correction type changes from Om-
niSTAR® VBS to OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 or vice-versa.
The “GPS Status” window also reports which technology
is currently in use.

When you engage automatic steering for the first time

since the display was powered ON, if the OmniSTAR®
HP/XP/G2 signal is not converged, a message displays:
“Using VBS.” The message displays just once – when the
system engages.

RAIL14DSP1581BA 11

3-84
 3 - SETUP

When the OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 signal convergence

is complete, another message displays: “Switching to
HP/XP/G2.”

This message only displays when the signal switch oc-

curs.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.
NOTE: The actual change to OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2
correction occurs when the message displays.

The system automatically adjusts for any error between

the two methods when the switch occurs.

RAIL14DSP1582BA 12

If the OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 signal is lost but the Om-

niSTAR® VBS signal is still available, another message
displays: “Switching to VBS.”

This warning only displays when the signal switch occurs.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

The system automatically adjusts for any error between

the two methods when the switch occurs.
NOTE: At any time you can view which method of correc-
tion is in use by checking the “GPS Setup” screen (Home
> Toolbox > GPS).

RAIL14DSP1583BA 13

“Converge Distance”
Use the “Converge Distance” window with OmniSTAR®
HP/XP/G2 to reduce the convergence time associated
with this technology. The setting in this window affects the
signal accuracy required for initial convergence: the sys-
tem continues to converge to the full signal accuracy of
OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 technology, but the system be-
comes available for use earlier.

Converge distance is the distance that OmniSTAR®

HP/XP/G2 uses to establish the location of a point while
converging. The system default is 0.102 m (4.0 in).
Increasing the distance allows the system to be ready for
use earlier, but with less accuracy.
RAIL14DSP1513BA 14
If the planned work does not require the highest level of
accuracy, increase the converge distance so that the sys-
tem will be available for use earlier. If the planned work
does require great accuracy, set the “Converge Distance”
window to the default value of 0.102 m (4 in). In both
cases, the system will ultimately converge to the full ac-
curacy of OmniSTAR® HP/XP/G2 technology.
NOTE: Do not confuse the converge distance with the
accuracy of the technology.

Press the “Converge Distance” window to access the nu-

meric keypad.

3-85
 3 - SETUP

Use the keypad to enter a new converge distance. Ac-

ceptable values are 0.1 – 1 m (4 – 39 in).

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

RAIL14DSP1588BA 15

“Convergence Status”
Use the “Convergence Status” window to set the units in
the “HP/XP Convergence” bar graph window on the “GPS
Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics > GPS).

Press the “Convergence Status” window to access the

pop-up options window.

RAIL14DSP1589BA 16

3-86
 3 - SETUP

• Press “Percent” to have the “HP/XP Convergence” bar

graph window report convergence progress from 0% to
100% (1) .
• Press “Value” to have the “HP/XP Convergence” bar
graph window report convergence progress in the unit
of length selected during operator setup (meters or
inches) (2).

RAIL14DSP1590BA 17

RAIL14DSP1591BA 18

“Position Recall”
Position recall is used with the HP/XP/G2 technology to
reduce the convergence time associated with these tech-
nologies. Position recall can be used independently or
with VBS backup.

Press the “Position Recall” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL14DSP1513BA 19

3-87
 3 - SETUP

Press “Enable” to enable position recall.

RAIL14DSP1592BA 20

When position recall is enabled, the system automatically

saves the current GPS location of the vehicle – specif-
ically, the receiver – before the ignition switch is turned
OFF. When the ignition switch is turned ON again, the
saved GPS location is used to restart the converging
process. Using the last known GPS coordinates reduces
the signal convergence time.

To take advantage of this feature:

• You must turn the system OFF while the signal is al-
ready converged to less than 5.0 cm (2.0 in). If the ve-
hicle is left in the field or an open outdoor area at the end
of the work session, the current coordinates are saved.
If the vehicle is moved inside a building, the signal is
blocked and no coordinates are saved. If the vehicle is
always powered down inside a building, position recall RAIL14DSP1593BA 21
should not be enabled since it will not reduce conver-
gence time.
• You must not move the vehicle—not even a short dis-
tance—between the time you turn the ignition switch
OFF and the time that initialization is complete.
NOTE: Initialization is not the same as convergence.
With position recall enabled, do NOT move the vehicle
until you check system status when the vehicle is turned
ON.

After the display starts up, an information message dis-

plays: “In progress, please wait. Do not move [the] vehicle
until complete or convergence time will be increased. Has
the vehicle been moved since [the system was] turned
off?

You must answer this question correctly. Failure to do so

may prevent the system from converging at all.

RAIL14DSP1584BA 22

3-88
 3 - SETUP

• If the vehicle was moved, press the “Yes” button to clear

the message. Convergence will occur without position
recall. A message displays: “HP/XP/G2 convergence
has been restarted. A full convergence time can be
expected. You may move the vehicle in the meantime.”

RAIL14DSP1585BA 23

• If the vehicle was NOT moved, press the “No.” button.

Convergence will occur with the time saving of position
recall.

An icon flashes in the status and warning

icon area to remind the operator that the
vehicle must not be moved.

NOTE: If you accidentally answer the question incorrectly,

reset the convergence process with the “HP/XP Conver-
gence” window on the “GPS Status” screen (Home > Di-
agnostics > GPS).

RAIL14DSP1590BA 24

When the initialization process is complete, another mes-

sage displays: “You may now move the vehicle.”

This message does NOT mean that the signal is con-

verged, but rather that you can move the vehicle without
interrupting the ongoing signal convergence.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

RAIL14DSP1586BA 25

3-89
 3 - SETUP

If position recall fails, the system automatically restarts the

convergence process.

Use the ”Reset” button in the “HP/XP Convergence”

window on the “GPS Status” screen to manually reset
the position calculation if:
You answered “No” at the initial recall message, but
then discover that the vehicle was moved

OR

• The “HP/XP Convergence” bar graph window on the

“GPS Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics > GPS) does
not indicate any progress for 10 – 20 min
NOTE: If the bar graph in the “HP/XP Convergence”
26
window is progressing toward 100%, do not reset the RAIL14DSP1587BA

process. If the bar graph is stopped at a low percentage,

reset the process.
Go to the “GPS Status” screen (Home > Diagnostics >
GPS) to reset the convergence process.

Press the “Reset” button to restart the convergence

process.

RAIL14DSP1590BA 27

3-90
 3 - SETUP

RangePoint™ RTX™ setup

NOTE: You must enter a valid activation code for RangePoint™RTX™ in the “Activation Code” window before you
continue.
Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up
options window.

Press “RangePoint RTX.”

RAIL14DSP1571BA 1

The ”RTX Setup” and “Converge Distance” windows are

added to the screen.

Press the “Edit” button in the “RTX Setup” window to ac-

cess the pop-up “RTX Setup” window.

RAIL14DSP1572BA 2

Use the “RTX Satellite Frequency” window and the “RTX

Baud Rate” window to select the correct satellite fre-
quency and baud rate for your region. Refer to the below
table:

Region Satellite Baud rate

frequency
North America 1555.8080 MHz 2400 Bd
South/Central 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd
America
Europe/Africa 1545.4900 MHz 2400 Bd
Central Asia 1545.5300 MHz 600 Bd
Asia Pacific 1539.8325 MHz 600 Bd

Press the “OK” button to save the entered information to

the display’s memory. RAIL19PLM0027AA 3

3-91
 3 - SETUP

Use the “Converge Distance” window with RTX™ correc-

tion signal to reduce the convergence time associated
with this technology. The setting in this window affects
the signal accuracy required for initial convergence: the
system continues to converge to the full signal accuracy
of RTX™ technology, but the system becomes available
for use earlier.

Converge distance is the distance that Range-

Point™RTX™ uses to establish the location of a point
while converging. The system default is 0.102 m (4.0 in).
Increasing the distance allows the system to be ready for
use earlier, but with less accuracy.

If the planned work does not require the highest level of

accuracy, increase the converge distance so that the sys-
RAIL14DSP1572BA 4
tem will be available for use earlier. If the planned work
does require great accuracy, set the “Converge Distance”
window to the default value of 0.102 m (4 in). In both
cases, the system will ultimately converge to the full ac-
curacy of RangePoint™RTX™ technology.
NOTE: Do not confuse the converge distance with the
accuracy of the technology.
Press the “Converge Distance” window to access the nu-
meric keypad.

Use the keypad to enter a new converge distance. Ac-

ceptable values are 0.1 – 1 m (4 – 39 in).

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

RAIL14DSP1574BA 5

3-92
 3 - SETUP

Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)/European Geostationary

Navigation Overlay System (EGNOS) setup
There are two regional correction signals that are
available at no cost and without a subscription. Your
AFS 162, 252, 262, or 372 receiver can use the
“WAAS/EGNOS” option without an activation code.
• In North America the Federal Aviation Administra-
tion developed the Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) to augment the Global Positioning System
(GPS).
• In Europe, the European Space Agency, the European
Commission, and EUROCONTROL developed the Eu-
ropean Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EG-
NOS) to augment the Global Positioning System (GPS).

Although these signals do improve the accuracy, integrity,

and availability of GPS, they are limited in reliability and
RAIL14DSP1556BA 1
repeatability over time when compared with the subscrip-
tion-based signals described in this manual.

Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press “WAAS/EGNOS” in the options window.

No additional setup is required for this correction type.

RAIL14DSP1557BA 2

3-93
 3 - SETUP

Autonomous (raw GPS) setup

The “Autonomous” selection is available for remote re-
gions of the globe where no corrected differential GPS
is available. When “Autonomous” is selected in the “Cor-
rection Type” window, the system uses raw, uncorrected
GPS for data collection and vehicle control.

While the pass-to-pass functionality for some farming op-

eration may be acceptable, any operation requiring ex-
act data collection and positioning will suffer. Obstacle
and boundary creation are not recommended when “Au-
tonomous” is selected. If there is any significant lapse of
time between their creation and further use, the obstacles
and boundary will shift significantly.

Press the “Correction Type” window to access the pop-up

options window.
RAIL14DSP1556BA 1

Press “Autonomous” in the options window.

No further setup is required for raw GPS.

3-94
 3 - SETUP

GPS setup for the AFS VectorPro receiver

On Magnum™ AFS Connect™ series tractors equipped with the AFS® Pro 1200 display, the AFS® Pro 700 display
can be used as a second display option. In this scenario, the AFS® Pro 700 display is used to control precision
farming functions on ISOBUS implements with the Universal Terminal (UT) and the Task Controller (TC). The AFS®
Pro 700 display is also used to control operation of the Case IHEarly Riser® planter with proprietary Case IH software.
To configure the display to operate with the AFS VectorPro
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) receiver:

On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access

the “Toolbox” screens.

NHIL19PLM0484AA 1

Press the “GPS” icon on the navigation bar to display the

“GPS Setup” screen.
NOTE: “Not Installed” is the default status for the “GPS
Location” window. When “Not Installed” is selected, no
receiver setup options or GPS “Run” screen windows are
available.

Select your vehicle model and receiver location from the

“GPS Location” window.

RAIL14DSP1500BA 2

3-95
 3 - SETUP

When the “GPS Model” window populates, select the

"AFS VectorPro” option.

When the “AFS VectorPro” option is selected for the

“GPS Model” window:
• The receiver location offsets will be set to zero.
• On the second page of the “GPS Setup” screen, the
“Connection Type” window will default to “CAN-B”.
• The “Guidance System” window on the “Precision
Farming Setup” tab is disabled.
• The GNSS-related User-Defined Windows (UDW) are
restricted. The only available UDW are “GPS Latitude”,
“GPS Longitude”, “GPS Altitude”, and “GPS Heading”.
• The “GPS” and “GPS2” tabs under the “Diagnostics” NHIL19PLM0485AA 3
icon are disabled and inaccessible.
• The “CAN” tab under the “Diagnostics” icon only dis-
plays the receiver status and source address.
•

The “GPS” and “DGPS” status icons will continue to main-

tain the status of the receiver.

3-96
 3 - SETUP

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: GPS AND RESOURCE STATUS

Introduction
This chapter continues information on the “Precision Farming” application and explains:
• The “GPS Status” screen
• The “Constellation Map” screen
• The “GPS Receiver” screen
• The “Resource Status” screen
On the “Home” screen, press the “Diagnostics” icon to
access the “Diagnostics” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

"GPS Status" screen

The type of correction enabled on the GPS receiver deter-
mines the content of the “GPS Status” screen. For exam-
ple, the convergence “Reset” button is only present when
the receiver is enabled for HP/XP/G2 or RTX™ correc-
tion.

The “GPS Status” screen contains multiple reporting

windows for:
• GPS receiver and signal state
• Vehicle position and heading
• Subscription status, if applicable
• Security status, if applicable

The windows are grouped on the “GPS Status” screen for

easy operator access. Most windows can be added to any RAIL14DSP1594BA 1

“Run” screen for operator convenience.

Press the “GPS” icon on the navigation bar to display the

“GPS Status” screen.

3-97
 3 - SETUP

“GPS Altitude”
Placement label: GPS Altitude

The “GPS Altitude” window reports the vehicle’s real-time

position as elevation above sea level. The value is re-
ported in meters or feet, depending on the units of mea-
surement selected.

RCIL11DSP363BBG 2

“GPS HDOP”
Placement label: GPS HDOP

The “GPS HDOP” window reports GPS signal quality

at the vehicle location. Horizontal Dilution Of Precision
(HDOP) indicates whether an object in the horizontal
plane between the vehicle and the correction message
source – for example, a tree grove, ridge line, or mountain
range – is going to be a problem. In general, any value
below 2 offers good working results.

RCIL11DSP364BBG 3

“GPS Heading”
Placement label: GPS Heading

The “GPS Heading” window reports the vehicle heading

in degrees within a possible 360° of direction of travel:
• 0° equals north
• 90° equals east
• 180° equals south
• 270° equals west

RCIL11DSP365BBG 4

“GPS Latitude”
Placement label: GPS Latitude

The “GPS Latitude” window reports the vehicle’s real-time

position in angular distance north or south of the earth’s
equator measured though 90°.

RCIL11DSP366BBG 5

3-98
 3 - SETUP

“GPS Longitude”
Placement label: GPS Longitude

The “GPS Longitude” window reports the vehicle’s real-

time position in angular distance expressed in degrees on
a circle of reference from the zero meridian.

RCIL11DSP367BBG 6

“GPS PDOP”
Placement label: GPS PDOP

The “GPS PDOP” window reports GPS signal quality

at the vehicle location. Position Dilution Of Precision
(PDOP) offers the best overview since it reflects the
geometry of the satellites above the vehicle. A low PDOP
means that the positioning of satellites is good and that
good positional accuracy can be expected. In general,
any value below 2 offers good working results.

RAIL14DSP1640BA 7

“DGPS SNR”
Placement label: DGPS SNR

The “DGPS SNR” window reports Signal-to-Noise Ratio

(SNR) at the vehicle’s location. SNR is a measure of sig-
nal strength against electrical background noise. A higher
SNR number provides better accuracy. Nominal values
for the various technologies used are:

GPS 6
WAAS/EGNOS 3+
OmniSTAR HP/XP/G2, VBS 7+

RCIL11DSP362BBG 8

3-99
 3 - SETUP

“GPS Status”
Placement label: GPS Status

The “GPS Status” window reports:

• The state of the GPS receiver
• The number of satellites in view
• The DGPS technology in use if the receiver is known
NOTE: The same window is repeated three times in these
illustrations to show the text for the various technologies.

During operation, the most common status message is a

variation on the DGPS-n message – “HP/XP-n,” “RTK-n,” RCIL11DSP370BBG 9
“VBS-n.” The message indicates:
• That the system is ready for use
• The number of satellites that are in view
• The type of correction that is in use

During startup, the most common message is “Wait-n.”

The message indicates:
• That the system is acquiring satellites
• The number of satellites that the system has acquired.

The table below explains the messages for the GPS Sta-
tus window, the associated icons for the status and warn-
ing icon area, and the meaning of each message. RCIL11DSP371BBG 10

RCIL11DSP373BBG 11

3-100
 3 - SETUP

GPS status
Message Status GPS Type Meaning
Icon
Indicator
Not Installed none Any receiver The “GPS Location” window
on the “GPS Setup” screen
is set to “Not Installed.”
GPS Offline Any receiver The “GPS Location” window
on the “GPS Setup” screen
is set to “Custom,” but
no data is detected from
the GPS receiver (and no
data is detected by the
NAV II/NAV III navigation
controller, if applicable).
Wait-n¹ Any receiver “N” satellites are in view.
GPS position is available.
There are not enough
satellites in view.
The system is not ready for
use.
No DGPS-n¹ Any receiver “N” satellites are in view.
GPS position is available.
DGPS position not
available.
²
DGPS-n¹ Any receiver “N” satellites are in view.
The system is ready for
use.

DGPS Init-n¹ Any receiver with type set to A backup DGPS type is
HP/XP/G2 or RTK being used while the signal
is acquired.
²
Fault-n¹ Any receiver These GPS receivers
should not produce this
GPS quality.
A fault condition is present.
²
Known receiver - These GPS types should
WAAS, Beacon, VBS not produce this GPS
quality.
A fault condition is present.
DGPS-n¹ Unknown receiver With an undeterminable
GPS receiver and
type, assuming RTK or
HP/XP/G2 is in use, a
GPS quality of 4 produces
“DGPS-n.”
RTK-n¹ Known receiver; The system is ready for use
type = RTK

¹ n = the number of satellites that are in view

² The icon flashes if “Yes” is selected in the “DGPS Alarm” window on the “GPS Setup” screen
³ Based on the condition above
Note: A “known” receiver is an AFS 162, AFS 252, AFS 262, or AFS 372 receiver (or a Trimble® AgGPS 252,
AgGPS 262, or AG-372 receiver). All other brands are considered “unknown.”

3-101
 3 - SETUP

Message Status GPS Type Meaning

Icon
Indicator
HP/XP-n¹ Known receiver; HP/XP/G2 is converged.
type = HP/XP/G2 The system is ready for
use.

No DGPS-n¹ Unknown receiver; If the GPS receiver

type = HP/XP/G2 or RTK and the GPS type are
undeterminable, GPS
quality of 5 produces “No
² DGPS-n.”
Known receiver; Only a GPS fix is available.
type = RTK
Known receiver; HP/XP/G2 is not
type = HP/XP/G2 converged. A GPS fix
is still available.
Fault-n¹ Any receiver; any GPS type A faulty or incompatible
GPS receiver is in use.

²
No RTK Base ³ Known receiver; The age of correction from
type = RTK the base station is greater
than 5 seconds.
No communication with
base station is possible.
The system is not ready for
use.
A GPS fix is available.
Service Exp ³ Known receiver; Your subscription for the
type=VBS or HP/XP/G2 current correction type has
expired.
No correction is available.
¹ n = the number of satellites that are in view
² The icon flashes if “Yes” is selected in the “DGPS Alarm” window on the “GPS Setup” screen
³ Based on the condition above
Note: A “known” receiver is an AFS 162, AFS 252, AFS 262, or AFS 372 receiver (or a Trimble® AgGPS 252,
AgGPS 262, or AG-372 receiver). All other brands are considered “unknown.”

3-102
 3 - SETUP

“DGPS Convergence”
Placement label: DGPS Converging

The “DGPS Convergence” window offers a visual repre-

sentation of progress for HP/XP/G2 and standard RTX™
technologies. While the system is making complex cal-
culations to reduce the GPS position error, the bar graph
moves with the progress. The “Convergence Status” win-
dow on the “GPS Setup” screen determines whether the
“DGPS Convergence” window reports a percentage or a
value in meters (inches). The “DGPS Convergence” win-
dow is only present when HP/XP/G2 or standard RTK is
used.
RCIL11DSP205BBG 12

RAIL12DSP1408BA 13

Use the “Reset” button to restart the convergence process

when required. Resetting convergence is required when
the “GPS Receive Position Recall Failed” message ap-
pears or if the operator answers the “Has the vehicle been
moved” question incorrectly.

Reset is also required if the bar graph stops at a low per-

centage. Convergence is stopped if there is no progress
on the bar graph for 10 – 20 min.

The “Reset” button is only present when HP/XP/G2 or

RTX™ is used. This is the only control window on the
“GPS Status” screen.

RAIL14DSP1590BA 14

3-103
 3 - SETUP

“Omnistar ID”
The “Omnistar ID” window reports the OmniSTAR® iden-
tification number that is associated with your AFS 162,
AFS 252, AFS 262, or AFS 372 receiver

Your CASE IH dealer may require this information for ini-

tial setup of subscription-based correction signal.

RAIL14DSP1590BA 15

“VBS Expire Date,” “HP/XP/G2 Expire Date,”

and “RTX Expire Date” (subscription status
and messages)
The “VBS Expire Date,” “HP/XP/G2 Expire Date,” and
“RTX Expire Date” windows report the expiration date for
the current subscription. The information is available re-
gardless of whether the signal is currently in use or not.

The expiration dates come directly from the GPS receiver.

They only display if the receiver is an AFS 162, AFS 252,
AFS 262, or AFS 372 receiver (or a Trimble® AgGPS 252,
AgGPS 262, or AG-372 receiver) that is enabled for these
forms of correction.
NOTE: When RTX™ correction is in use, the “RTX Expire
RAIL12DSP1407BA 16
Date” window identifies a standard modem or standard
satellite subscription with “(S)” in the window label. The
window identifies a fast satellite subscription with “(F)” in
the window label.

RAIL12DSP1410BA 17

3-104
 3 - SETUP

A message appears once per day when a VBS, HP/XP/

G2, or subscription is within 14 days of expiration.

The message appears only if the technology associated

with the subscription is selected on the “GPS Setup”
screen (Home > Toolbox > GPS).
NOTE: The display must be powered ON within the 14
days prior to the expiration date for the message appear.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

RCIL11DSP500BBG 18

3-105
 3 - SETUP

A message appears at startup when the VBS, HP/XP/G2,

or subscription has expired.

The message appears only if the technology associated

with the subscription is selected on the “GPS Setup”
screen (Home > Toolbox > GPS).

When expired, the DGPS signal is not available for use.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

RCIL11DSP501BBG 19

RCIL11DSP502BBG 20

RAIL12DSP1411BA 21

3-106
 3 - SETUP

“RTK Security Expires”

The “RTK Security Expires” window reports the expiration
date for the current RTK subscription.

The information is available regardless of whether the sig-

nal is currently in use or not. A message appears once per
day when the RTK security subscription is within 14 days
of expiration.

The message appears only if RTK is selected in the

“DGPS Type” window.
NOTE: The display must be powered ON within the 14
days prior to the expiration date for the message to be
displayed.
RAIL12DSP1412BA 22

“Age of RTK”
Placement label: Age of RTK

The “Age of RTK” window reports the time interval since

the last message from the base station to the GPS re-
ceiver. The value is in seconds.

A typical value should be approximately 1 s. Any value

over 3 s indicates a problem with reception of the signal
from the base station. This may be caused by:
• An obstruction between the base station and the vehicle

OR
RCIL11DSP361BBG 23

• A problem with the base station itself

If the delay reaches 5 s, the “GPS Status” window reports

a fault condition, and the system is not available for use.

3-107
 3 - SETUP

“NTRIP Status”
When NTRIP is enabled, the “NTRIP Status” window re-
ports the current status of NTRIP corrections. Refer to the
table below.

RAIL16DSP0884BA 24

Status Meaning/Action
“Unknown” 1. Check your subscription.
“Initializing” 2. Check the connection to the modem.
3. Verify your account information in the “NTRIP Account” window (Home >
Toolbox > GPS). See 3-49.
“Logging In” The modem is connecting to the NTRIP caster.
“Connected” The modem is logged in and the NTRIP stream has started.
“MP Error” The mount point is not valid. Verify the mount point in the “NTRIP Account”
window (Home > Toolbox > GPS). See 3-49.
“Login Error” The user name or password is not valid. Verify the login information in the
“NTRIP Account” window (Home > Toolbox > GPS). See 3-49.
“Server Error” The server IP address or port is not valid. Verify the server information in the
“NTRIP Account” window (Home > Toolbox > GPS). See 3-49.
“Session Lost” The cellular connection was dropped. If the “Telematics” application is installed
and enabled, click the “Telematics” icon in the status and warning icon area to
view the cellular signal status.

For NTRIP corrections with a modem that

does not support telematics, the modem
status icon displays in the status and
warning icon area. The number of bars
(0-3) indicates the current strength of the
cellular signal. When the cellular network is
connected, the bars in the icon are green.

When the cellular network is not connected

– for example, coverage is not available or
your subscription is not valid – the bars in
the icon are gray.

If the modem loses connection or if the

Received Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
value is greater than zero, the modem error NHIL18PLM1364BA 25
icon displays.

Press the “modem” icon at any time to view details of the

cellular connection. A pop-up window reports the network
status and cellular Radio Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI)
in decibels.

3-108
 3 - SETUP

“GPRS Status”
The “GPRS Status” window reports the current status of
the GPRS signal.

RAIL12DSP1412BA 26

If the “GPRS Status” window indicates an error or failure

to initialize, check the “GPRS Settings” window on the
“GPS Setup” screen (Home > Toolbox > GPS). See 3-49
for more information.

RAIL12DSP1350BA 27

3-109
 3 - SETUP

“RTK xFill Status”

The “RTK xFill Status” window reports the current status
of the xFill™ signal.
• When xFill™ is not actively providing the correction sig-
nal, the “RTK xFill Status” window reports that xFill™
is ready (1).
• When xFill™ is actively providing the correction signal
– i.e. the connection to the base station is interrupted
– the “RTK xFill Status” window reports the amount of
time remaining before xFill™ expires and can no longer
provide correction signal (2).

RAIL14DSP1595BA 28

RAIL14DSP1596BA 29

When xFill™ is 4 min from expiration, a pop-up message

displays: “xFill will expire in less than 4 minutes. GPS
quality will be degraded after this time elapses.”

When xFill™ expires, the “RTK xFill Status” window re-

ports that xFill™ is ready again. However, the GPS re-
ceiver must communicate with the base station again be-
fore xFill™ is truly ready. During the time that RTK and
xFill™ are both unavailable, the “GPS Status” window re-
ports, “DGPS-Init” while the “RTK xFill Status” window re-
ports, “Ready.”

RAIL14DSP1597BA 30

3-110
 3 - SETUP

“xFill Premium Status”

When xFill™ Premium is enabled, the “xFill Premium Sta-
tus” windows report the current status of the xFill™ Pre-
mium signal.

To be usable, the xFill™ Premium signal must converge

to less than 10 cm (4 in).
• When the xFill™ Premium signal is not ready for use,
the “xFill Premium Status” window reports a status of
“Not Ready.” The bar graph indicates the progress of
signal convergence.

RAIL16DSP0885BA 31

• When the xFill™ Premium signal is ready for use,

the “xFill Premium Status” window reports a status of
“Ready.” The bar graph is full (100% black) to indicate
that the signal is converged to less than 10 cm (4 in)

RAIL16DSP0886BA 32

• When the xFill™ Premium signal is in use, the “xFill

Premium Status” window reports a status of “In Use.”
An icon displays in the status and warning icon area
to indicate that xFill™ Premium is actively providing
correction signal.

RAIL16DSP0887BA 33

3-111
 3 - SETUP

"Constellation Map" screen

NOTE: This screen is only active when the installed GPS receiver is capable of receiving National Marine Electronics
Association (NMEA) sentences of the GSV (satellites in view) type. These include the AFS 162, AFS 252, AFS 262,
and AFS 372 receivers and Trimble® equivalents.
Press the “GPS2” icon on the navigation bar to display the
“Constellation Map” screen.

RAIL12DSP1424BA 1

The screen is divided into an upper table area and a lower

map area. Both areas provide valuable information on the
number of satellites that are currently visible and tracked
(in use) by the GPS receiver.

The table area displays information about a maximum of

10 satellites. Each satellite is identified by its number. The
number is black when the satellite is tracked (in use) and
red when the satellite is only visible (not in use).
NOTE: A satellite can be visible, but not tracked, because
its signal is too poor.

RAIL12DSP1424BA 2

For each tracked satellite, the table provides its Signal-

to-Noise Ratio (SNR), elevation, and azimuth. For each
visible satellite, the table provides only its elevation and
azimuth; the SNR value is grayed out.

The map area below the chart visually represents the lo-
cations of the satellites in relation to the vehicle and true
north. All visible and tracked satellites are shown and
identified by their number in the same black and red color
code.
NOTE: The vehicle location is always at the very center
of the map.

RAIL12DSP1425BA 3

3-112
 3 - SETUP

Azimuth and elevation are angles used here to define the

position of a satellite in the sky relative to the vehicle.

The azimuth angle is the compass bearing on the horizon,

relative to true north, of a point directly beneath a satellite.
Compass bearings are measured clockwise in degrees
from north. Azimuth angles range from 0° (north) through
90° (east), 180° (south), 270° (west), and back to 360°
(north again).

In the illustration shown, the vehicle is located at the cen-

ter green circle. A satellite with an azimuth angle of 207°
RCIL11DSP008ABG 4
is currently located 207° from north in a clockwise direc-
tion relative to the vehicle.
The elevation angle of a satellite, also called altitude, is
determined by first finding the compass bearing on the
horizon relative to true north, and then measuring the an-
gle between that point and the satellite relative to the vehi-
cle. Elevation angles for objects above the horizon range
from 207° (on the horizon) up to 90° (at the zenith).

RCIL11DSP009ABG 5

The more reliable satellites (1) will always be the satellites

closest to vehicle at the center point of the map. They are
the satellites that are at higher elevations relative to the
vehicle. The higher elevation means that the satellites will
remain useful for a longer period of time because their sig-
nal is less likely to degrade from atmospheric conditions
and ground clutter.

The screen also reports the average Horizontal Dilution

Of Precision (HDOP) and Position Dilution Of Precision
(PDOP) for all tracked satellites (2).

RAIL12DSP1425BA 6

When OmniSTAR RTX correction is in use, Global Or-

biting Navigation Satellite System (GLONASS) satellites
also appear on the “Constellation Map” screen.

GLONASS satellites are identified with the letter “G” after

the satellite number. In this example, “5G” is a GLONASS
satellite.
NOTE: RTX correction is only supported on AFS 372 re-
ceivers.

RAIL12DSP1426BA 7

3-113
 3 - SETUP

"GPS Receiver" screen

NOTICE: Only make adjustments on this screen if you are
directed to do so by authorized CASE IH service person-
nel. Changing settings on the GPS receiver may disable
your system.

The “GPS Receiver” screen, or Receiver Diagnostic Inter-

face (RDI), is provided for advanced diagnostic and trou-
bleshooting procedures. The screen provides access to
the configuration settings on the GPS receiver. Changing
settings, even inadvertently, may degrade or disable your
precision farming system.

The screen is provided for those rare occasions when an

operator may need to change satellite frequencies, con-
figure an additional port, or adjust a configuration for a
unique GPS receiver. Perform such changes only at the
specific instruction of CASE IH service personnel.
Press the “RDI” icon on the navigation bar to display the
“GPS Receiver” screen.
NOTE: The screen is only selectable when the display
is connected to an AFS 162, 252, 262, or 372 receiver
(or an equivalent Trimble® receiver). The icon is dimmed
when a GPS receiver is not present or is from another
manufacturer.

RCIL11DSP408BBG 1

3-114
 3 - SETUP

"Resource Status" screen

Press the “Res” (resources) icon on the navigation bar to
display the “Resource Status” screen.

Use the “Resource Status” screen to determine whether

the available resources and memory stick capacity are
sufficient for today’s planned work. The bar graph shows
the total storage available and the percent used on the
installed memory stick.

The resource usage windows show usage and availability

for each data type. Each memory stick may contain:
• 150 growers
• 150 farms
• 350 fields
• 1200 tasks RCIL11DSP412BBG 1

• 100 tags
• 250 products
• 50 containers
• 2000 autoguidance swaths

3-115
 3 - SETUP

SATELLITE AVAILABILITY

Planning software

RCPH11DSP001FBG 1

Planning software takes the guesswork out of satellite availability for any given work period. This software is a free
download available in the “Planning Software” section of www.trimble.com.

The path to the downloads on www.trimble.com is Trimble Home > Products & Solutions > Surveying > Office Software
> Planning Software > Download.

Use your web browser to download the software (1) to your desktop computer. The file is approximately 23 MB.
Download time varies from 1 – 20 min depending on your network connection.

At the same location, follow the “Trimble GPS Data Resources” link (2) to download the Almanac file. The Almanac
file tracks GPS satellite locations around the world and is updated daily. The file is identified as “ GPS/GLONASS
almanac in Trimble Planning file format.” Download time for the Almanac file is seconds.
NOTE: Bookmark this location on the web site; you will need to retrieve a current Almanac file frequently.

3-116
 3 - SETUP

Use standard Windows techniques to install the software

on your desktop computer. When installation is complete,
launch the software from Start > Trimble Office > Utilities
> Planning.

RCPH11DSP001ABG 2

The main window displays.

RAPH12DSP0966BA 3

To load the new Almanac file, select Almanac > Load.

At the prompt, click Yes to clear the old Almanac file.

RAPH12DSP0967BA 4

Use the file browser to locate the new Almanac file on your
hard drive.

To load the file:

• Select the file and click the “Open” button

OR

• Double-click the file

RAPH12DSP0968AA 5

3-117
 3 - SETUP

A message displays information about the Almanac file

that was imported.

Click the “OK” button to clear the message.

RAPH12DSP0969AA 6

Select File > Station to identify your location.

RAPH12DSP0970BA 7

The “Station Editor” window displays.

To identify your location by the nearest large city, click the

“City” button.
NOTE: Select a city that is within 48 km (30 miles) of your
location. If the list does not contain a city within this range,
use the exact coordinate method explained later.

RAPH12DSP0971BA 8

3-118
 3 - SETUP

Scroll through the list until you find a major city near your
location.

Highlight the entry and click the “Select” button to confirm

your selection.

RAPH12DSP0972BA 9

If there is no large city within 48 km (30 miles) of your lo-

cation, or if you simply wish to identify your location with
greater precision, view the “GPS Status” screen in Diag-
nostics.

Take note of the values that are reported by the “GPS

Latitude,” “GPS Longitude,” and “GPS Altitude” windows.

RCIL11DSP505BBG 10

Enter the exact coordinates for your latitude, longitude,

and altitude into the “Station Editor” window.

RAPH12DSP0973BA 11

3-119
 3 - SETUP

Elevation cutoff stops the GPS receiver from using satel-

lites that are low on the horizon. Reception from low satel-
lites is subject to more atmospheric error and multipath
interference.

For autoguidance systems using RTK, set this value to

13°.

For systems using DGPS, set this value to 10°.

RAPH12DSP0973BA 12

Click the “Time Zone” button to select the time zone for
your location.

RAPH12DSP0974AA 13

Highlight your time zone in the list.

Click the “OK” button to select the time zone.

RAPH12DSP0975AA 14

Use the Time portion of the screen to select a time period

for the information to be viewed.

Start with a 24 h period and adjust the time period later if

required.

RAPH12DSP0976AA 15

3-120
 3 - SETUP

To apply your changes, click the “Apply” button (1).

Click the “OK” button (2) to return to the main window.

RAPH12DSP0977BA 16

Use the graph icons across the top of the screen or the
“Graph” menu to view satellite availability information in a
variety of formats.

Use the agenda and legend icons to toggle whether

agenda and legend information appears on the graphs.

RAPH12DSP0966BA 17

The following page offers printable representative graphs

for satellite visibility and elevation.

In general, look for a high number of satellites and a low

number for Dilution Of Precision (DOP):
• Five or more satellites are required to initialize the sys-
tem. Four or more are required for automatic operation.
• For DOP, any number below 7 offers good working re-
sults. DOP can be graphed five different ways: geomet-
rical, position, horizontal, vertical, and time. Position
DOP offers the best DOP overview. Horizontal DOP
and vertical DOP display the data by axis to indicate
whether an obstacle is going to be a problem.
NOTE: The software offers additional information on all
program features under the Help menu. RCPH11DSP019BBG 18

3-121
 3 - SETUP

RAPH12DSP0978FA 19
Elevation

RAPH12DSP0979FA 20
Number of satellites

3-122
 3 - SETUP

RAPH12DSP0980FA 21
General visibility

RAPH12DSP0981FA 22
DOP all together (lines)

3-123
 3 - SETUP

The same information – number of available satellites and

DOP for the selected time period – can be viewed or
printed as lists.

From the “Lists” menu, select Interval or DOP values.

RAPH12DSP0982AA 23

3-124
 3 - SETUP

Planning online

RAIL12DSP1038FA 1
Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) Planning Online

An online planning tool is available for operators who have a reliable Internet connection. Because the information is
online, it is always current without requiring an Almanac file.

To access the online planning tool, point your web browser to www.trimble.com/GNSSPlanningOnline/.

The required settings are similar to those of the downloadable planning software. Click the “Settings” button on the
left-hand side of the screen and input the following information:
• Coordinates for the location of your farm (use the “Pick” button to search for the nearest city)
• Height, elevation cutoff, and obstructions
• The date on which you intend to work
• The time interval for which you want to view satellite information
• Your time zone

Click the “Apply” button to save your settings.

3-125
 3 - SETUP

RAIL12DSP1039FA 2

Click the “Satellite Library” button (1) on the left-hand side of the screen to select the satellites you wish to track. Click
the check boxes to select satellites individually (3) or by satellite type (2).
NOTE: A green check mark icon beside a satellite name indicates that the satellite is in good working condition. A
red “X” icon beside a satellite name indicates that the satellite is unhealthy. The tool excludes unhealthy satellites by
default.

3-126
 3 - SETUP

RAIL12DSP1040FA 3

Click each of the remaining buttons on the left-hand side of the screen (1) to view information about the selected
satellites in relation to your location.

Click and drag the slider on each screen (2) to view information for a specific time of day. The effect of the slider
depends on the kind of information that is being viewed.
• For information that is presented in the form of a graph, the horizontal (x) axis always represents time. The slider
draws a vertical line (3) on the graph at the position of the selected time of day.
• For information that is presented on a map, the slider moves the information on the map to correspond to the
selected time of day.

3-127
 3 - SETUP

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: FIELD BOUNDARIES, OBSTACLES, AND MARKS

Introduction
This chapter explains:
• How to create field boundaries
• The boundary warning behavior
• Windows that are directly related to field boundaries
• How to create field obstacles
• The obstacle warning behavior
• How to create field marks

Field boundaries
Field boundaries can be created with the display when:
• The “Precision Farming” application is present
• The vehicle is equipped with a GPS receiver

AND

• A memory stick is installed in the display

NOTE: Field boundaries can also be created with the
desktop software.

The “Rec Boundary” window (placement label: Boundary

Record) is not part of the default layout and must be added
to a “Run” screen. If required, create a new name in the
“Current Layout” window on the “Run Layout “screen and
add the “Rec Boundary” window to the “Run” screen of RCIL11DSP051BBG 1
your choice (Home > Toolbox > Layout).
NOTE: The “Rec Boundary” window is not available on
the “Run Layout” screen when no memory stick is in-
stalled.

One field can contain multiple boundaries depending on

the swath patterns that are needed to work the field. All
boundaries are saved to the field. If a field is deleted on
the “Delete” screen (Home > Data Management > Delete),
all of the boundaries for the field are also deleted. Delete
individual boundaries using the “Map” screen (Home >
Data Management > Map).

3-128
 3 - SETUP

Create a boundary
With the vehicle in an appropriate location in the field,
press the “Record” button to begin boundary creation.
NOTE: The software adds a safety margin to the width
of the implement (or header) for whenever the vehicle
passes close to a boundary: 1 m (3 ft) or 10% of the
implement width (or header width), whichever is greater.
The warning behavior for a boundary is triggered based
on the implement width (or header width) plus the safety
margin.

RCIL11DSP051BBG 2

The “Boundary Properties” window displays to prompt

the operator for boundary properties:
• Boundary name
• Recording edge
• Boundary type
• Boundary subtype (inner boundaries only)
• Impassable (inner boundaries only)

RCIL11DSP052BBG 3

Press the “Boundary Name” window to access the al-

phanumeric keypad.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 4

3-129
 3 - SETUP

The default boundary name is “Boundary XX” where “XX”

is a number that increments each time another boundary
is created in the current field.

If desired, type a new name for the boundary.

Press the “Enter” button to save the name.

Press the “Close” button to exit without saving.

RCIL11DSP053BBG 5

The operator must indicate a horizontal position (based

on the implement width or header width) that should be
used to record the boundary: left (1), center (2) or right
(3).

RCIL11DSP028BBG 6

RCIL11DSP027BBG 7

3-130
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Recording Edge” window.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 8

Press “Left” to select the outermost left edge of the imple-

ment (or header) as the distance from the GPS receiver
to record the boundary.

Press “Center” to select the centerline of the vehicle in-

tersecting the GPS receiver as the location to record the
boundary.

Press “Right” to select the outermost right edge of the

implement (or header) as the distance from the GPS re-
ceiver to record the boundary.

RCIL11DSP054BBG 9

The operator must indicate whether the new boundary is

an outer boundary or an inner boundary.

Press the “Boundary Type” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 10

3-131
 3 - SETUP

Press “Outer” to record a boundary for the outside edge

of a field.

Press “Inner” to record a boundary within a field.

RCIL11DSP055BBG 11

If “Inner” was pressed, the “Boundary Subtype” and “Im-

passable” windows display.

Press the “Boundary Subtype” window to select a sub-

type.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 12

A list of boundary subtypes displays.

Select the desired subtype.

RCIL11DSP056BBG 13

3-132
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Impassable” window.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 14

Press “No” if the inner boundary can be driven over.

Press “Yes” if the inner boundary cannot be driven over.

RCIL11DSP057BBG 15

Press the “Start” button to begin recording.

Press the “Cancel” button to close the “Boundary Proper-

ties” window without recording.

RCIL11DSP052BBG 16

3-133
 3 - SETUP

If Start was pressed, a “Recording Boundary”

icon displays in the status and warning
icon area as a reminder that recording is
in progress. The “Rec Boundary” window
updates with the “Pause” button, the
“Stop” button, the “Cancel” button, and the
“Recording” message.

NOTE: The “Recording Edge” window determines

whether the fence in the icon appears in the left, center,
or right of the icon.

The “Recording Boundary” icon in the status and warning

icon area disappears when the boundary is automatically
completed or when the operator presses the “Stop” button
or the “Cancel” button. RCIL11DSP058BBG 17

The vehicle can be working while boundary recording

takes place. Coverage and work results can be recorded
at the same time.

The exact path that the vehicle travels is recorded as the

field boundary.

RCIL11DSP278BBG 18

The boundary can be completed in one of two

ways, depending on the selection in the “Bound.
Auto-Complete” window on the “Precision Farming
Setup” screen (Home > Toolbox > PF):
• When the “Bound. Auto-Complete” window is set to
“On,” the software automatically closes the boundary
when the vehicle is within one implement width (or
header width) of the boundary’s starting point.
• When the “Bound Auto-Complete” window is set to
“Off,” the operator must press the “Stop” button in
the “Rec Boundary” window. The software draws a
straight line from the vehicle’s current position to the
boundary’s starting point.

A “Boundary is complete” message displays.

RCIL11DSP277BBG 19

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge and clear the mes-

sage.

3-134
 3 - SETUP

An outer boundary can have as many jogs as necessary

to describe the shape of a field. However, the opera-
tor should never cross the recorded path of the vehicle
(with its implement or header) when recording a bound-
ary. Two or more closed polygons cannot be recorded
as one boundary. After a boundary is recorded, the soft-
ware checks the integrity of the boundary and simplifies its
structure. Any crossed paths are deleted. The resulting
boundary may or may not be acceptable to the operator.

RCIL11DSP262BBG 20

3-135
 3 - SETUP

“Stop” button
Press the “Stop” button while recording a boundary to im-
mediately complete the boundary with a straight line be-
tween the current position of the vehicle and the boundary
starting point.

The “Recording Boundary” icon disappears from the sta-

tus and warning icon area.

RCIL11DSP058BBG 21

This is useful whenever a straight line is appropriate to

complete a boundary.

In this example, boundary recording starts in the upper

left-hand corner of the field and proceeds clockwise
around its circumference.

On the fourth side of the field, the operator presses the

“Stop” button to complete the boundary with a straight line.

The final section of the boundary is automatically mapped

as a straight line (shown in red) between the current ve-
hicle location and the start of the boundary.

RCIL11DSP458BBG 22

3-136
 3 - SETUP

“Pause” button
The “Pause” button is useful for any field, or field section,
that can be defined by straight line segments. Any dis-
tance traveled while boundary recording is paused is au-
tomatically joined by a straight line when recording is re-
sumed. Using the pause feature, an operator can record
only the corners of the field and allow the software to draw
straight line boundary segments between the corners.

RCIL11DSP058BBG 23

Whenever boundary recording is paused,

the “Recording Boundary” icon flashes in the
status and warning icon area as a reminder
to the operator that recording has been
paused. The “Rec Boundary” window also
updates to reflect that recording is paused.

RCIL11DSP067BBG 24

3-137
 3 - SETUP

The illustration shows the recording of a field with straight

borders using the “Pause” button. With the vehicle lo-
cated in the upper left-hand corner of the field, the op-
erator starts recording and then immediately pauses until
the vehicle arrives at the next corner of the field.
NOTE: A point is immediately recorded when the “Record”
button is pressed after recording has been paused.

At the next corner, the operator presses the “Record” but-

ton and then the “Pause” button; recording is paused until
the operator presses the “Record” button at the next cor-
ner of the field.
NOTE: The map does not draw the boundary line while
RCIL11DSP264BBG 25
recording is paused. When the next corner is recorded,
the map updates to display the straight boundary line
recorded during the pause.

In this fashion, a field boundary may be defined as a series

of straight line segments joined at the field corners.
NOTE: Use the “Stop” button to close the boundary after
the final corner of the field is passed.

RCIL11DSP263BBG 26

3-138
 3 - SETUP

“Cancel” button
Exit boundary recording at any time by pressing the “Can-
cel” button. This action deletes the recording in progress
from display memory and the memory stick. A message
displays immediately after the button is pressed: “Are
you sure you want to delete the boundary that is being
recorded?”

Press the “Yes” button to cancel recording and delete the

boundary in progress. The “Recording Boundary” icon
disappears.

Press the “No” button to continue the recording in

progress. The “Recording Boundary” icon remains in the
status and warning icon area.
RCIL11DSP058BBG 27

RCIL11DSP059BBG 28

3-139
 3 - SETUP

Boundary warning
The “Bound Alarm Audio” window on the
“Precision Farming Setup” screen (Home
> Toolbox > PF) determines whether an
audible alarm sounds when the vehicle
(with its implement or header) enters the
boundary warning zone.

The audible alarm is automatically enabled and cannot

be disabled whenever the “Autoguidance” application is
active in the display. The window is dimmed and can-
not be selected. The audible alarm beeps slowly for 3 s,
and then more rapidly for 2 s to alert the operator that the
vehicle (with its implement or header) is approaching a
field boundary. After this 5 s period, a single alarm tone
RCIL11DSP265BBG 29
sounds once every 30 s until the warning condition clears.
The alarm is accompanied by a flashing “Approaching
Boundary” icon in the status and warning icon area.

When the “Autoguidance” application is not active, the op-

erator can turn the audible alarm ON or OFF. If the alarm is
turned on, a single tone sounds once every 30 s until the
warning condition clears. If the alarm is turned OFF, no
audible alarm occurs. The “Approaching Boundary” icon
displays in the status and warning icon area regardless of
whether the audible alarm is turned ON or OFF. The icon
flashes when the alarm is turned ON and displays without
flashing when the alarm is turned OFF.
NOTE: The alarm behavior occurs if any part of the vehi-
cle (with its implement or header) enters the alarm zone.
RAIL16DSP0788BA 30

The alarm zone is different for forward and reverse oper-

ation.

If the vehicle is operating in a forward gear, the

approaching boundary warning occurs.
• When the vehicle is within 5 m (16 ft) of the boundary

OR

• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the

alarm look ahead distance of the boundary, as defined
in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window (Home > Toolbox >
PF)

RAIL16DSP0788BA 31

3-140
 3 - SETUP

If the vehicle is operating in a reverse gear, the

approaching boundary warning occurs:
• When the vehicle is within 10 m (32 ft) of the boundary

OR

• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the

alarm look ahead distance of the boundary, as defined
in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window (Home > Toolbox >
PF)

RCIL11DSP265BBG 32

3-141
 3 - SETUP

Boundary-related windows
“Boundary Area”
Placement label: Boundary Area

The “Boundary Area” window reports the area of the outer

boundary that the vehicle is currently in minus the total
area of all interior boundaries contained within the same
outer boundary. The value is reported in hectares or
acres, depending on the units of measurement selected.
The window requires the “Precision Farming” application
and is only active when a GPS receiver is present and
functioning.
NOTE: This window is empty If the vehicle is not inside of
an outer boundary.
RCIL11DSP047BBG 33

“Tot Bound Area” (Total Boundary Area)

Placement label: Tot Bound Area

The “Tot Bound Area” window reports the total area of

all outer boundaries for the current field minus the total
area of all inner boundaries contained in the field. The
value is reported in hectares or acres, depending on the
units of measurement selected. The window requires the
“Precision Farming” application and is only active when a
GPS receiver is present and functioning.

RCIL11DSP048BBG 34

“Area, Total Field”

Placement label: Area, Total Field

The “Area, Total Field” window reports the total area for
all tasks for the current operation and instance.

RCIL11DSP021BBG 35

“Area Remaining”
Placement label: Area Remaining

The “Area Remaining” window reports the difference be-

tween the areas reported by the “Tot Bound Area” and
“Area, Total Field” windows – that is, the workable area
within the outer boundary that has not yet been worked.
The window requires the “Precision Farming” application
and is only active when a GPS receiver is present and
functioning.

RCIL11DSP049BBG 36

3-142
 3 - SETUP

“Time Remaining”
Placement label: Time Remaining

The “Time Remaining” window reports the time remaining,

based on the current work rate, to complete the workable
area of the current field. The window requires the “Preci-
sion Farming” application and is only active when a GPS
receiver is present and functioning.

RCIL11DSP050BBG 37

3-143
 3 - SETUP

"Headland" window
Placement label: Headland

Use the “Headland” window:

• to create and edit headlands for existing field bound-
aries (1)
• to enable or disable operation with headlands (2)
• to select the headland operating mode: “Inner” or
“Outer” (3)

When headlands are enabled, automatic overlap

control turns rows or sections OFF and ON based on
the headland operating mode that is selected in the
“Headland” window.
RAIL16DSP0804BA 1
• Select “Outer” to apply product in the headland area.
Rows or sections turn OFF when you cross into the in-
ner area of the field.
• Select “Inner” to apply product in the inner area of the
field. Rows or sections turn OFF when you cross into
the headland area.

Create a headland
Press the “Manage” button (1) to access the pop-up op-
tions menu.

Press “New” (2) to create a new headland.

RAIL16DSP0851BA 2

The “Map Management” screen displays with a preview

of your field boundaries.

Use the “Boundary” window (1) or the arrow buttons (2) to

select the field boundary for which you intend to create a
headland. The selected field boundary highlights in blue.

Press the “Select” button (3) to set up a headland for the

selected field.

RAIL16DSP0862BA 3

3-144
 3 - SETUP

The “Headland Setup” screen displays with a preview of

the headland.
NOTE: Press the “Cancel” button at any time to close the
“Headland Setup” screen without saving the new head-
land.

RAIL16DSP0853BA 4

Use the “Width” window to select the width of your

headland area. The available options are:
• “Custom”
• 1x the swath width of the implement
• 2x the swath width of the implement
• 3x the swath width of the implement
NOTE: Verify the swath width on the “Implement Setup”
screen (Home > Toolbox > Impl).

Press the desired width or press “Custom” to access the

numeric keypad and enter a custom width.

RAIL16DSP0854BA 5

When you change the value in the “Width” window (1), the
headland preview (2) updates to show the new width.

RAIL16DSP0855BA 6

3-145
 3 - SETUP

Use the “# Sides” window to choose how many sides

of the field boundary should have headland areas. The
available options are:
• “Single” - Create a headland area on one side of the
field boundary.
• “Double” - Create headland areas on two sides of the
field boundary.
• “All” - Create a continuous headland area on all sides
of the field boundary.
• “Default” - Reset all points to their default positions for
the selected number of sides.

RAIL16DSP0856BA 7

When the “# Sides” window is set to “Single” or “Double,”

four reference points on the field boundary define a
headland area: A, B, A1, and B1.
• The red line segment A-B (1) represents the outer edge
of the headland area.
• The blue line segment A1-B1 (2) represents the inner
edge of the headland area.

You can move any reference point to change the shape of

your headland area as required. Use the “Active” window
(3) to select the point that you wish to move.

There are two ways to move the active point:

• Use the curved arrow buttons (4) to move the active
point clockwise or counter-clockwise along the field RAIL16DSP0857BA 8
boundary.
• Press any point along the field boundary to immediately
move the active point to that point.

3-146
 3 - SETUP

When the “# Sides” window is set to “Double” and you

are finished setting up the first headland area (1), press
the “Select” button (2) to select the second headland area
(3).

The second headland area updates with reference points

(4). The outline of the first headland area turns gray to
indicate that it is no longer selected.

Move the reference points of the second headland area

as required.

RAIL16DSP0860BA 9

RAIL16DSP0863BA 10

When the “# Sides” window is set to “All,” no reference

points display.

A blue line (1) represents the inner edge of the headland

area.

RAIL16DSP0859BA 11

3-147
 3 - SETUP

When you are satisfied with the shape of the headland

area or areas, press the “Accept” button.

The display saves the new headland. The first headland

you create is named “Headland 1,” the second headland
you create is named “Headland 2,” and so on.
NOTE: Use the “Manage” button in the “Headland” win-
dow to edit the names of headlands as required.

RAIL16DSP0864BA 12

Select a headland
When more than one headland exists for the current field,
use the “Headland” window to select the headland that
you wish to use for the current operation.

Press the “Manage” button in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0865BA 13

Press “Select” to access the list of headlands for the cur-

rent field.

RAIL16DSP0866BA 14

3-148
 3 - SETUP

Press the name of the headland that you wish to use for
the current operation.
NOTE: You can also select a headland with the “Map”
option described later in this section.

RAIL16DSP0867BA 15

Rename a headland
Use the “Headland” window to change the name of the
headland that is currently selected.

Press the “Manage” button in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0865BA 16

Press “Edit Name” to access the alphanumeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0866BA 17

3-149
 3 - SETUP

Use the keypad to enter a new name for the current head-
land.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the new

name.
NOTE: You can also change the name of a headland with
the “Map” option described later in this section.

RAIL16DSP0868BA 18

View information about a headland

Use the “Headland” window to view information about the
headland that is currently selected.

Press the “Manage” button in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0865BA 19

Press “Info” to view the pop-up information window.

RAIL16DSP0866BA 20

3-150
 3 - SETUP

A pop-up information window displays with information

about the headland.
• Type (number of sides)
• Creation date
• External (headland) area
• Internal area
• Total area

Press the “OK” button to dismiss the pop-up information

window.
NOTE: You can also view headland information with the
“Map” option described later in this section.
RAIL16DSP0874BA 21

Edit a headland
Use the “Headland” window to change the shape of the
headland that is currently selected.

Press the “Manage” button in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0865BA 22

Press “Edit” to access the “Headland Setup” screen.

RAIL16DSP0866BA 23

3-151
 3 - SETUP

Use the “Headland Setup” screen in the same manner as

described above for headland creation.

When you are satisfied with the shape of the headland

area or areas, press the “Accept” button.

RAIL16DSP0864BA 24

View headlands in a map window

Use the “Headland” window to view the headlands of the
current field in a map window.

From this screen you can:

• select a headland to use for the current operation
• rename a headland
• view information about a headland
• delete all headlands in the current field

Press the “Manage” button in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0865BA 25

Press “Map” to view the headlands in a map window.

RAIL16DSP0866BA 26

3-152
 3 - SETUP

There are two ways to view the different headlands in

the current field.
• Press the arrow buttons (1) to cycle among the head-
lands.
• Press the “Headland” window (2) and press “Select” (3)
to choose a headland from a list.

RAIL16DSP0869BA 27

RAIL16DSP0870BA 28

If you wish to use the headland that you are currently view-
ing, press the “Select” button.

RAIL16DSP0869BA 29

3-153
 3 - SETUP

If you wish to change the name of the headland that you

are currently viewing, press the “Headland” window (1).

Press “Edit Name” (2) to access the alphanumeric key-

pad.

Use the keypad to enter a new name for the headland.

Press the “Enter” button (3) on the keypad to save the new
name.

RAIL16DSP0870BA 30

RAIL16DSP0871BA 31

3-154
 3 - SETUP

If you wish to view information about the headland that

you are currently viewing, press the “Headland” window
(1).

Press “Info” (2) to view the pop-up information window.

A pop-up information window displays with information

about the headland.
• Type (number of sides)
• Creation date
• External (headland) area
• Internal area
• Total area
RAIL16DSP0870BA 32
Press the “OK” button (3) to dismiss the pop-up informa-
tion window.

RAIL16DSP0872BA 33

3-155
 3 - SETUP

If you wish to delete all headlands in the current field,

press the “Headland” window (1).

Press “Delete All” (2). A pop-up confirmation message

displays: “Delete all Headland boundaries?”

Press the “Yes” button (3) to delete all headlands in the

current field.

Press the “No” button (4) to continue without deleting the

headlands.

RAIL16DSP0870BA 34

RAIL16DSP0873BA 35

Enable operation with headlands

Use the middle button in the “Headland” window to enable
or disable operation with headlands.

The label of the middle button in the “Headland” window

indicates the current ON/OFF status of headlands.

Press the “Off” button (1) in the “Headland” window to

access the pop-up options window.

Press “On” (2) to enable operation with headlands.

RAIL16DSP0875BA 36

3-156
 3 - SETUP

The label of the middle button changes to “On” to indicate

that operation with headlands is enabled.

The leftmost button in the “Headland” window, which con-

trols the headland operating mode, becomes active.

RAIL16DSP0876BA 37

Change the headland operating mode

When headlands are enabled, use the leftmost button in
the “Headland” window to select the headland operating
mode. The button label indicates the current headland
operating mode.
• “Outer” (1) - Use this setting to apply product in the
headland area. Rows or sections turn OFF when you
cross into the inner area of the field.
• “Inner” (2) - Use this setting to apply product in the inner
area of the field. Rows or sections turn OFF when you
cross into the headland area.

Press the leftmost button in the “Headland” window to

change the headland operating mode. The change is im-
mediate.
RAIL16DSP0877BA 38

RAIL16DSP0876BA 39

3-157
 3 - SETUP

“Auto” mode and “Manual” mode

If the “Autoguidance” application is installed and you are
using a field swath, “Auto” mode and “Manual” mode are
available in the “Headland” window.

RAIL16DSP0878BA 40

Select “Auto” mode to link the headland operating mode

to the leftmost button of the “Swath Manage” window.
• When you select “Interior” in the “Swath Manage”
window, the headland operating mode automatically
changes to “Inner.”
• When you select “Round Headland” or “Square Head-
land” in the “Swath Manage” window, the headland op-
erating mode automatically changes to “Outer.”

When “Auto” mode is selected you cannot use the “Head-

land” window to change the headland operating mode.
The label of the leftmost button is gray and indicates the
current headland operating mode based on your selection
in the “Swath Manage” window.
RAIL16DSP0879BA 41

Select “Manual” mode to operate with no link between the

“Headland” window and the “Swath Manage” window.

Use the leftmost button in the “Headland” window to con-

trol the headland operating mode.

RAIL16DSP0880BA 42

3-158
 3 - SETUP

Field obstacles
Field obstacles can be created with the display when:
• The “Precision Farming” application is present

AND

• The vehicle is equipped with a GPS receiver

NOTE: The memory stick must be present when the op-
erator creates an obstacle on the display.
NOTE: Field boundaries can also be created with the
desktop software.

The “Rec Obstacle” window (placement label: Obstacle

Record) is not part of the default layout and must be added
to a “Run” screen. If required, create a new name in the
“Current Layout” window on the “Run Layout” screen and RCIL11DSP051BBG 1
add the “Rec Obstacle” window to the “Run” screen of
your choice (Home > Toolbox > Layout).

One field can contain multiple obstacles as needed. All

obstacles are saved to the field. If a field is deleted on
the “Delete” screen (Home > Data Management > Delete),
all of the obstacles for the field are also deleted. Delete
individual obstacles using the “Map” screen (Home > Data
Management > Map).

3-159
 3 - SETUP

Create an obstacle
Three different types of obstacles are available:
• Open
• Closed
• Point

The software adds a safety margin to the width of the

implement (or header) for whenever the vehicle passes
close to an obstacle: 1 m (3 ft) or 10% of the implement
width (or header width), whichever is greater. The warn-
ing behavior for an obstacle is triggered based on the im-
plement width (or header width) plus the safety margin.
The obstacle type selection should be based on the width
of the obstacle and how much advance warning the oper- RCIL11DSP280BBG 2
ator needs to avoid the obstacle.
An open obstacle (1) is mapped as a narrow line of GPS
coordinates, marked by the path that the vehicle travels.
The open type is designed for marking a long but narrow
obstacle – a shallow stream, gully, trench, or similar ob-
stacle.

A closed obstacle (2) is mapped as a polygon (similar to

a boundary), marked by the path that the vehicle trav-
els around the obstacle. The closed type is designed for
marking any large obstacle – a pond, river, tree, grove, or
similar obstacle.

A point obstacle (3) is mapped as single GPS coordinate

marked with the vehicle. The point type is designed for
marking any small obstacle – a rock, boulder, post, or
similar obstacle.
RCIL11DSP280BBG 3

With the vehicle in an appropriate location in the field,

press the “Record” button to begin obstacle creation.

RCIL11DSP051BBG 4

3-160
 3 - SETUP

The “Obstacle Properties” window displays to prompt the

operator for obstacle properties:
• Obstacle name
• Recording edge
• Obstacle type
• Obstacle subtype

RCIL11DSP060BBG 5

Press the “Obstacle Name” window to access the al-

phanumeric keypad.

RCIL11DSP060BBG 6

The default obstacle name is “Obstacle XX” where “XX”

is a number that increments each time another obstacle
is created in the current field.

If desired, type a new name for the obstacle.

Press the “Enter” button to save the name.

Press the “Close” button to exit without saving.

RCIL11DSP061BBG 7

3-161
 3 - SETUP

The operator must indicate a horizontal position (based

on the implement width or header width) that should be
used to record the obstacle: left (1), center (2) or right (3).

RCIL11DSP028BBG 8

RCIL11DSP027BBG 9

Press the “Recording Edge” window.

RCIL11DSP060BBG 10

3-162
 3 - SETUP

Press “Left” to select the outermost left edge of the imple-

ment (or header) as the distance from the GPS receiver
to record the obstacle.

Press “Center” to select the center line of the vehicle in-

tersecting the GPS receiver as the location to record the
obstacle.

Press “Right” to select the outermost right edge of the

implement (or header) as the distance from the GPS re-
ceiver to record the obstacle.

RCIL11DSP054BBG 11

The operator must indicate whether the new obstacle is

an open obstacle, a closed obstacle, or a point obstacle.

Press the “Obstacle Type” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RCIL11DSP060BBG 12

Press the desired obstacle type.

RCIL11DSP062BBG 13

3-163
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Obstacle Subtype” window to select a subtype.

RCIL11DSP060BBG 14

A list of obstacle subtypes displays.

Select the desired subtype.

RCIL11DSP063BBG 15

Press the “Start” button to begin recording.

Press the “Cancel” button to close the obstacle properties

without recording.

RCIL11DSP060BBG 16

3-164
 3 - SETUP

If Start was pressed, a “Recording Obstacle”

icon displays in the status and warning
icon area as a reminder that recording is
in progress. The “Rec Obstacle” window
updates with the “Pause” button , the
“Stop” button, the “Cancel” button, and the
“Recording” message.

The “Recording Obstacle” icon in the status and warning

icon area disappears when the obstacle is automatically
completed or when the operator presses the “Stop” button
or the “Cancel” button.

RCIL11DSP064BBG 17

When viewed on a work map, the closed obstacle appears

as an amber elastic polygon that the vehicle stretches
around the obstacle. The vehicle can be working while
obstacle recording takes place. Coverage and work re-
sults may be recorded at the same time.

The exact path that the vehicle travels is recorded as the

edge of the obstacle.

RCIL11DSP267BBG 18

Unlike a field boundary, a closed obstacle must be com-

pleted by the operator.

To close the obstacle, press the “Stop” button when the

vehicle returns to the starting point.

A straight line segment completes the closed obstacle.

RCIL11DSP064BBG 19

3-165
 3 - SETUP

When viewed on a work map, the open obstacle appears

as an amber line that follows the path of the vehicle. The
exact path that the vehicle travels is recorded as the ob-
stacle.

An open obstacle must also be completed by the operator.

To close the obstacle, press the “Stop” button at the logical

stopping point for the obstacle.

RCIL11DSP268BBG 20

When viewed on a work map, the point obstacle appears

as an amber warning symbol at the marked location. The
vehicle can be working while obstacle recording takes
place. Coverage and work results may be recorded at
the same time.

The exact location of the vehicle at the GPS receiver is

recorded as the obstacle location. Since the point obsta-
cle type is intended for smaller obstacles, the GPS re-
ceiver must be carefully aligned to the obstacle for the
most effective result.

RCIL11DSP269BBG 21

3-166
 3 - SETUP

“Pause” button
The “Pause” button is useful for any section of a closed
or open obstacle that can be defined by a straight line
segment. Any distance traveled, while obstacle recording
is paused, is automatically joined by a straight line when
recording is resumed. Using the pause feature, an op-
erator can record segments of an obstacle and allow the
software to supply any required straight lines between the
segments.

RCIL11DSP064BBG 22

Whenever obstacle recording is paused,

the “Recording Obstacle” icon flashes in the
status and warning icon area as a reminder
to the operator that recording has been
paused. The “Rec Obstacle” window also
updates to reflect that recording is paused.

RCIL11DSP065BBG 23

3-167
 3 - SETUP

“Cancel” button
Press the “Cancel” button to exit obstacle recording at
any time. This action deletes the recording in progress
from display memory and the memory stick. A confirming
message displays immediately after the button is pressed:
“Are you sure you want to delete the obstacle that is being
recorded?”

Press the “Yes” button to cancel recording and delete the

obstacle in progress. The “Recording Obstacle” icon dis-
appears.

Press the “No” button to continue the recording in

progress. The “Recording Obstacle” icon remains in the
status and warning icon area.
RCIL11DSP064BBG 24

RCIL11DSP066BBG 25

3-168
 3 - SETUP

Obstacle warning
The “Obst. Alarm Audio” window on the
“Precision Farming Setup” screen (Home
> Toolbox > PF) determines whether an
audible alarm sounds when the vehicle (with
its implement or header) enters the obstacle
warning zone.

The audible alarm is automatically enabled and cannot be

disabled whenever the “Autoguidance” application is ac-
tive in the display. The window is dimmed and cannot be
selected. The audible alarm beeps slowly for 3 s , and
then more rapidly for 2 s to alert the operator that the ve-
hicle (with its implement or header) is approaching a field
obstacle. After this 5 s period, a single alarm tone sounds RCIL11DSP270BBG 26
once every 30 s until the warning condition clears. The
alarm is accompanied by a flashing “Approaching Obsta-
cle” icon in the status and warning icon area.

When the “Autoguidance” application is not active, the op-

erator can turn the audible alarm ON or OFF. If the alarm is
turned ON, a single tone sounds once every 30 s until the
warning condition clears. If the alarm is turned OFF, no
audible alarm occurs. The “Approaching Obstacle” icon
displays in the status and warning icon area regardless of
whether the audible alarm is turned ON or OFF. The icon
flashes when the alarm is turned ON and displays without
flashing when the alarm is turned OFF.
NOTE: The alarm behavior occurs if any part of the vehi-
cle (with its implement or header) enters the alarm zone.
NOTE: When the “Autoguidance” application is active, the RAIL16DSP0788BA 27

obstacle warning behavior is canceled when the steer-

ing wheel is turned or the “Guidance Engage” button is
pressed to disengage automatic steering.
The alarm zone is different for forward and reverse oper-
ation.

If the vehicle is operating in a forward gear, the

approaching obstacle warning occurs:
• When the vehicle is within 5 m (16 ft) of the obstacle

OR

• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the

alarm look ahead distance of the obstacle, as defined
in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window (Home > Toolbox >
PF)

RAIL16DSP0788BA 28

3-169
 3 - SETUP

If the vehicle is operating in a reverse gear, the

approaching obstacle warning is given:
• When the vehicle is within 10 m (32 ft)

OR

• When the vehicle, at its current speed, is within the

alarm look ahead distance of the obstacle, as defined
in the “Alarm Look Ahead” window (Home > Toolbox >
PF)

RCIL11DSP270BBG 29

3-170
 3 - SETUP

Field marks
Use the “Field Marks 1-2” and “Field Marks 3-4” windows
to mark GPS locations in a field during farming opera-
tions. The locations marked are field or crop conditions
that require additional attention at some future time. This
function requires that the vehicle is equipped with a GPS
receiver.

The “Field Marks 1-2” and “Field Marks 3-4” windows are
available for placement on the “Run” screens whenever
the “Precision Farming” application is present. The win-
dows are not part of the default layout and must be added
to a “Run” screen. If required, create a new name in
the “Current Layout” window on the “Run Layout” screen
and add the windows to the “Run” screen of your choice
(Home > Toolbox > Layout).
RCIL11DSP068BBG 1
The conditions which are marked with the “Field Marks
1-2” and “Field Marks 3-4” windows are created by the
operator during field mark setup. Up to four conditions
can be active at one time, and field marks can be changed
at any time.

No audible or visual warning occurs when the vehicle ap-

proaches a field mark in subsequent farming operations.

When the operator presses a “Field Mark” button, the GPS

coordinates for the location are both mapped and saved
along with the other coverage, harvesting, “as applied,” or
performance data that is being recorded.

Each “Field Mark” button can be set up as a momentary

push button or a latching button.
When pressed, a momentary “Field Mark” button records
a single symbol to the map and saves it with the other
data.

Press the button each time a location requires marking.

RCIL11DSP282BBG 2

3-171
 3 - SETUP

When pressed, a latching “Field Mark” button highlights

and remains active until pressed again. The button
records continuous symbols to the map and saves them
with the data as long as the button remains latched.

A “Field Mark” icon displays in the status

and warning icon area as a reminder that
the button must be unlatched at some
appropriate moment.

RCIL11DSP069BBG 3

RCIL11DSP282BBG 4

3-172
 3 - SETUP

“Field Mark Setup” screen

On the “Home” screen press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.
NOTE: Field marks can also be created with the desktop
software and imported.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 5

Press the “Marks” icon on the navigation bar to display the

“Field Mark Setup” screen.

RCIL11DSP284BBG 6

Press the “Field Mark 1” window to access the pop-up

options window.
NOTE: The first time the window is selected the only op-
tion is “New.” Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit
Name,” and “New.”

RCIL11DSP285BBG 7

3-173
 3 - SETUP

Press “Select” to choose the desired field mark from the

pop-up window of field marks already created by the op-
erator.
NOTE: The name of the field mark also saves the button
type. When a field mark is selected for reuse, both the
name and the button type are recalled.

RCIL11DSP286BBG 8

Press “Edit Name” to access the alphanumeric keypad

and edit the name of an existing field mark.

Use the keypad to edit or correct the name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RCIL11DSP288BBG 9

Press “New” to access the alphanumeric keypad and cre-

ate a new field mark.

A maximum of 20 field marks can be created. Once cre-

ated, the field marks are available for any of the Field Mark
1-4 windows.

Use the keypad to enter the name.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the new

field mark.

RCIL11DSP289BBG 10

3-174
 3 - SETUP

The “Button Type” window only displays after a field mark

is named.

Press the “Button Type” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

Press “Latch” for a latching push button. Press “Push” for

a momentary push button.

RCIL11DSP290BBG 11

Repeat this process until all required field marks have

been set up.

RCIL11DSP291BBG 12

3-175
 3 - SETUP

"PRECISION FARMING" APPLICATION: MAPS AND MAP TOOLS

Introduction
This chapter explains how to use maps and map tools on the “Run” screens.

The “Precision Farming” application offers two different map types:

• Work maps show the results for the current operation
• The swath map shows swath alignment (overlap and skip) and can be used to align the vehicle to the next swath

Work maps
Work maps vary with the farming application:
• Coverage maps show the work path of the vehicle or im-
plement through the field during the current operation.
This is the default setting when the display is powered.
The coverage map is common to all farming applica-
tions.
• Application maps show the “as applied” rate for the
product – e.g., seed, fertilizer, etc., – as the vehicle and
implement, if applicable, move through the field.
• Prescription maps show the prescribed rate of product
application in the field or sections of the field.
• Yield maps show harvest results – ton/ha (bushels/
acre) and moisture (%M) – as the vehicle moves
through the field.
RCIL11DSP258BBG 1
• Performance maps show an aspect of vehicle produc-
tivity – for example, fuel economy – as the vehicle (with
its header or implement) moves through the field.

3-176
 3 - SETUP

Map sizes Coverage map: 1 x 4 example

Four different work map windows – “Map 1 x 4,” “Map 2
x 3,” “Map 2 x 4,” and “Map 2 x 5” – are available for the
“Run” screens. The map windows differ in size, but not in
function. The first number of the map label indicates the
number of columns used on the “Run” screens, and the
second number indicates the number of rows.

Some applications permit placement of the “Map 1 x 4”

window in the left-hand area. When the “Map 1 x 4”
window is in the left-hand area and on a “Run” screen,
the left-hand area has priority. When the “Run” screen
is viewed, the “Map 1 x 4” window only appears in the
left-hand area.

RCIL11DSP229BBG 2

Coverage map: 2 x 3 example

RCIL11DSP230BBG 3

3-177
 3 - SETUP

When the “Map 1 x 4” window is in the left-hand area and a Coverage map: 2 x 4 example
larger map window is on a “Run” screen, the “Run” screen
has priority. When the “Run” screen with the larger map
is viewed, the map only appears on the “Run” screen.
NOTE: Even though map windows can be placed on mul-
tiple “Run” screens, there is only one map. Changing the
data displayed on one “Run” screen changes all maps on
different “Run” screens to the same settings. Changing
the zoom setting works the same way.

RCIL11DSP257BBG 4

Coverage map: 2 x 5 example

RCIL11DSP231BBG 5

3-178
 3 - SETUP

Since the layout of the “Run” screens may also be cus-

tomized, map size is dynamic: the map fills the area that
is allocated to it. Any “Run” screen may be laid out in 2
columns by 4 rows, 2 columns by 5 rows, or 2 columns by
6 rows.

The “Map 1 x 4” window on a “Run” screen with a 2 x 4

layout is larger than the “Map 1 x 4” window on a “Run”
screen with a 2 x 6 layout.

The “Map 2 x 5” window on a “Run” screen with a 2 x 5

layout fills the entire screen, but the “Map 2 x 5” window
on a “Run” screen with a 2 x 6 layout does not.

RCIL11DSP231BBG 6

“Map Layer”
The farming and vehicle
applications that are loaded
on the display determine which
layers are available for viewing.

Press the “Layer” button to access the pop-up “Map

Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP258BBG 7

NOTE: The “Map Layer” window shown includes the win-

dows for all applications.

Press the “Data Type” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

RCIL11DSP271BBG 8

3-179
 3 - SETUP

“Data Type”
“Coverage” is the default data type that is common to all
applications on the display. “Coverage” shows the path
of the vehicle (with its implement or header) through the
field when work mode is detected.

The other available data types depend on both the

vehicle and the application that is in use:
• On some combines, the additional options are “Mois-
ture” and “Yield.”
• On some tractors, the additional option is “Fuel Econ-
omy.”
• When the “As Applied” application is present, the op-
tions may be “Granular,” “Liquid,” “Seed,” “Seed Left, ” RCIL11DSP272BBG 9
“Seed Right,” “ManApp1,” “ManApp2,” “ManApp3,” and
“ManApp4.” If you operate a tillage implement with AFS
Soil Command, “Actual Tillage Depth” is an “As Applied”
option.

Press the desired selection.

RCIL11DSP273BBG 10

The “Map Layer” window updates with the new setting.

Press the “OK” button to close the “Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP274BBG 11

3-180
 3 - SETUP

A yield map for the selected field represents harvest re-

sults with different colors. Each color indicates a range of
yield per area – ton/ha (bu/ac).

RCIL11DSP259BBG 12

A performance map for the selected field represents fuel

economy with different colors. Each color indicates a
range of fuel usage per area – L/ha (gal/ac).
NOTE: The units shown are based on the units of mea-
surement selected by the current operator in the “Opera-
tor Setup” screen (Home > Toolbox > Oper).

RCIL11DSP260BBG 13

Map toggle
Use map toggle to rapidly switch between the available
map data types for your vehicle (without using the “Map
Layer” window).

Press anywhere on the work map to instantly toggle to the

next available map type – for example, from coverage to
moisture or from coverage to granular.

Press anywhere on the work map again to toggle to the

next available map type – for example, from moisture to
yield or from granular to liquid.

The maps display in alphabetical sequence, restarting

with the coverage map in each cycle.
RCIL11DSP259BBG 14

This feature is automatically available whenever more

than one map data type is present.

3-181
 3 - SETUP

Vehicle location and heading

If the vehicle is within the selected field, an arrow indicates
the vehicle's location and direction of travel.

If the vehicle is outside the selected field, no arrow is

present (if the zoom level is set to “Field”).

How the vehicle is shown in relationship to the field de-

pends on the zoom settings.

RCIL11DSP232BBG 15

“Zoom”
Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-
dow.

Press the “Zoom” window to display the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP233BBG 16

Four zoom modes are available:

• Auto
• Field
• Manual
• Pan

RCIL11DSP234BBG 17

3-182
 3 - SETUP

With “Auto” selected, the map zooms to the extent of the

current vehicle location within the selected field. As the
vehicle moves, the map scales dynamically to keep the
vehicle and field in the map window. As the field size
increases, the map scale decreases.

RCIL11DSP235BBG 18

With “Field” selected, the entire field displays, and the size
of the map zooms dynamically to fit the available window.

As the field size increases, the map adjusts to keep the

entire field in the window. This is the default view. If the
vehicle is outside the field area, the vehicle does not ap-
pear on the map.
NOTE: If the vehicle is within the field but does not dis-
play on the map, this may indicate that the wrong field is
selected as the active field.

RCIL11DSP236BBG 19

With “Manual” selected, magnifying glass

buttons appear in the map window. The
operator uses the buttons to choose the
zoom level.

Press the “Minus” button to decrease map size (zoom out)

within the window. Press the “Plus” button to increase
map size (zoom in) within the window.

Each press of a button represents a 50% change in zoom

level.

The usability of the information viewed determines the

zoom limits.

RCIL11DSP025BBG 20

3-183
 3 - SETUP

With “Pan” selected, the “Plus” and “Minus” buttons ap-

pear in the map window and have the same function as
they do in manual mode. In addition, the operator can
press a location on the map to pan away from the vehicle
to that location. The new pan location shifts to the center
of the map.

Press a location on the map to pan the map view to that

location.

RCIL11DSP025BBG 21

The map pans to the new location.

RCIL11DSP026BBG 22

“Boundary”
Field boundaries can be created with the display or with
the desktop software.

A boundary is represented by a line that displays along

with the other active map layers:
• Bold red line – outer boundary (vehicle is within the
boundary)
• Bold black line – outer boundary (vehicle is outside of
the boundary)
• Maroon line – inner boundary
NOTE: See 3-128 for information about field boundaries.
RCIL11DSP237BBG 23

3-184
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Bound” (boundary) window to display the

pop-up options window.

RCIL11DSP238BBG 24

Press “On” to display boundary information with the other

active map layers.

Press “Off” to hide boundary information.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP239BBG 25

“Marks”
Field marks for user-defined field
conditions appear on the maps,
when enabled, along with the other
active map layers.

All field marks appear as small circles. An operator can

mark locations on the map with the “Field Marks 1-2” and
“Fields Marks 3-4” windows on the “Run” screens.
NOTE: See 3-171 for information about field marks.

RCIL11DSP240BBG 26

3-185
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Marks” window to display the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP241BBG 27

Press “On” to display field marks with the other active map
layers.

Press “Off” to hide the field marks.

NOTE: Field mark locations are saved to the memory stick
regardless of the setting in the “Marks” window. This set-
ting only determines whether the marked locations are
shown in the map windows.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP242BBG 28

“Swaths”
The autoguidance swath pattern appears on the map,
when enabled, along with the other active map layers.

The map window shows the current swath (red line) and
the three swaths (blue lines) to the immediate left and right
of the current swath.

If present in the map view, the recorded swath appears in

olive green.

The start point (green circle) and stop point (red star) of
the recorded swath also appear.

RCIL11DSP279BBG 29

3-186
 3 - SETUP

The operator can view swath creation with a map window

while recording a swath.

For curve and spiral swaths, the swath being recorded ap-
pears as a black line and updates as each new GPS co-
ordinate is recorded. An arrow indicates the vehicle loca-
tion. The location where the “Start” button or the “Mark 1”
button was pressed appears as a black circle. The num-
ber within the circle identifies which “Swath Recorder” win-
dow is in use: “Swath 1 Recorder” or “Swath 2 Recorder.”

For circle swaths, “Mark 1”, “Mark 2,” and “Mark 3” points
must be recorded before the swath can be displayed.
Since the swath is completely recorded when the “Mark
3” button is pressed, the map screen immediately updates
when the swath is selected.
RCIL11DSP243BBG 30

For straight swaths and heading swaths, the location

where the “Mark A” button was pressed appears as a
black circle. Since the swath is completely recorded
when the “Mark B” button or the heading is entered,
the map screen immediately updates when the swath is
selected.

RCIL11DSP244BBG 31

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Swath” window to display the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP245BBG 32

3-187
 3 - SETUP

Press “On” to display autoguidance swaths with the other

active map layers.

Press “Off” to hide the swaths.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP246BBG 33

“Data Style”
Use the “Data Style” window on the “Map Layer” window
to change the appearance of the data layer on the map.
The data layer is the yield, moisture, fuel economy, or
“as applied” product map that is created by the resident
applications.

The data style can be:

• Color
• Gray

OR

• Off (hidden)
RCIL11DSP260BBG 34

RCIL11DSP261BBG 35

3-188
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Data Style” window to display the pop-up op-

tions window.

RCIL11DSP275BBG 36

Press “Off” to hide the data layer.

Press “Color” to display the data layer in color.

Press “Gray” to display the data layer in gray scale.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP276BBG 37

“Rx Style”
The “Rx Style” (prescription style) window is only avail-
able with the “As Applied” application for planters, seed-
ers, and sprayers. The window determines how a pre-
scription map appears in conjunction with the “as applied”
map for a product.

When “Outline” is selected, the boundaries for the pre-

scription zones appear as black lines that are superim-
posed on the “as applied” map for the product.

RCIL11DSP247BBG 38

3-189
 3 - SETUP

When “Color” is selected, the “as applied” map for the

product is superimposed on a color map of the prescrip-
tion zones.

RCIL11DSP248BBG 39

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Rx Style” window to display the pop-up options

window.

RCIL11DSP249BBG 40

Press “Outline” to display the boundary lines for the pre-

scription zones.

Press “Color” to display the prescription zones in color.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window.

RCIL11DSP250BBG 41

3-190
 3 - SETUP

“Obstacles”
User-defined field obstacles appear on the work map,
when enabled, along with the other active map layers.
NOTE: Even if an operator chooses not to display obsta-
cles, the display still warns the operator if the path of the
vehicle (with its implement or header) will contact the ob-
stacle.

All obstacles types – closed, open or point – normally dis-

play in amber. An obstacle on the map turns red when the
vehicle (with its implement or header) enters the warning
zone as defined in the “Look Ahead Time” window on the
“Precision Farming Setup” screen (Home > Toolbox > PF).
NOTE: See 3-159 for information about field obstacles. RCIL11DSP280BBG 42

Press the “Layer” button to access the “Map Layer” win-

dow.

Press the “Obstacles” window to display the pop-up op-

tions window.

RCIL11DSP251BBG 43

Press “On” to display obstacles with the other active map

layers.

Press “Off” to hide the obstacles.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection and close the
“Map Layer” window

RCIL11DSP252BBG 44

3-191
 3 - SETUP

Map legends
Press the “Legend” button to display or edit the color legend for a map. The “Legend”
pop-up window displays the ranges for the shades used on the map.

Yield legend
Any data at or above 134.00
Any data between 119.00 and 133.99
Any data between 104.00 and 118.99
Any data between 89.00 and 103.99
Any data between 74.00 and 88.99
Any data between 15.00 and 73.99
Any data below 15.00 appears as blank.

RCIL11DSP253BBG 45

Fuel economy legend

Any data at or above 468.00
Any data between 390.00 and 467.99
Any data between 312.00 and 389.99
Any data between 234.00 and 311.99
Any data between 156.00 and 233.99
Any data between 78.00 and 155.99
Any data below 78.00 appears as blank.

RCIL11DSP254BBG 46

The operator can change the legend ranges, but not the
colors used. Set the ranges to keep the shading propor-
tional to the current rate – harvesting rate, application rate,
fuel usage rate, etc.

A unique legend is available for each data type – yield,

moisture, fuel economy, etc. The legends remain in effect
across farms and fields until an operator changes them.

For harvest applications, the legends are unique to each

crop type.

For the “As Applied” application, the legends are unique

to each product – seed, liquid, granular, etc.

The legends are part of the crop setup information that

can be imported from another vehicle via its memory stick.
See 4-3 for information.

3-192
 3 - SETUP

Press any range on the legend to access the numeric key-

pad.

RCIL11DSP253BBG 47

Use the numeric keypad to enter a new value.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without

changing the value.

If desired, continue editing range values until the legend

is complete.

Press the “OK” button to close the legend.

RCIL11DSP255BBG 48

Guidance engaged logging

In some applications it is useful to log and export a history
of autoguidance engagement during field operations.

You can log and export the following parameters:

• Engaged area (1)
• Engaged time (2)

RAIL19PLM0575BA 49

3-193
 3 - SETUP

The “Engaged Area” and “Engaged Time” User-Defined

Windows (UDW) are only available to be added to the
“Summary Data 2” screen. They are not available in run
screens.

RAIL19PLM0575BA 50

The engaged area is the total area of the field covered by

the implement while the vehicle is in work and the autogu-
idance is engaged. The engaged area is given in hectares
or acres, depending upon your selected unit of measure-
ment.

RAIL19PLM0576BA 51

The engaged time is the total time that the vehicle is in

work and the autoguidance is engaged.

RAIL19PLM0576BA 52

The engaged area and engaged time parameters are tied

to the Grower/Farm/Field/Task (GFFT) and to the selected
operator.

If you change the grower, farm, field, or task instance,

the engaged area and engaged time parameters reset to
zero.

If you change the operator, the engaged area and en-

gaged time parameters reset to zero.

If you subsequently return to a GFFT and operator that

your used earlier, the values from the latest instance are
preserved.

RAIL19PLM0578BA 53

3-194
 3 - SETUP

In the “Summary Data 2” screen if the “Summary Field”

or the “Summary Operator” windows are changed to “All,”
the engaged area and engaged time parameters display
the respective sums.

RAIL19PLM0577BA 54

The engaged area and engaged time parameters are ex-

ported to the .cn1 folder when you export data to the USB
drive upon shutdown of the display. The data can then be
imported into your farm management software.

The engaged area and engaged time parameters are also

included with telematics data transfers. See “Telemat-
ics Screen” (8-1) for more information on telematics data
transfers.

3-195
 3 - SETUP

Swath map
The swath map is a single-layer map that shows swath alignment (overlap and skip) and can be used to align the
vehicle to the next swath.
NOTE: The swath maps are available only if the “Autoguidance” application or the “Assisted Steer” application is
installed on the display.
Map sizes “Swath Map 1 x 4” example
Two different swath map windows – “Swath Map 1 x 4” and
“Swath Map 2 x 5” – are available for the “Run” screens.
The windows differ in size, but not in function. The first
number of the map label indicates the number of columns
used on the “Run” screens, and the second number indi-
cates the number of rows.

Some software allows the operators to place the “Swath

Map 1 x 4” window in the left-hand area. When the “Swath
Map 1 x 4” window is in the left-hand area and on a “Run”
screen, the left-hand area has priority. When the “Run”
screen is viewed, the “Swath Map 1 x 4” window only dis-
plays in the left-hand area.

When the “Swath Map 1 x 4” window is in the left-hand

area, and the “Swath Map 2 x 5” window is on a “Run” RCIL11DSP030BBG 1
screen, the “Run” screen has priority. When the “Run”
screen with the larger map is viewed, the map only dis- “Swath Map 2 x 5” example
plays on the “Run” screen.

RCIL11DSP031BBG 2

3-196
 3 - SETUP

Vehicle
A generic symbol for the vehicle type – tractor, combine,
sprayer, etc – represents the vehicle in the swath map.

The map always offers a zoomed-in view of the current

position of the vehicle in relation to the two swaths on
either side of the vehicle. RCIL11DSP032BBG 3

Vehicle position on the swath map is fixed in the center

of the map window. The field and swath pattern rotate
around the vehicle when the vehicle changes heading.

The compass in the upper left-hand corner of the swath

map rotates to indicate the current heading of the vehicle.

RCIL11DSP033BBG 4

The “Swath Map” window is particularly beneficial for

aligning to the correct swath after the end of row turn or
when working a spiral or circular pattern, especially when
working at night.

RCIL11DSP034BBG 5

3-197
 3 - SETUP

View angles
The swath map offers three view angles: 20°, 45° and 90°.
The angles provide different perspectives of the vehicle
relative to the horizon when an observer views the vehicle
from behind.

RCIL11DSP256BBG 6

A 90° view angle (red angle) means the observer is view-

ing the vehicle from directly above the vehicle.

RCIL11DSP032BBG 7

A 45° view angle (blue angle) means the observer is view-

ing the vehicle at a 45° downward angle toward the hori-
zon.

RCIL11DSP035BBG 8

3-198
 3 - SETUP

A 20° view angle (green) means the observer is viewing

the vehicle at a 20° downward angle toward the horizon.

RCIL11DSP036BBG 9

Press the “View Angle” button on the map window to ac-

cess the pop-up options window.

Press the desired setting to change the map view angle

and close the window.

RCIL11DSP037BBG 10

3-199
 3 - SETUP

Map contents
If the vehicle is working, the swath map displays the swath
width for the vehicle (with its implement or header) as a
green area outlined in black as the vehicle moves. If the
vehicle is not working, no swath information is mapped as
the vehicle moves.
NOTE: The color used for coverage has no significance:
it does not represent a level of yield, application, or per-
formance results.

RAIL12DSP1002BA 11

If a recorded swath is selected for the field, a red line

represents the current swath, and blue lines represent the
swaths on either side. The recorded swath also displays
if it is in the current view of the field.

The autoguidance swath pattern is always overlaid on the

working swaths when the “Autoguidance” application is
present.

RCIL11DSP039BBG 12

The swath map also displays any field marks, boundaries,

and obstacles that are present in the current view of the
field. The display of marks, boundaries, and obstacles
cannot be toggled off by any operator control on the swath
map.

RAIL12DSP1003BA 13

3-200
 3 - SETUP

Swath alignment
The swath map can reveal problems with swath
alignment as in this example where the vehicle offset
values were not entered correctly. A pattern of overlap
in one pass, followed by skip in the next pass, indicates
that the implement or header was not set up properly.
This may occur if:
• The implement or header is offset on the vehicle, but no
offset value was entered.
• The wrong value was entered for the offset amount.

OR

• The wrong direction was entered for the offset: a pos-

itive value was used for the offset amount instead of a RAIL12DSP1004BA 14

negative value, or vice versa.

The swath map can also reveal problems with the
implement width or header width definition.
• If the same value is entered for swath width (or working
width) and implement width (or header width), a skip is
present between each pass.

RAIL12DSP1005BA 15

• If the values for implement width (or header width) and

swath width (or working width) are switched, each pass
overlaps the previous pass.

RAIL12DSP1006BA 16

3-201
 3 - SETUP

The swath map also shows any intentional overlaps that

are created when finishing a field.

RCIL11DSP044BBG 17

3-202
 3 - SETUP

"E-NOTES" APPLICATION

Introduction
The “E-Notes” application is required by any vehicle that performs spraying, but the application is available for any
farming operation in which tracking field and weather conditions is important.

The “E-Notes” application does not require a GPS receiver, but the “Grower,” “Farm,” “Field,” “Task,” and “Crop” win-
dows must be populated before the “E-Notes” screens become active.

Any information on field and weather conditions automatically saves to the task on the memory stick. Weather infor-
mation is time and date stamped at the time of observation and can be updated as frequently as required as conditions
change.

To minimize the steps for the operator, the selections on all “E-notes” screens apply to all subsequent tasks until
they are changed. The following actions do NOT reset the windows to their default selections:
• Changing any component in the active data set – grower, farm, field, task, crop, etc.
• Powering the display OFF and then ON

The operator only visits the “E-notes” screens when any of the note windows must be changed.

This chapter explains:

• How to select soil type, soil moisture, soil condition, and crop residue for the current field on the “Field Notes” screen
• How to select sky condition, wind speed, wind direction, temperature, and humidity on the “Weather Notes” screen
• How to create notes and create, edit, or select spray tips for spraying operations on the “Xtra Notes” screen
On the “Home” screen, press the “Performance” icon to
access the “Performance” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “E-Notes” icon in the navigation bar.

NOTE: Since the “E-Notes” icon is shaped like a down
arrow, it opens a series of sub-menus for the “E-Notes”
application.

RCIL11DSP545BBG 2

3-203
 3 - SETUP

"Field Notes" screen

The “Field Notes” screen displays by default.

If a different “E-Notes” screen displays, press the “Field”

icon on the navigation bar to access the “Field Notes”
screen.

Use the four windows with predefined lists to select the

soil type, soil moisture, soil condition, and crop residue for
the current field. The lists offer standard classifications
to be used for all fields and cannot be modified by an
operator.

Press the “Soil Type” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.
NOTE: The default setting for all soil and crop residue
windows is “Unknown.” RCIL11DSP417BBG 1

Press the selection that best matches the type of the soil
in the current field.

RCIL11DSP418BBG 2

Press the “Soil Moisture” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the selection that best matches the moisture of the

soil in the current field.

RCIL11DSP420BBG 3

3-204
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Soil Condition” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the selection that best matches the condition of the

soil in the current field.

RCIL11DSP422BBG 4

Press the “Crop Residue” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the selection that best matches the amount of crop

residue in the current field.

RCIL11DSP424BBG 5

3-205
 3 - SETUP

"Weather Notes" screen

Press the “Weather” icon in the navigation bar to access
the “Weather Notes” screen.

RCIL11DSP426BBG 1

Use the six windows on the “Weather Notes” screen:

• To apply a time and date stamp for when the current
weather conditions were entered or selected
• To select the current sky condition
• To enter the current wind speed
• To select the current wind direction
• To enter the current temperature
• To enter the current humidity percentage

The “Time Observed” window only becomes active after

a selection or entry has been made in another window on
this screen. There is no observation to time stamp until
one of the windows contains a selection or entry.
RCIL11DSP428BBG 2
The “Sky Condition” and “Wind Direction” windows on this
screen contain predefined lists. The lists offer standard
classifications to be used for all tasks and cannot be mod-
ified by the operator.
Press the “Sky Condition” window to access the pop-up
options window.

Press the selection that most closely matches the current

sky condition.

RCIL11DSP430BBG 3

3-206
 3 - SETUP

Once any window on the “Weather Notes” screen is popu-

lated, the “Time Observed” window becomes active. The
current time and date automatically appear.

The time and date values displayed are from the windows
on the “Display Setup” screen for this moment of obser-
vation.

The time stamp uses the format selected in the “Time

Format” window on the “Operator Setup” screen (Home
> Toolbox > Oper). The date stamp uses the format se-
lected in the “Date Format” window on the same screen.

Thereafter, at any time, the operator can update the time

and date stamp for the moment of observation by pressing
the “Time Observed” window.
RCIL11DSP432BBG 4

An information message displays: “Select Update if you

wish to update the Time Observed to the current time.
Cancel will cancel any update to Time Observed.”

Press the “Update” button on the message to update the

“Time Observed” value to the current time and date and
clear the message.

Press the “Cancel” button to leave the current time and

date stamp unchanged and clear the message.

RCIL11DSP433BBG 5

Press the “Wind Speed” window to access the numeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the current wind speed in dec-

imal increments in km/h or mph, depending on the unit
of measurement selected. The acceptable range is 0.0 –
160.9 km/h (0.0 – 100.0 mph).

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

NOTE: To change this value, the operator must access
the keypad, delete the current value, and enter a new one.

RCIL11DSP435BBG 6

3-207
 3 - SETUP

Press the “Wind Direction” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the selection that most closely matches the current

wind direction.

RCIL11DSP437BBG 7

Press the “Temperature” window to access the numeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter the current temperature in de-

grees Celsius or Fahrenheit, depending on the unit of
measurement selected. The acceptable range is -50 –
70 °C (-58.0 – 158.0 °F). Use the minus (-) key to enter a
negative value.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

NOTE: To change this value, the operator must access
the keypad, delete the current value, and enter a new one.

RCIL11DSP439BBG 8

Press the “Humidity” window to access the numeric key-

pad.

Use the keypad to enter the current humidity as a percent-

age. The acceptable range is 0 – 100%.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

NOTE: To change this value, the operator must access
the keypad, delete the current value, and enter a new one.

RCIL11DSP441BBG 9

3-208
 3 - SETUP

"Xtra Notes" screen

Press the “Notes” icon in the navigation bar to access the
“Xtra Notes” screen.

RCIL11DSP443BBG 1

“Note #”
In addition to the “Spray Tip” window, the “Xtra Notes”
screen offers five “Note #” windows for the current task.
The operator can use the “Note #” windows to describe
any other information affecting the current farming opera-
tion.

A note applies to the current task and any subsequent

tasks until it is deleted. To update a note, the operator
must access the keypad and edit or delete the current
content.

RCIL11DSP444BBG 2

Press any “Note #” window to access the alphanumeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to enter, edit, or delete the note informa-

tion.
NOTE: A note can contain any mix of characters up to 18
characters long.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the note.

RCIL11DSP445BBG 3

3-209
 3 - SETUP

“Spray Tip”
The “Spray Tip” window is required by any vehicle per-
forming spraying to identify the tip model, spray angle, and
output flow rate for the current operation.

A spray tip, like a tag, acts as an electronic note for the

grower or operator to save another variable in crop pro-
duction and to filter production results for that variable.

The spray tip is linked to the task, and only one spray tip
may be assigned to a task. A maximum of 50 spray tips
can be created, and a unique ID is assigned to each spray
tip.
NOTE: Change the task first, and then change the spray
tip to ensure that data is retained for the previous and RCIL11DSP444BBG 4
subsequent spray tip.

When multiple vehicles are used, spray tips should be cre-

ated on one vehicle and then transferred to the other ve-
hicles via the memory stick. This ensures that spray tips
are identified by a uniform set of IDs across all vehicles.

Use the “Delete” screen to delete spray tips as required

(Home > Data Management > Delete).
To add, edit, or create a spray tip with the display, press
the “Spray Tip” window to access the pop-up option win-
dow.

If no tips exist, the only option is “New.”

RCIL11DSP447BBG 5

Thereafter, the options are “Select,” “Edit Name,” and

“New.”

Use “Select” to pick a spray tip from a user-defined list.

Use “Edit Name” to change the name of a spray tip.

NOTE: Do not use “Edit Name” to create a new spray tip.
Editing a spray tip does not change the unique identifica-
tion number assigned for each spray tip.

Use “New” to add a spray tip to the current list.

RCIL11DSP448BBG 6

3-210
 3 - SETUP

Press “Select” to display a pop-up option window of cur-

rent spray tips.

Press the required spray tip.

The screen updates with the new spray tip.

RCIL11DSP450BBG 7

Press “Edit Name” or “New” to display the alphanumeric

keypad.

Use the keypad to create or edit a spray tip.

NOTE: A note can contain any mix of characters up to 18
characters long.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

RCIL11DSP452BBG 8

3-211
3 - SETUP

3-212
 4 - OPERATION

4 - OPERATION
DATA MANAGEMENT

Introduction
This chapter explains:
• How to import information from another vehicle
• How to filter the crop type information for all display and farming software
• How to delete information from display memory and the memory stick
• How to manage individual map items
• How to import field boundaries, MultiSwath+ guidance lines, and variable rate prescriptions in the shapefile format
With the AFS Pro 700 displays, information can be
shared:
• Between applications
• Between vehicles of the same type (tractor to tractor)
• Between vehicles of different types (combine to tractor
and vice versa)
• Between the display and the desktop software

The information exchange occurs by sharing the memory

stick between vehicles and/or the desktop software. To
accomplish this, the display and farming software needs
a way to differentiate one vehicle from another.

Each vehicle already has a unique identification number

– its product identification number (PIN) or serial number.
No other vehicle, whether it is a combine, a tractor, or a
sprayer, has the same PIN or serial number.

The display transparently identifies the information from

each vehicle using its PIN or serial number.
RCIL11DSP171BBG 1

The “Vehicle Name” window in the “Toolbox” screens or

on a “Run” screen allows the operator to supply a more
friendly, proxy name for the vehicle. This proxy vehicle
name, once created, is what appears in the display and
the desktop software.
NOTE: The vehicle PIN or serial number is entered dur-
ing software installation on the display. On tractors, the
“Vehicle” screen (Home > Toolbox > Vehicle) is the only
location where the PIN displays. On combines, the “Com-
bine” screen (Home > Toolbox > Comb) is the only loca-
tion where the serial number displays. This feature is not
available on the generic vehicle type.
NOTE: The “Vehicle Name” window can be placed on any
“Run” screen for operator convenience.

Any information the grower wants to share with a vehicle is

exchanged by inserting the memory stick from one vehicle
into the display on the other vehicle.

4-1
 4 - OPERATION

Automatic sharing
Some information is shared automatically and does not
need to be imported.

The grower-farm-field structure can be shared simply by

inserting the memory stick into the display when it is un-
powered and then powering the display ON. For exam-
ple, Vehicle A has the current grower-farm-field structure
for your agri-business on its memory stick; Vehicle B is
new and does not. If the memory stick from Vehicle A
is inserted into the display in Vehicle B, the display rec-
ognizes new information it does not have and loads the
information into display memory.
NOTE: Information that is in display memory is saved
when the vehicle is turned OFF.

When the memory stick for Vehicle B is reinserted into

the display and the display is powered ON, it records the
grower-farm-field structure from memory to its own mem-
ory stick.
RCIL11DSP171BBG 2

The data types that are automatically shared between

vehicles and/or the desktop computer are:
• Grower
• Farm
• Field
• Operator
• Product
• Tag
• Mark
• Container
• Boundary
• Obstacle
• Swath line (from the “Autoguidance” application)
NOTE: This is the recommended method for sharing
these data types since the IDs for the data remains iden-
tical across vehicles. This greatly simplifies processing
data with the desktop software.

Vehicle-specific information
Some information is never shared between vehicles.
Vehicle-specific calibrations are never shared. For
example:
• Steering calibrations reflect the condition of the steering
pump and a steering sensor.
• Distance or slip calibrations reflect the condition of a
vehicle’s tires.

Any calibration that reflects the performance properties

specific to one vehicle cannot be shared.

4-2
 4 - OPERATION

"Import" screen
The data types that are discussed in the following pages
are not automatically shared between vehicles.

In most cases, the data that is imported is added to the

existing data on the display.

There are two exceptions for combines only: imported

crop setup information and imported crop calibration in-
formation replace the existing data in the display.
On the “Home” screen, press the “Data Management”
icon to access the “Data Management” screens.
NOTE: The memory stick from which the data is to be im-
ported must be inserted into the display before the display
is powered ON.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Import” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Import” screen.
NOTE: The “Import” button remains unselectable until
both the “Data Type” and “Vehicle Name” windows are
populated.

RAIL16DSP0582BA 2

4-3
 4 - OPERATION

Press the “Data Type” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

The options that display are vehicle-dependent. For ex-

ample, “Implement” and “Sequence” are unique to tractors
and do not display for combines.

The display supports 20 current layouts, 20 implements,

40 work conditions, and 30 sequences for the current ve-
hicle.

A message displays when importing additional data ex-

ceeds the maximum number allowed for the data type.
To import additional data when the maximum number
is reached, current information in the display must be
deleted. Deletion of data types is explained later in this
chapter. RAIL16DSP0583BA 3

Press the desired selection.

Press the “Vehicle Name” window to select the pop-up
options window.

Press the desired vehicle ID.

NOTE: The current vehicle’s name never displays: the
current vehicle already has its own information. Only the
names of other vehicles display.

RAIL16DSP0584BA 4

Press the “Import” button.

RAIL16DSP0584BA 5

4-4
 4 - OPERATION

A confirmation message displays: “Import the selected

records?”

Press the “Yes” button to import the data.

Press the “No” button to cancel the import.

Repeat this process to import additional data types.

RAIL16DSP0585BA 6

4-5
 4 - OPERATION

"Filter List" screen (crop type filter)

The complete crop list is not required in most farming op-
erations. Use the “Filter” screen to deselect the crop types
that will not be used. Deselecting a crop type with this
screen removes the crop type across all software on the
display, reducing the risk of selecting an incorrect crop
type.

The filtered list of selected crops can be modified at any

time. Select or deselect crop types as your farming oper-
ations change.

On the “Home” screen, press the “Data Management”

icon to access the “Data Management” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Filter” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Filter” screen.

The crop list contains all available crop types for the vehi-
cle. Use this screen to limit the crop types that appear in
the “Crop Type” window to those used in your operation.
This list may be changed at any time without affecting any
recorded data.
NOTE: By default, all crop types are selected.

Press the “Filter Crop List” button to access the “Filter

Crop List” pop-up window.

RAIL16DSP0586BA 2

The crops selected on this list populate the “Crop Type”

window on the “Profile Setup” screen or the “Run”
screens. If a crop is not selected on this list, it cannot be
selected in the “Crop Type” window.
NOTE: The crop selection list varies by vehicle type –
combines, tractors, etc.

Press the box next to the crop name to select or de-

select it, depending on its current state. An “X” indicates
that the box is selected.

Press the “None” button to deselect all crops.

Press the “All” button to select all crops.

Press the arrows on the scroll bar to page down or up RAIL16DSP0587BA 3

through window entries.

When you are satisfied with the selected crops, press the
“Enter” button to save the selection.

4-6
 4 - OPERATION

The “Crop Type” window’s list displays only the crop types
that are selected in the “Filter Crop List” pop-up window.
NOTE: Crop type names cannot be edited.

RCIL11DSP214BBG 4

4-7
 4 - OPERATION

"Delete" screen
Use the “Delete” screen to manage the information on the memory stick. Deleting data types – farm, field, task, etc. –
removes the information from both the display memory and the memory stick. This information cannot be recovered
if it has not been archived.

Delete information from the memory stick only after that information has been archived on your business computer
with the desktop software. This practice prevents the accidental deletion of information that you require.

There may be occasions where a “Device Full” message will tempt you to create free space by deleting stored data
so that you can continue your current operation. Know what you are deleting and ensure that you have an archived
copy of the information before you proceed.
Press the “Data Management” icon on the home screen
to access the “Data Management” screens.

Press the “Delete” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Delete” screen.
NOTE: The “Delete” button and other windows are
dimmed and unselectable if the memory stick or display
memory does not contain data of the type displayed in
the “Data Type” window.
Press the “Data Type” window to access the pop-up op-
tions window.

RAIL16DSP0588BA 1

The options that display are vehicle-dependent. For ex-

ample, “Implement” and “Sequence” are unique to tractors
and do not display for combines.

Press the arrows on the scroll bar to page up or down

through the options window.

Press the data type you wish to delete.

NHIL20PLM1178AA 2

4-8
 4 - OPERATION

Grower
Farms and fields are linked to the grower. Deleting a
grower prevents access to all farms, fields, tasks, and pro-
duction data that are linked to the grower.

Since each grower has a unique ID that s used across

operations and vehicles, only delete a grower if you are
sure that you have no future use for the grower or any of
its associated farms, fields, tasks, and data. Re-creating
the same grower at a later time results in a new grower
with a different ID, requiring more management effort with
the desktop software.

The “Delete” screen adds additional windows, as needed,

to assist the operator.
RAIL16DSP0591BA 3

With “Grower” selected as the data type, if more than one

grower is present on the memory stick, the “Grower” win-
dow defaults to the “All” setting. If only one grower is
present on the memory stick, the grower’s name is dis-
played in the “Grower” window.

Press the “Delete” button to remove all growers from dis-

play memory and the memory stick.
A confirmation message displays: “Delete the selected
records?”

Press the “Yes” button to delete all growers.

Press the “No” button to cancel the deletion.

RAIL16DSP0592BA 4

To delete growers selectively, press the “Grower” window

to display the pop-up options window.

Press the box next to the grower name to select or de-

select it, depending on its current state. An “X” indicates
that the box is selected.

Press the “None” button to deselect all growers.

Press the “All” button to select all growers.

When you are satisfied with the selection, press the “En-
ter” button to save the setting.

RAIL16DSP0593BA 5

4-9
 4 - OPERATION

If more than one but less than all growers are selected,
the “Grower” window updates with the number of selected
items. If only one grower is selected, the grower’s name
displays.

Press the “Delete” button to delete the selection.

RAIL16DSP0594BA 6

A confirmation message displays: “Delete the selected

records?”

Press the “Yes” button to delete all growers.

Press the “No” button to cancel the deletion.

RAIL16DSP0595BA 7

4-10
 4 - OPERATION

Farm
Select “Farm” to delete all information related to the se-
lected farm or farms. This includes fields, tasks, obsta-
cles, boundaries, calibrations, autoguidance swaths, and
GPS records for any operation – planting, spraying, har-
vesting, etc. – associated with the farm.

Since each farm has a unique ID and is used across op-

erations and vehicles, only delete a farm if you are sure
that you have no future use for the farm or any of its as-
sociated fields and data. Re-creating the same farm at a
later time results in a new farm with a different ID, requir-
ing more management effort with the desktop software.

RAIL16DSP0644BA 8

To selectively delete farms from display memory and the

memory stick:
1. Select “Farm” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Press the “Grower” window to limit the selection to a
specific grower.
3. Press the “Farm” window to access the pop-up options
window.
4. Select the farms to be deleted.
NOTE: If only one farm is present on the memory stick, the
farm’s name automatically populates the “Farm” window.

5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.

6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected farms.
RAIL16DSP0597BA 9
7. Press the “Yes” or No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.

4-11
 4 - OPERATION

Field
Select “Field” to delete all information related to the se-
lected field or fields. This includes tasks, boundary, obsta-
cles, calibrations, autoguidance swaths, and GPS records
for any operation – planting, spraying, harvesting, etc. –
associated with the field.

Since each field has a unique ID and is used across oper-

ations and vehicles, only delete a field if you are sure that
you have no future use for the field or any of its associated
data. Re-creating the same field at a later time results in a
new field with a different ID, requiring more management
effort with the desktop software.

RAIL16DSP0645BA 10

To delete specific fields within a farm:

1. Press the “Grower” window to display the pop-up op-
tions window and select the grower of the farm which
contains the field.
2. Press the “Farm” window to select the farm which con-
tains the field. A pop-up options window displays.
3. Press a farm in the options window to select it.

RAIL16DSP0646BA 11

4. Press the “Field” window to display the pop-up options

window.
5. Press the box next to a field name to select or dese-
lect it, depending on its current state. An “X” indicates
that the box is selected. Press the “All” button to select
all fields.
6. When you are satisfied with the selection, press the
“Enter” button to save the setting. If more than one
but less than all fields are selected, the “Field” window
displays the total items selected. If only one field is
selected, the window displays the Field’s name.
7. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selection. The
confirmation message displays.

RAIL16DSP0648BA 12

4-12
 4 - OPERATION

Work condition
Work conditions are a special case:
• On tractors, a work condition is linked to the implement.
• On combines, a work condition is linked to the crop type.

When “Work Condition” is selected in the “Data Type” win-

dow, the “Crop Type” window or “Implement” window must
be populated before deletion can occur.
NOTE: Work conditions are always managed by the soft-
ware that created them. When the display is shared with
different vehicle types, only the work conditions that were
created by the active software can be deleted. Selecting
“All” only deletes work conditions that were created by the
active application. RAIL16DSP0653BA 13

To selectively delete work conditions from display

memory and the memory stick:
1. Select “Work Condition” in the “Data Type” window.

RAIL16DSP0652BA 14

4-13
 4 - OPERATION

2. Select an implement or crop type in the “Implement”

window or the “Crop Type” window.
3. Press the “Work Condition” window to access the
pop-up options window.
4. Select the work conditions to be deleted.
5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected work
conditions.
7. Press the Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.

RAIL16DSP0654BA 15

RAIL16DSP0655BA 16

4-14
 4 - OPERATION

Task
Task is the data type in which most logged data and GPS
data is stored. Deleting a task removes all summary data
and logged data for the task.

Task deletion is the recommended method:

• For recovering memory stick space for the current op-
eration – planting, spraying, harvesting – when you no
longer need to retain the summary data for the tasks
• For recovering memory stick space from a previous op-
eration which has been archived: for example, tasks
used for planting which still reside on the memory stick
during harvest season
• For beginning a new season’s work while retaining the NHIL20PLM1244AA 17
grower-farm-field structure

The task data type uses the most windows, but the same
processes as the other data types.

To delete all tasks from display memory and the memory

stick:
1. Select “Task” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Select “All” in the “Operation” window; the “Farm,”
“Field,” and “Task” windows default to “All” as a result
of this selection. Press the Delete” button to delete all
tasks for all operations for all farms and fields.
3. Press the “Yes” or No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.
NHIL20PLM1246AA 18

4-15
 4 - OPERATION

To selectively delete tasks from display memory and the

memory stick:
1. Select “Task” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Use the “Operation” window to filter the tasks to all or
one operation.
3. Use the “Grower” window to filter the tasks to all or
one grower.
4. Use the “Farm” window to filter the tasks to all or one
farm.
5. Use the “Field” window to filter the tasks to all or one
field.
6. Use the “Task” window to filter the tasks to all or se-
lected tasks.
NHIL20PLM1243AA 19
7. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
8. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected tasks.
9. Press the “Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation
message.

NHIL20PLM1247AA 20

When operating with the AFS AccuSync feature, your dis-

play will auto-generate a task to view coverage data from
the other vehicles in the job.

Use the “Task Type” window to filter the task list by tasks
associated with only your vehicle, or tasks associated with
the other vehicles that are participating in the job. Filtering
the task type allows you to delete unnecessary tasks that
may otherwise take up storage space.
NOTE: The “Task Type” window is only visible if there is
at least one task from other vehicles in the job.

NHIL20PLM1248AA 21

4-16
 4 - OPERATION

Select “All” to include tasks from both your vehicle and

other vehicles in the job.

Select “This Vehicle” to include only tasks from your vehi-

cle.

Select “Remote Vehicle” to include tasks from other vehi-

cles in the job.

NHIL20PLM1249AA 22

4-17
 4 - OPERATION

GPS data
GPS data consumes the most storage space on the mem-
ory stick. GPS data includes yield data and “as applied”
data.

GPS data deletion is the recommended method for re-

covering memory stick space for the current operation –
planting, spraying, harvesting – when you need to retain
the summary data for the tasks.

To selectively delete GPS data from display memory and

the memory stick:
1. Select “GPS data” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Use the “Grower” window to filter the GPS data to all
or one grower. RAIL16DSP0612BA 23

3. Use the “Farm” window to filter the GPS data to all or

one farm.
NOTE: Only farms that have GPS data saved to their
fields display. If only one farm is present on the mem-
ory stick with GPS data saved to its fields, only one farm
is available for selection.

4. Use the “GPS Data” window to filter the data to all or

selected fields.
5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected GPS
data.
7. Press the “Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.

4-18
 4 - OPERATION

Boundary
Boundaries are always recorded for a specific field. A field
can contain multiple boundaries, and all boundaries are
deleted when the field is selected, either individually or
within its farm and grower structure.

To delete a specific field's boundaries from display

memory and the memory stick:
1. Select “Boundary” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Use the “Grower” window to filter the boundaries to all
or one grower.
3. Use the “Farm” window to filter the boundaries to all or
one farm.
RAIL16DSP0614BA 24
NOTE: Only farms that have boundaries saved to their
fields display. If only one farm is present on the memory
stick with boundaries saved to its fields, only one farm is
available for selection.

4. Use the “Field” window to filter the data to all or se-

lected fields.
5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected bound-
aries.
7. Press the “Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.
NOTE: Use the “Map Management” screen, explained
later in this chapter, to delete individual boundaries.
RAIL16DSP0615BA 25

4-19
 4 - OPERATION

Headland
Headlands are always recorded for a specific field. A
field can contain multiple headlands, and all headlands
are deleted when the field is selected, either individually
or within its farm and grower structure.

To delete a specific field's headlands from display

memory and the memory stick:
1. Select “Headland” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Use the “Grower” window to filter the boundaries to all
or one grower.
3. Use the “Farm” window to filter the boundaries to all or
one farm.
RAIL16DSP0881BA 26
NOTE: Only farms that have headlands saved to their
fields display. If only one farm is present on the mem-
ory stick with headlands saved to its fields, only one farm
is available for selection.

4. Use the “Field” window to filter the data to all or se-

lected fields.
5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected head-
lands.
7. Press the “Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.
NOTE: Use the “Map Management” screen, explained
later in this chapter, to delete individual headlands.
RAIL16DSP0882BA 27

4-20
 4 - OPERATION

Obstacle
Obstacles are always recorded for a specific field. A
field can contain multiple obstacles, and all obstacles are
deleted when the field is selected, either individually or
within its farm and grower structure.

To delete a specific field's obstacles from display memory

and the memory stick:
1. Select “Obstacle” in the “Data Type” window.
2. Use the “Grower” window to filter the obstacles to all
or one grower.
3. Use the “Farm” window to filter the obstacles to all or
one farm.
RAIL16DSP0617BA 28
NOTE: Only farms that have obstacles saved to their
fields display. If only one farm is present on the memory
stick with obstacles saved to its fields, only one farm is
available for selection.

4. Use the “Field” window to filter the data to all or se-

lected fields.
5. Press the “Enter” button to confirm the selection.
6. Press the “Delete” button to delete the selected obsta-
cles.
7. Press the “Yes” or “No” button at the confirmation mes-
sage.
NOTE: Use the “Map Management” screen, explained
later in this chapter, to delete individual obstacles.
RAIL16DSP0618BA 29

4-21
 4 - OPERATION

Current layout
The display stores up to 20 unique layouts for the “Run”
screens for each vehicle type. Deleting a layout removes
the named layout from display memory and the memory
stick for the current vehicle type.
NOTE: Only the layouts for the current vehicle display
when this data type is selected.

Deleting layouts requires:

• Selection of “Current Layout” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific layouts with the “Current
Layout” window

RAIL16DSP0620BA 30

Field mark setup

Up to twenty field mark conditions can be saved on the
display or the memory stick at one time. Deleting a field
mark setup removes the named condition from display
memory and the memory stick.

Deleting field marks requires:

• Selection of “Field Mark Setup” in the “Data Type” win-
dow
• Selection of “All” or specific field mark conditions with
the “Field Mark Setup” window

RAIL16DSP0621BA 31

Implement
Since each implement has a unique ID, only delete an
implement if you are sure that you have no future use
for the implement. Re-creating the same implement at
a later time results in a new implement with a different
ID, requiring more management effort with the desktop
software.
NOTE: Sequences and work conditions can be recorded
for a specific implement. When the implement for which a
sequence or work condition has been recorded is deleted,
you will no longer be able to access that sequence or work
condition.

Deleting implements requires:

RAIL16DSP0622BA 32
• Selection of “Implement” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific implements with the “Imple-
ment” window

This data type is unique to tractors

4-22
 4 - OPERATION

Operator
Since each operator has a unique ID, only delete an op-
erator if you are sure that you have no future use for the
operator. Re-creating the same operator at a later time re-
sults in a new operator with a different ID, requiring more
management effort with the desktop software.

Deleting operators requires:

• Selection of “Operator” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific operators with the “Opera-
tor” window

RAIL16DSP0623BA 33

Tag
Since each tag has a unique ID, only delete a tag if you are
sure that you have no future use for the tag. Re-creating
the same tag at a later time results in a new tag with a
different ID, requiring more management effort with the
desktop software.
NOTE: Deleting a tag does not affect the data with which
it is associated.

Deleting tags requires:

• Selection of “Tag” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific tags with the “Tag” window

RAIL16DSP0624BA 34

Sequence
Deleting sequences requires:
• Selection of “Sequence” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or a specific implement in the “Imple-
ment” window
• Selection of “All” or specific sequences with the “Se-
quence” window

This data type is unique to tractors.

RAIL16DSP0625BA 35

4-23
 4 - OPERATION

Spray tip
Since each spray tip has a unique ID, only delete a spray
tip if you are sure that you have no future use for the spray
tip. Re-creating the same spray tip at a later time results
in a new spray tip with a different ID, requiring more man-
agement effort with the desktop software.

Deleting spray tips requires:

• Selection of “Spray Tip” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific spray tips with the “Spray
Tip window

This data type is unique to any vehicle or implement that

performs spraying, particularly towed sprayers and self-
propelled sprayers. RAIL16DSP0626BA 36

Stored name
Up to 200 stored names can be saved on the memory
stick at one time. Deleting a stored name removes the
stored name and any calibrations previously saved for that
profile.

Deleting stored names requires:

• Selection of “Stored Name” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or specific names with the “Stored
Name” window

RAIL16DSP0627BA 37

Swath
Swaths are the recorded straight or curved patterns that
are used by the autoguidance system to generate the
swath pattern for a field. Swaths are linked to the field,
and therefore to the farm, in which they are created.
Swaths can be deleted at any time without the loss of
data.

Deleting swaths requires:

• Selection of “Swath” in the “Data Type” window
• Selection of “All” or a specific farm in the “Farm” window
• Selection of “All” or a specific field in the “Field” window
• Selection of “All” or a specific swath with the “Swath”
window RAIL16DSP0628BA 38

NOTE: Individual swaths can also be deleted using the

“Map Management” screen explained later in this chapter.

4-24
 4 - OPERATION

"Map Management" screen

Map items include obstacles, boundaries, headlands, and
swaths. Map items are always saved under the field which
they are mapping.
Use the “Map Management” screen to:
• Delete a map item
• Edit a map item's name
• View detailed information about a map item
• Edit a map item’s subtype (obstacles and inner bound-
aries only)
• Set/clear impassible (inner boundaries only)
On the “Home” screen, press the “Data Management”
icon to access the “Data Management” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Map” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“Map Management” screen.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 2

4-25
 4 - OPERATION

Select a field
Press the “Field” window to access the “Field Selection”
pop-up window.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 3

Select the desired grower, farm, and field.

Press the “OK” button to return to the “Map Management”

screen.

RAIL16DSP0630BA 4

Select a map item

The “Map Item” window determines which type of map
items are visible on the screen. Only one type can be
selected at a time.

Press the “Map Item” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 5

4-26
 4 - OPERATION

Select the desired type of map item. The multipurpose

window in the lower left-hand corner of the screen updates
to reflect the selected item type.

RAIL16DSP0883BA 6

There are two ways to select a specific map item:

• Press the left or right arrow button to scroll through the

available map items.

The selected map item highlights in blue.

RAIL16DSP0632BA 7

OR
• Press the multipurpose window in the lower left-hand
corner of the screen to display the pop-up options win-
dow.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 8

4-27
 4 - OPERATION

Press “Select” in the pop-up options window.

RAIL16DSP0633BA 9

A list of map items displays.

Press the desired map item.
The selected map item highlights in blue.

RAIL16DSP0634BA 10

The selected map item highlights in blue.

RAIL16DSP0632BA 11

4-28
 4 - OPERATION

Delete a map item

To delete the selected map item, press the “Delete” but-
ton.

RAIL16DSP0632BA 12

A pop-up confirmation window displays: “Delete [the] se-

lected map item?”

Press the “Yes” button to delete the selected map item.

Press the “No” button to return to the “Map Management”

screen without deleting the map item.

RAIL16DSP0635BA 13

Rename a map item

To edit the name of the selected map item, press the
multipurpose window in the lower left-hand corner of the
screen.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 14

4-29
 4 - OPERATION

A pop-up options window displays. Press “Edit Name” to

access the alphanumeric keypad.

RAIL16DSP0633BA 15

Use the keypad to change the name of the selected map

item.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the name.

Press the “Close” button to exit the keypad without chang-

ing the name.

RAIL16DSP0636BA 16

View map item information

To view detailed information about the selected map item,
press the multipurpose window in the lower left-hand cor-
ner of the screen.

RAIL16DSP0629BA 17

4-30
 4 - OPERATION

A pop-up options window displays. Press “Info” to view

detailed information about the selected map item.
NOTE: The information displayed is determined by the
map item type and subtype.

RAIL16DSP0633BA 18

Press the “OK” button to return to the “Map Management”

screen.

RAIL16DSP0637BA 19

Edit a the subtype of a map item

NOTE: Only obstacles and inner boundaries have sub-
types.

To edit the subtype of the selected map item, press the

multipurpose window in the lower left-hand corner of the
screen.

RAIL16DSP0638BA 20

4-31
 4 - OPERATION

A pop-up options window displays. Press “Edit Subtype”

to access the list of subtypes.

RAIL16DSP0639BA 21

Press the desired subtype in the options window.

RAIL16DSP0640BA 22

Set or clear impassible

To change the impassable setting for the selected inner
boundary, press the multipurpose window in the lower left-
hand corner of the screen.

RAIL16DSP0641BA 23

4-32
 4 - OPERATION

A pop-up options window displays.

Depending on the inner boundary’s current setting, press

“Set Impassible” or “Clear Impassible.”

RAIL16DSP0642BA 24

RAIL16DSP0643BA 25

4-33
 4 - OPERATION

"Import2" screen
The AFS Pro 700 display can import field boundaries, Mul-
tiSwath+ guidance lines, and variable rate prescriptions in
the popular shapefile format. Use the “Import2” screen to
select the shapefile data that you wish to import and to
associate that shapefile data with a field on the memory
stick.
Each set of shapefile data consists of three files that
share the same prefix (base filename) but have different
extensions that indicate the kind of data that resides in
the file:
• A .shp file is the main file that contains variable-length
records for one or more shapes.
• A .shx file is an index that describes where each record
in the main file begins (i.e. the record offset).
• A .dbf file is a dBASE table of feature attributes that
correspond to the records in the main file.
RAPH16DSP0660AA 1

Copy the shapefile data into a folder called “Shapefile” on

the root of a memory stick, e.g. e:\Shapefile.
Before you can select shapefile data to import, you must
first allow the display to copy the shapefile data from the
memory stick to the internal memory of the display. This
process takes place during startup.
1. Turn the vehicle ignition switch to the OFF position.
2. Allow the display to power down completely.
3. Insert the memory stick with the shapefile data into the
display.
4. Turn the vehicle ignition switch to the ON position.

The display copies the contents of the “Shapefile” folder to

internal memory. When the process is complete, a pop-up
message displays: “Files were copied to internal storage.
Please proceed with assigning the new data in Data Man-
agement > Import2.” RAIL16DSP0661BA 2

• If you intend to use the same memory stick for your field
operation and it already has the grower, farm, and field
that you intend to use, press the “Import2” button to go
directly to the “Import2” screen.

RAIL16DSP0661BA 3

4-34
 4 - OPERATION

• If you intend to use the same memory stick for your

field operation, but it does not yet have the grower,
farm, and field that you intend to use:
1. Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the pop-up
message.
2. Create the required grower, farm, and field (Home >
Performance > Profile).
3. Navigate to the “Import2” screen (Home > Data
Management > Import2).

RAIL16DSP0661BA 4

• If you intend to use a different memory stick for your

field operation:
1. Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the pop-up
message.
2. Turn the vehicle ignition switch to the OFF position.
3. Allow the display to power down completely.
4. Insert the memory stick that you intend to use for
your field operation.
5. Turn the vehicle ignition switch to the ON position.
6. If the required grower, farm, and field do not yet
exist on the memory stick, create them (Home >
Performance > Profile).
7. Navigate to the “Import2” screen (Home > Data RAIL16DSP0661BA 5
Management > Import2).
Use the “Data Type” window to select the type of data that
you intend to import.

Press the “Data Type” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

RAIL16DSP0693BA 6

4-35
 4 - OPERATION

Press the correct data type for your shapefile data.

NOTE: The “MultiSwath+” option is available only if the
“Autoguidance” application or the “Assisted Steer” ap-
plication is installed and enabled on the “NAV Settings”
screen (Home > Toolbox > NAV-S).

RAIL16DSP0694BA 7

Field boundaries
Use the “Boundary” window to select the field boundary
that you intend to import.
NOTE: If the shapefile data contains only one entry, that
entry is selected by default in the “Boundary” window.

Press the “Boundary” window to access the pop-up op-

tions menu.

RAIL16DSP0695BA 8

Press the name of the field boundary that you intend to

import.

RAIL16DSP0696BA 9

4-36
 4 - OPERATION

Use the “Field” window to select the field with which you
intend to use the boundary.

The last active field is selected by default.

NOTE: If the field that you intend to use does not yet exist
on the display, you must create it on the “Profile Setup”
screen (Home > Performance > Profile) before you can
import the boundary.

Press the “Field” window to access the pop-up “Field Se-

lection” window.

RAIL16DSP0697BA 10

Use the “Field Selection” window to select the field with

which you intend to use the MultiSwath+.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection.

Press the “Cancel” button to close the “Field Selection”

window without changing the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0698BA 11

Press the “Import” button in the “Data Type” window to

import the field boundary for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0697BA 12

4-37
 4 - OPERATION

A confirmation message displays with the names of the

boundary, the grower, the farm, and the field.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

The boundary is now available for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0699BA 13

MultiSwath+ guidance lines

Use the “MultiSwath+” window to select the MultiSwath+
that you intend to import.
NOTE: If the shapefile data contains only one entry, that
entry is selected by default in the “MultiSwath+” window.

Press the “MultiSwath+” window to access the pop-up op-

tions menu.

RAIL16DSP0700BA 14

Press the name of the MultiSwath+ that you intend to im-

port.

RAIL16DSP0701BA 15

4-38
 4 - OPERATION

Use the “Field” window to select the field with which you
intend to use the MultiSwath+.

The last active field is selected by default.

NOTE: If the field that you intend to use does not yet exist
on the display, you must create it on the “Profile Setup”
screen (Home > Performance > Profile) before you can
import the MultiSwath+.

Press the “Field” window to access the pop-up “Field Se-

lection” window.

RAIL16DSP0702BA 16

Use the “Field Selection” window to select the field with

which you intend to use the MultiSwath+.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection.

Press the “Cancel” button to close the “Field Selection”

window without changing the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0703BA 17

Press the “Import” button in the “Data Type” window to

import the field boundary for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0704BA 18

4-39
 4 - OPERATION

A confirmation message displays with the names of the

MultiSwath+, the grower, the farm, and the field.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

The MultiSwath+ is now available for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0705BA 19

If the selected swath is too large for the display to

import—greater than one million recorded points—the
PF-114 pop-up message displays: “The selected swath
exceeds one million points. Please break swath into
multiple swaths.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

Use the desktop software to save the swath data into two
or more smaller swaths.

RAIL16DSP0706BA 20

Variable rate prescriptions

Use the “Prescription” window to select the prescription
that you intend to import.
NOTE: If the shapefile data contains only one entry, that
entry is selected by default in the “Prescription” window.

Press the “Prescription” window to access the pop-up op-

tions menu.

RAIL16DSP0707BA 21

4-40
 4 - OPERATION

Press the name of the prescription that you intend to im-

port.

RAIL16DSP0708BA 22

If the shapefile data contains prescriptions for more than

one product, the pop-up “Product Selection” window dis-
plays.

Select the desired product and press the “OK” button to

save the selection.

RAIL16DSP0709BA 23

Use the “Field” window to select the field with which you
intend to use the prescription.

The last active field is selected by default.

NOTE: If the field that you intend to use does not yet exist
on the display, you must create it on the “Profile Setup”
screen (Home > Performance > Profile) before you can
import the prescription.

Press the “Field” window to access the pop-up “Field Se-

lection” window.

RAIL16DSP0710BA 24

4-41
 4 - OPERATION

Use the “Field Selection” window to select the field with

which you intend to use the prescription.

Press the “OK” button to save the selection.

Press the “Cancel” button to close the “Field Selection”

window without changing the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0711BA 25

Use the “Product Form” window to select the form of the

product that you intend to apply with the prescription.

Press the “Product Form” window to access the pop-up

options window.

RAIL16DSP0712BA 26

Press the correct form for the product.

RAIL16DSP0713BA 27

4-42
 4 - OPERATION

Use the “Units” button in the “Default Application Rate”

window to select the correct units of measure for the ap-
plication rates in the prescription data.

Press the “Units” button to access the pop-up options win-

dow.

RAIL16DSP0714BA 28

Press the correct unit of measure.

RAIL16DSP0715BA 29

The “Default Application Rate” window (1) becomes active

with the value from the shapefile data.

If you wish to change the default application rate, press

the “Default Application Rate” to access the numeric key-
pad.

Press the “Import” button (2) in the “Data Type” window to

finish importing the prescription.

RAIL16DSP0716BA 30

4-43
 4 - OPERATION

Press the “Import” button in the “Data Type” window to

import the prescription for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0716BA 31

A confirmation message displays with the names of the

prescription, the product, the grower, the farm, and the
field.

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

The prescription is now available for the selected field.

RAIL16DSP0717BA 32

4-44
 4 - OPERATION

MEMORY STICK MANAGEMENT

Introduction
The memory stick contains:
• All of the data types discussed in this chapter for your
operation: grower, farm, field, task, crop type, tag, work
condition, operator, implement, sequence, obstacle,
boundary, layout, swath, and GPS data
• All of the vehicle-specific information: calibration and
vehicle setup
• All of the farming application-specific data: yield, cov-
erage, “as applied,” prescription, etc.

This information is organized in a folder on the mem-

ory stick with a .cn1 extension. The folder name will be RAIL12DSP1042AA 1
similar to 130831H7.cn1 where the first six numerals are
the date stamp for the folder in this format: yymmdd.
This folder name is automatically updated (date and time
stamped) each time the display is powered ON. This cre-
ates a chronological record for all recorded data and pre-
vents files from sharing the same name.
To maintain the integrity of the saved information:
• Never put two .cn1 folders on the same memory stick.
• Never change the name or extension for any folder.
• Never change the location of any folder or file.
• Never delete the index.vy1 file until the information has
been archived. This file is required to launch the archive
process using the desktop software.

Data management best practices

To avoid data loss, CASE IH recommends that you follow each of these steps:
• Allow the display to shut down completely before you turn OFF the battery isolator switch of the vehicle.
• Always use the CASE IH approved Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory stick, part number 47962967, in the display
for data storage.
• If applicable to your vehicle, upgrade the display software application to version 30 or higher; see your dealer for
assistance.
• At the end of each working day, archive the information from the USB memory stick to your desktop computer.
Normally when the operator switches the ignition switch
OFF, the display continues to store the display data over a
short period of time. If during this storage time the battery
isolator switch is also turned OFF, the current display data
will be lost.

NHIL18PLM0312AA 2

4-45
 4 - OPERATION

NOTE: When you turn off the ignition key, the green light
(2) on the monitor (1) stays on until storage of the task
data is complete.

BAIL15SBA0061AA 3

The use of a Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory stick (3)

will also help to avoid task data losses.

The permanent use of a USB memory stick in the USB

port of the monitor:
• Ensures that task data are stored on both the monitor
and the USB memory stick
• Ensures that previous task data is not lost in the event
of a premature turn OFF of the battery isolator
NOTE: In the event of a premature turn OFF of the bat-
tery isolator, only the current task data will be lost. Cur-
rent task data is the task data since the ignition key was
BAIL15SBA0062AA 4
previously switched ON.
NOTE: ONLY use the CASE IH USB memory stick
47962967 (3). DO NOT use any other type of USB
memory stick.
1. Remove the protective cover (4) from the USB port of
the monitor (1).
2. Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port (5) of
the monitor.
NOTE: Make sure that the monitor power is OFF when
you insert the USB memory stick.

BAIL15SBA0063AA 5

4-46
 4 - OPERATION

From the ‘Toolbox’ screen, on the “Disp” (display) tab:

3. Select the ‘Advanced’ option from the ‘Interface level’
option menu (6).
NOTE: This action will restart the monitor and the
monitor will automatically recognize the presence of
the USB memory stick (3).

NHIL18PLM0313AA 6

4. Turn the ignition switch OFF to shut down the monitor.

NOTE: The first time that the monitor is shut down, you
will notice that the shut down sequence takes longer
than usual. During this first shut down, there is the
transfer of all the previous task data onto the USB
memory stick.
5. Leave the USB memory stick (3) permanently in the
USB port (5) of the monitor.
NOTE: If you do need to remove the USB memory stick,
only do so after the monitor has completely shut down and
the green light on the monitor does not illuminate.

BAIL15SBA0065AA 7

4-47
 4 - OPERATION

Multiple vehicle practices

If you have more than one vehicle of the same type (trac-
tor, combine, etc.) with an AFS pro 700 display, label each
memory stick with the Product Identification Number (PIN)
or serial number of the vehicle. Always match the mem-
ory stick to the vehicle when it is used.

1. Use a single vehicle or the desktop software to create

any of these data types:
• grower
• farm
• field
• tags
• operator
• product
• field mark
• boundary
• obstacle
RCIL11DSP171BBG 1
• swath

If required, transfer the memory stick from the desktop

computer to a vehicle.

2. Create any “Run” screen layouts with a single vehicle.

On tractors, create implements and sequences. On
combines, perform crop setup.
3. Once setup is complete on the memory stick, power
OFF the display and remove the device from the vehi-
cle.
4. Install the memory stick from the first vehicle in the
next vehicle.
5. Power ON the display to automatically share the
grower/farm/field, etc. from the device with the dis-
play.
6. Use the “Import” screen (Home > Data Management >
Import) to add the other data types: crop setup, “Run”
screen layouts, implements, work conditions, etc.
NOTE: When a field is created, a new task is automatically
created. Delete these tasks from the memory stick for the
first vehicle before sharing the grower/farm/field informa-
tion with other vehicles. These tasks cannot be used by
the second vehicle. They appear in italics on option lists
and cannot be selected.
7. Repeat steps 3-6 for each additional vehicle.
8. After sharing the memory stick with each vehicle,
power ON the display with the device that is matched
to that vehicle (not the first vehicle). Verify that all of
the information has successfully transferred.
9. At the end of the day, archive the information from the
memory stick for each vehicle to your desktop com-
puter.

4-48
 4 - OPERATION

Rotating memory stick practices

In some operations, growers prefer to rotate two or more
memory sticks between the vehicle and the desktop com-
puter. In this situation, the memory stick should be erased
after its information has been archived and then returned
to the vehicle without a .cn1 folder.

This causes the display to create a new .cn1 folder from

display memory, guaranteeing that the most recent farm-
ing data—planting, spraying, harvesting—is used.

Always start a new task when you swap memory sticks in

this manner. GPS data is only written to the memory stick.
Rotating memory sticks retains the summary records be-
tween memory sticks, but not the GPS data. Start a new RAIL12DSP1042AA 1

task to prevent GPS data from overlapping for the same

task between two memory sticks.

4-49
 4 - OPERATION

Seasonal data management

Perform the procedures below at the beginning of each season.
1. Save the contents of the USB memory device you use in your display to a known folder on a computer.
2. Format the previously-used USB memory device. See “Formatting the memory device” ( Formatting the memory
device).
3. Use your Farm Management Information System (FMIS) to manage data needed for the new season. This
data includes but is not limited to:
○ Grower-Farm-Field locations
○ Field boundaries
○ Guidance lines
○ Prescriptions
○ Products

4. Export the data from the FMIS to the formatted USB memory device using the procedure provided for the FMIS.
NOTE: The display saves all of its data to the USB memory device when you turn the vehicle key to the ON
position. Any unnecessary or duplicate data in the display will be saved to the USB memory device.
5. See “Delete screen” (4-8). Remove any unnecessary or duplicate data from the display before you insert the
formatted USB memory device into the display.
6. With the vehicle key in the OFF position, insert the formatted USB memory device into the display.
7. Turn the vehicle key to the ON position. The display saves its data to the USB memory device.
8. Verify all of your data is present in the display.

4-50
 4 - OPERATION

Formatting the memory device - Format the memory device

1. Insert the memory device into a computer.
2. Open “Windows Explorer” or “File Explorer.”
3. Copy the contents of the memory device into a conve-
nient location on the computer.

RAIL18PLM0213AA 1

4. Right-click the drive letter of the memory device. Select

“Format.” The “Format USB DISK” window appears.
5. In the “File system” drop-down, select “FAT32” or
“FAT32 (Default) (1).”
6. Configure the “Allocation unit size” setting to “32 kilo-
bytes.”
NOTE: 32 kilobytes is the default value.
7. Uncheck the “Quick Format” check box (3).
NOTE: Formatting the memory device will remove all con-
tent from the memory device. You will not be able to re-
cover the content from the memory device. Be sure any
needed content on the memory device is backed up before
clicking the “Start” button in the next step.
8. Click the “Start” button (4).
9. Follow any onscreen prompts until formatting com-
pletes.
10. If needed, copy the saved information in Step 3 above
to the memory device.
NOTE: You can also export your farming information from
the desktop software to the memory device.

RAIL18PLM1302BA 2

4-51
4 - OPERATION

4-52
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Introduction
The AFS AccuSync™ feature allows multiple vehicles that are working in the same field to share information. The
AFS AccuSync™ feature introduces the concept of a “job”, which contains information about what work is going to
be done, and where the work should be done.

All vehicles that join the same job can share information with each other. Shared information can include:
• Grower, farm, and field data
• Straight (A-B) and heading swaths
NOTE: Each job supports a maximum of 2000 swaths.
• Inner and outer boundaries
NOTE: A job cannot have duplicate boundaries. If you attempt to import a boundary with the same name, you can
replace your locally-stored boundary with the boundary that was shared with the current job.
• Real-time coverage maps that represent as-applied or harvested areas of the field

As work is performed in the field, each vehicle uses its own coverage map as well as the coverage map generated
by other vehicles in the job to control overlap at previously applied areas, or already harvested areas when operating
with the auto cut width function on combines.

The AFS AccuSync™ feature uses the cellular connection of the on-board modem to transfer data to the AFS Con-
nect™ portal and the AFS AccuSync™ cloud for the active job.

Requirements
At the time of publish, using the AFS AccuSync™ feature requires that:
• The vehicle is equipped with the AFS® Pro 700 display
• The vehicle supports the AFS Connect™ Advanced telematics subscription.
• The vehicle is using the AFS AccuSync™ autoguidance system.

CASE IH supported vehicles

Vehicle Supported Models
Combine Axial-Flow® x120, x230, x240, and x250 series
Windrower WD4 series
Magnum™ and Steiger® series equipped with the AFS® Pro 700 display (excluding
Large Tractor
AFS Connect™ series tractors)
Medium Tractor Puma® and Optum® series
Sprayer Patriot® 22xx, 32xx, 33xx, and 44xx series (Model Year 2016 and newer)
Combination
Trident™ 55xx series
Applicator

CASE IH supported implements

Implement Supported Models
Planter Early Riser® 2100 and 1250 series
Precision Disk™ Air Drill
Seeders
5 series Precision Air™ Air Cart (ISOBUS communication only)
Tillage AFS Soil Command™ implements

NOTE: Any other implement not listed above that utilizes ISOBUS communication may still function with the AFS
AccuSync™ , although it may not be officially supported by CASE IH.
NOTE: Implements that use the AFS AccuControl generic rate control system are not supported and cannot use the
AFS AccuSync™ feature.

Vehicles that use the AFS AccuSync™ feature require:

5-1
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

• An AFS® Pro 700 display with the full software suite associated with software version 31.36 or above
○ The display must have the AFS AccuSync™ feature activation
NOTE: The AFS AccuSync™ feature activation is non-transferrable.
• A Processing and Connectivity Module (PCM) as the AFS Connect™ telematics modem, for cellular connectivity
and communication – Software version 31.36 or above
○ The PCM must have the AFS Connect™ Advanced telematics subscription and the AFS AccuSync™ cloud
subscription
NOTE: Up to three power cycles may be required to activate the subscription in the PCM after it is sent over-the-
air.
• Customer account setup with MyCaseIH with all vehicles that will be participating in the jobs.

5-2
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Setup

Feature activation
You must activate the AFS AccuSync™ feature in your display before you can use the features of this application.
Contact your CASE IH dealer to purchase the AFS AccuSync™ activation for your display.
From the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to ac-
cess the “Toolbox” screens.

Press the “Activate” icon on the navigation bar to access

the “Feature Activation” screen.

Use the “Feature Activation” screen:

• to import an activation code from a text file provided by
your CASE IH dealer
• to manually input an activation code provided by your
CASE IH dealer
NOTE: The AFS AccuSync™ feature activation is non-
transferrable.

The serial number of the display (1) and a sequence num-

ber (2) automatically populate the “Display Serial Number”
window. Provide this information to your dealer when ac-
quiring the AFS AccuSync activation code.

After you enter the activation code to activate the feature,

the display will automatically reboot to complete the acti- RAIL16DSP0718BA 1
vation.

See “’Feature Activation’ screen” 2-64 for more informa-

tion on feature activations.

5-3
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

"AFS AccuSync Setup" screen

From the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to ac-
cess the “Toolbox” screens.

Press the ”ASync” icon on the navigation bar to display

the “AFS AccuSync Setup” screen.

“AFS AccuSync Setup” screen

Use the “AFS AccuSync Setup” window to enable the AFS
AccuSync™ feature. The setup options are hidden when
the feature is disabled.

Press the ”AFS AccuSync” window (1) to access the

pop-up options window. Press the “ON” option to enable
the feature.

NHIL20PLM0901AA 1

If the AFS AccuSync™ feature is not activated on your

display, a pop-up message displays when you attempt to
enable the feature: “The required activation code to un-
lock this feature has not been detected. Please enter the
proper code in the activate window and try again.”

Press the “OK” button to acknowledge the message.

• If you have an activation code for the AFS AccuSync™
feature, use the “Feature Activation” screen (Home >
Toolbox > Activate) to import the activation code or input
the activation code manually.
• If you do not have an activation code for the AFS Ac-
cuSync™ feature, contact your CASE IH dealer.

NHIL20PLM0903AA 2

5-4
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

AFS AccuSync™ Help

Press the “Help” button (1) on the “AFS AccuSync Setup”
screen to access help documentation on various AFS Ac-
cuSync™ topics.

NHIL20PLM0905AA 3

Select a topic from the list within the pop-up window to

access more information.

NHIL20PLM0257AA 4

Change swath and boundary export setup

Use the “Swath Creation” option (1) or “Boundary
Creation” option (2) to enable sharing of boundaries
and swaths once a boundary or swath is created while
participating in the job.
If the options are set to ON, then a notification will be
given to allow the operator to add the newly created
boundary or swath to the job once the boundary or
swath is created.
If the options are set to OFF, then no notification will be
given and the only way to add boundaries or swaths is
to use the “Jobs” screen.

It is still possible to share swaths and boundaries manu-

NHIL20PLM0905AA 5
ally from the “Job List” screen. If these options are set to
OFF, the display will not notify the operator when a new
swath or boundary is created.

5-5
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Change the CAN node

Use the “ASync CAN Node” option (1) to set the CAN
channel that is used when operating with the AFS Ac-
cuSync™ feature.
NOTE: The CAN node should default to the correct setting
for your vehicle, however, a change may be required if you
are operating with a generic vehicle that communicates on
a different CAN bus.

The following table outlines the default CAN node setting

based on vehicle type.

Vehicle application CAN node

Tractor CAN A
Sprayer CAN B NHIL20PLM0908AA 6

Combine CAN A
Windrower CAN A
Upon changing the selection for the “ASync CAN Node”
option, a confirmation pop-up window appears. Press the
“Yes” button to reboot the display in order to change the
setting, or press the “No” button to return to the “AFS Ac-
cuSync Setup” screen.

NHIL20PLM0899AA 7

Boundary import setup

The “Job Boundary Import” option (1) allows you to
import boundaries from the job that you join.
If the option is set to “Disabled”, you will not download
any boundaries from any joined jobs.
If the option is set to “Enabled”, the system will
download the boundaries from your job based on the
following conditions:
1. If the display has no boundaries, the boundaries
from the job will be automatically downloaded.
2. If the display has existing boundaries, a pop-up win-
dow appears to allow you to select whether you want
to merge or replace the existing boundaries on the
NHIL20PLM0907AA 8
display, or not download the boundaries for the cur-
rent job.

5-6
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

User-Defined Windows (UDW)

The AFS AccuSync™ window is available to control AFS AccuSync™ functions from your desired run screen layout.
NOTE: The AFS AccuSync™ window can also be added to the Left-Hand Area (LHA) on vehicles that allow you to
customize the LHA.
To add the AFS AccuSync™ window:
1. Navigate to the “Run Layout” screen (Home > Toolbox
> Layout).
2. Select the desired run screen or Left-Hand Area (LHA)
(1).
3. Press the desired selection box (2).
4. Select the ”AFS AccuSync” option from the list of avail-
able windows.

NHIL20PLM0923AA 1

When you are not in a current job:

• Press the “New” button (1) to create a new job for your
selected grower, farm, field, and operation.
• Press the “Jobs” button (2) to select an existing job from
the “Job List” screen.
NOTE: The “Leave” button (3) is inactive, as you are not
currently participating in a job.

NHIL20PLM0735AA 2

When you are participating in a current job, the job name

is shown.
• Press the “Jobs” button (2) to select an existing job from
the “Job List” screen.
• Press the “Leave” button (3) to leave the current job.
NOTE: The “New” button (1) is inactive, as you cannot
create a new job while currently participating in an existing
job.

NHIL20PLM0237AA 3

5-7
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Operation

Status icons
When the AFS AccuSync™ feature is enabled, one of the following icons displays in the status and warning icon
area to indicate the current status of the feature.

Status icon Description

Valid subscription not found. You must have the AFS Connect™ Advanced
telematics subscription and the AFS AccuSync™ subscription to operate with the
AFS AccuSync™ feature.

The AFS AccuSync™ CAN node is not detected, or the CAN node is offline.

The AFS AccuSync™ feature is enabled, but not yet connected to the AFS
AccuSync™ cloud.

You are connected to the AFS AccuSync™ cloud, but not currently participating
in a job.

You are currently participating in a job with AFS AccuSync™.

Your vehicle is currently in work, but no job has been selected. Data is not being
shared with the job.

The display is in the process of creating a job, and is uploading data to the job.

You are currently joining a job. Please wait for all job data to be downloaded before
proceeding.

New swaths have been added to your job. Press the icon to accept the swaths.

5-8
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Create a new job

NOTE: A maximum of six vehicles can participate in the job at any given time.

Before you create a job, you must have a fixed GPS position for the vehicle. If during harvest you must travel from
field-to-field with the grain tank closed, create the job while the GPS position is fixed and before you close the grain
tank.

Create a job through one of the following methods:

• From the ”AFS AccuSync” window
• From the “Toolbox” screen
• From your grower, farm and field selections
From the ”AFS AccuSync” window
Add the “AFS AccuSync” window to one of your run
screens.

Press the “New” button (1) to open the “New Job” screen.

NHIL20PLM0735AA 1

From the “Toolbox” screen

Alternatively, manually navigate to the “New Job” screen
(1) (Home > Toolbox > ASync).

Select your desired grower, farm, field, and operation (2).

NOTE: When creating a new job, the list of growers,
farms, fields, and operations are retrieved from those
available in your display.

Press “Select” (3) to add boundaries and swaths to your

new job. The boundaries and swaths will be shared with
the other vehicles participating in the job.

Press the “Job Name” window (4) to customize the default

job name. To assist other operators in joining the correct NHIL20PLM0298AA 2
job, change the default job name to the field name, oper-
ation name, or other unique identifier.

When the job name is created, the “Create” button acti-

vates. Press the “Create” button (5) to create the new
job.

The status icon is shown in the Left-Hand

Area (LHA) when the job is created while
data is uploaded to the cloud.

5-9
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

The job location will be used to filter the job by proximity

when selecting a job to join.

The system automatically uses the following criteria to

determine the job location:
• If the field has an outer boundary, then the job location
is the first point of the first-detected outer boundary.
• If the field only has an inner boundary, then the job loca-
tion is the first point of the first-detected inner boundary.
• If no boundaries exist and the field has a selected pre-
scription, then the job location will be based on the pre-
scription.
• If the field has no boundaries or prescriptions, the job
location will be the first point of the most recent swath.
• If the field has no boundaries, prescriptions, or swaths,
but the vehicle is reporting a current GPS location, then
the display prompts you to use the vehicle GPS location
as the job location.
If none of the job location criteria is available, then the
pop-up window appears upon creation of the job.

Press the “YES” button (1) to use the current vehicle lo-
cation as the job location.

Press the “NO” button (2) to continue without setting job

location. The job location is then determined at the first
point of coverage when the vehicle goes into work.
NOTE: The system will not update the job location after it
is set.

NHIL20PLM0862AA 3

After the job location is determined, the “Join the new Job”
pop-up window appears.

The job may take up to two minutes to reach other fleet

vehicles, provided that a good cellular network connection
exists.

Press the “Yes” button (1) to join the new job.

Press the “No” button (2) to return to the “New Job” screen
without joining the new job.

NHIL20PLM0863AA 4

5-10
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

From your grower, farm and field selections

Upon creating a new grower, farm, and field, the pop-up
window appears.

“You are trying to start a new task by selecting Grower/

Farm/Field while AFS AccuSync is ON. How would you
like to continue?”

Press the “New” button (1) to open the “New Job” screen.

Press the “No Job” button (2) to continue with your task
selection without creating a new job.

NHIL20PLM0297AA 5

5-11
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

View job list

NOTE: A maximum of six vehicles can participate in the job at any given time.
Add the ”AFS AccuSync” window to one of your run
screens.

Press the “Jobs” button (1) to view existing jobs.

Alternatively, manually navigate to the “Job List” screen

(Home > Toolbox > ASync).

NHIL20PLM0735AA 1

Filter the job list

The filters are shown on the left-hand side of the “Job List”
screen for all growers (1), farms (2), fields (3), and op-
erations with associated jobs that exist in the AFS Ac-
cuSync™ cloud.

Change the “Grower” selection from “All” to one of your

listed growers to activate the “Farm” filter for all of the
farms within your selected grower.

Change the “Farm” selection from “All” to one of your listed

farms to activate the “Field” filter for all of the fields within
your selected farm.

Select your operation, if desired.

NHIL20PLM0864AA 2
NOTE: Do not change the name of the grower, farm, or
field after joining the job.

Once you have your filters selected, press the “Jobs” win-
dow (5) to view the list of filtered jobs.

The information for the selected job is shown.

Sort the job list

Press the job window (1) to view your job list based on the
selected filter.

Press the button (1) to change the job list filter.

NOTE: The filter button is inactive when you are partici-
pating in a job.

NHIL20PLM0864AA 3

5-12
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Select the desired job list filter.

The job list can be sorted by:

• Date – The job list will be sorted with the most recently
created job at the top of the list.
• Job name – The job list will be sorted alphabetically (A
to Z) based on the job name.
• Proximity – The job list will be sorted based on the dis-
tance from the field, with the closest field at the top of
the list. The system uses the GPS location of the field
and the vehicle to determine proximity.

NHIL20PLM0866AA 4

Join a job from the “Jobs List” screen

With the desired job selected in the “Jobs” window (1),
press the “Join” button (2).

NHIL20PLM0864AA 5

The pop-up window appears.

Please wait for all Job data to be downloaded before pro-

ceeding. Once all of the Job data is downloaded, this
screen will disappear automatically.

The status icon is shown in the Left-Hand

Area (LHA) as you are downloading job
data.

The status icon changes when you are

actively participating in the job.

NHIL20PLM0865AA 6

5-13
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

If you powered off the display while participating in an ac-

tive job, the pop-up window appears when you power on
the display.

If desired, press the “Yes” button (1) to rejoin the job.

NHIL20PLM0256AA 7

Join a job by creating a new task

Upon creating a new grower, farm, and field, the pop-up
window appears.

“You are trying to start a new task by selecting Grower/

Farm/Field while AFS AccuSync is ON. How would you
like to continue?”

Press the “Join” button (1) to open the “Join Job” screen.

NHIL20PLM0297AA 8

Add boundaries and swaths to an existing

job
Press the “Add” button (1) next to “Boundaries” or
“Swaths” to add a boundary or swath to the job. The
boundary or swath will be shared with all of the other
vehicles that are participating in the job.
NOTE: The “Add” buttons are only active when you are
participating in a job.

For more information, see “Share swaths and boundaries

with the current job” ( Share swaths and boundaries
with the current job).

NHIL20PLM0872AA 9

5-14
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Leave a job
Press the “Leave” button (1) to leave your current job.

NHIL20PLM0872AA 10

5-15
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Share swaths and boundaries with the current job

It may be necessary to share swaths and boundaries that already exist on your display with other participants in the
job.

Straight swaths (A-B lines and headings) and boundaries can be shared with the current job:
• When the job is created.
• From the “Job List” screen (Home > Toolbox > ASync).
• Upon new swath/boundary creation.
• For swaths only, using the “Swath Select” window.
To select a swath to share with the current job, navigate to
the run screen that contains the “Swath Select” window.

Press the “Swath Select” window.

NOTE: If there is only one swath in your current field, then
the swath is automatically selected in the “Swath Select”
window.

RCIL10DSP682BAG 1

Press “Add Swath to Active Job” (2) to add the current

selected swath to the job.

NHIL20PLM0250AA 2

5-16
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Alternatively, press the “Add” button (1) on the “Job List”

screen to add a current boundary or swath to the job.

NHIL20PLM0872AA 3

5-17
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

The “Swath” window (1A) or “Boundary” window (1B) Swath sharing with job
shows the currently-selected swath or boundary.
• Use the arrows (3) to individually cycle through the list
of available swaths or boundaries.
• Use the buttons (2) to select or de-select all of the avail-
able swaths.
NOTE: Do not edit the swath name after sharing the swath
with the job, as the swath name will not be updated across
all of the vehicles participating in the job. CASE IH recom-
mends giving every swath a unique name before adding
it to the job.

When you select a swath or boundary that isn’t already

shared with the job, the “Add” button replaces the “Re-
move” button (4).

NHIL20PLM0869AA 4

Boundary sharing with job

NHIL20PLM0253AA 5

5-18
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

When you have your swath or boundary selected, press

the “Add” button (1).

Press the “Done” button (2).

NHIL20PLM0868AA 6

Upon pressing the “Done” button, the pop-up window ap-

pears.

“Once boundaries/swaths have been added to a job, they

cannot be deleted. Would you like to proceed?”

Press the “Yes” button (1) to continue adding the swath

or the boundary to the job. Press the “No” button (2) to
return to the “Job List” screen without adding the swath or
the boundary to the job.
NOTE: The swath is not added to a new job until you
create the new job.

NHIL20PLM0252AA 7

Accepting a shared swath

The status icon with a flashing yellow
background is shown in the left-hand
status area on all other vehicles
participating in the job when the swath is
added to the job. Press the status icon in
the left-hand status area.

The pop-up window appears. Press the “Select” button

(1) to make the shared swath the active swath, or press
the “Ok” button (2) to close the pop-up window.

NHIL20PLM0871AA 8

5-19
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

If you did not select the new swath as your active swath,
then you can make the active swath selection from the
“Swath Select” screen.

The new swaths (1) that were shared with the current job
are available for selection. The shared swaths appear
italicized and cannot be deleted from the job.

NHIL20PLM0255AA 9

Accepting a shared boundary

The pop-up window appears. Press the “Yes” button (1)
to import the new boundaries that were shared with the
current job participants.

NHIL20PLM0308AA 10

5-20
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

If you already worked in the current field, it is likely

that you already have a locally-stored boundary for the
current field. In this case, the pop-up window appears.
Press the “Keep All” button (1) to retain the current lo-
cally-stored boundary(s) for the current field and import
the new shared boundary.
Press the “Replace” button (2) to remove the current lo-
cally-stored boundary(s) for the current field and import
the new shared boundary.
Press the “Decline” button (3) to cancel the boundary
import.

NHIL20PLM0309AA 11

If you choose to replace your current locally-stored bound-

ary(s) with the new shared boundary from the current job,
your locally-stored boundary(s) will be deleted.

Press the “Yes” button (1) to delete your locally-stored

boundary(s), or press the “No” button (2) to cancel the
boundary import.

NHIL20PLM0310AA 12

5-21
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

View shared coverage map

When you are participating in a job with other vehicles,
the coverage map displays all applied area (or harvested
area for combines) in the field.
The coverage map of your vehicle (1) is displayed in
green.
The coverage map of other vehicles (2) participating in
the current job is displayed in an alternate color.
NOTE: Coverage that was created outside of the job can-
not be added to the job once the job is created.
NOTE: Coverage maps generated by each vehicle are
from the primary implement controller only. For example,
the displayed coverage area for multiple planters operat-
ing in the current job are generated based on the coverage
for the seed controller.

The combined coverage map is saved to the specific oper-

ation/operation instance. Once you join the job, you can-
not transfer the coverage map to a different operation/op- NHIL20PLM0311AA 1
eration instance.

The combined coverage map is used to determine as-ap-

plied areas when operating with overlap control on trac-
tors, as well as already harvested areas when operating
with auto cut width on combines.
When operating with section control, the “Select Section
Control Layer” window (1) on the “Overlap Setup” screen
(Home > Toolbox > Overlap) must be set to “Coverage” for
overlap detection to work with the coverage areas gener-
ated by other vehicles in the job.

NHIL19PLM0635AA 2

5-22
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

If you attempt to change the section control layer when the

AFS AccuSync™ is ON, the pop-up window appears.

“Please note that “Select Section Control Layer” setting

is not set to coverage. This must be set to coverage for
overlap detection to work for other vehicles in the job.”

Press the “Ok” button (1) to accept the pop-up window. If

you desire to use overlap control based on the coverage
generated by other vehicles in the job, you must change
the section control layer back to “Coverage.”

NHIL20PLM0943AA 3

5-23
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Troubleshooting

View job and cloud connection status

From the “Home” screen, press the “Diagnostics” icon to
access the “Diagnostics” screens.

Press the “AFS AccuSync Diagnostics” screen.

The “AFS AccuSync Diagnostics” screen displays:

• The AFS AccuSync™ subscription expiration date
• The AFS Connect™ Advanced telematics subscription
status
• The AFS AccuSync™ server status
• Telematics Dealer Activation Code (TDAC) number of
your Processing and Connectivity Module (PCM)
• AFS AccuSync™ cloud synchronization status
“Enabled” – The vehicle is connected and exchang-
ing data with the AFS AccuSync™ cloud.
“Disabled” – The vehicle is connected with the AFS
AccuSync™ cloud, but not exchanging data.
“ - -” (dashes) – There is no communication between
the display and the Processing and Connectivity
Module (PCM), or the AFS AccuSync™ subscrip-
tion is not active.
NHIL20PLM0720AA 1

• Current job details, including the job status, job identi-

fier, number of participating vehicles (including your ve-
hicle, if you are participating in the job), and instances
of data exchange

The loading bar (1) displays the status of the coverage

data downloaded from the AFS AccuSync™ cloud upon
joining a job.

5-24
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

View Controller Area Network (CAN) status

Press the “CAN” icon in the navigation bar to display the
“CAN Status” screen.

Locate the ”AFS AccuSync” controller (1). The node sta-

tus, source address, and software versions are shown.

NHIL20PLM0313AA 1

5-25
 5 - AFS ACCUSYNC: IN-FIELD DATA SHARING

Fault code index

Code Title Description Action
There may be a problem with
AFS AccuSync Node not detected. the CAN connection. Check the
AFS AccuSync Node Not
FS-100 See Operator’s Manual if problem connections between the display
Detected
persists. and the Processing and Connectivity
Module (PCM).
There may be a problem with
AFS AccuSync Node communication the CAN connection. Check the
AFS AccuSync Node
FS-101 lost. See Operator’s Manual if connections between the display
Communication Lost
problem persists. and the Processing and Connectivity
Module (PCM).
There may be a problem with the
cellular network. Ensure that there
AFS AccuSync Cloud communication
AFS AccuSync Cloud is adequate cellular coverage in
FS-102 lost. See Operator’s Manual if
Communication Lost your area. Check the connections
problem persists.
between the display, PCM, and
cellular antenna.
The software version between
the Display and the PCM are not You must update software to use AFS
FS-103 Software Incompatible compatible. Sync operations cannot AccuSync™. See your dealer for
proceed. Please see Dealer to update assistance.
software.
Leave and re-join the job. If this does
Please leave job and rejoin job. If
not solve the issue, cycle power to the
FS-104 Unable to Start Joined Job problem persists, please contact your
vehicle. If the problem persists, see
dealer.
your dealer for assistance.
The AFS AccuSync™ cloud
sent a “sync” state that does not
Please try disabling and re-enabling match the local “sync” state for
AFS AccuSync
FS-105 AFS AccuSync. If problem persists, communications. Disable and
Communications Error
please contact your dealer. re-enable AFS AccuSync™. If the
problem persists, see your dealer for
assistance.
You have attempted to leave a job
but you did not receive a positive
acknowledgement from the AFS
AccuSync™ cloud. This may
Please try disabling and re-enabling
AFS AccuSync be a temporary communication
FS-106 AFS AccuSync. If problem persists,
Communications Error issue. Disable and re-enable AFS
please contact your dealer.
AccuSync™. If this does not resolve
the issue, cycle power to the vehicle.
If the problem persists, see your
dealer for assistance.
the software has detected a possible
data failure. Disable and re-enable
Please try disabling and re-enabling
AFS AccuSync™. If this does not
FS-107 AFS AccuSync data Error AFS AccuSync. If problem persists,
resolve the issue, cycle power to the
please contact your dealer.
vehicle. If the problem persists, see
your dealer for assistance.

5-26
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION
Introduction
Although distributed largely with software for combines, the “Printer” application is available for any farming operation
where capturing the content of the reporting windows on a screen is beneficial to an operator. The software is primarily
intended to capture the content of “Toolbox,” “Performance,” and “Diagnostics” screens.
The content of the windows is sent to a connected printer
or to a file on the memory stick. In both cases, the to-
tal screen is not printed. A simple text-only page or file
records the text content of the printable windows on the
selected screen.

The file output for the “Operator Setup” screen is shown

as an example. The screen name (1) is the first item on
the page. The windows with printable content are then
shown, separated by double line spaces. In each win-
dow group, the window name is the first line (2), and the
window setting or value (3) is the second line. The ap-
propriate unit of measurement, where applicable, is also
shown.

Printing – whether to a page or a file – is performed on

RCPH11DSP023BBG 1
a screen by screen basis. Some screens and windows
cannot be printed. Messages guide the operator:
• If a screen contains printable content, a confirming
message displays.
• If a screen contains no printable content, a different in-
formational message displays.
NOTE: The left-hand area is never printable.

6-1
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

"Printer Settings" screen

The “Printer Settings” screen determines where the con-
tent is delivered.

On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access

the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Print” icon in the navigation bar to access the

“Printer Settings” screen.

RCIL11DSP453BBG 2

Use the “Printing Mode” window on this screen:

• To disable all printing by selecting “No printer” in the
pop-up options window
• To direct the content to a physical printer connected to
the display by selecting “Printer” in the window
• To direct the content to a text file by selecting “File” in
the window

Press the “Printing Mode” window to access the pop-up

options window.

Press the desired setting in the window.

RCIL11DSP454BBG 3

6-2
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

If “File” is selected, all printed files are stored on the mem-

ory stick at the level of the “cn1” folder (the highest direc-
tory level). The files are named with a date and time stamp
in this manner: Screen Name yyyymmdd-hhmmss.txt.

Use your desktop or laptop computer with any text editor

to read these files. Double-click the .txt file to open it in
the default text editing software. These .txt files cannot
be read by the display software nor the desktop software.

RCPH11DSP005ABG 4

6-3
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

Print to a file
To print a screen when “File” is selected in the “Printing
Mode” window:
1. Navigate to the desired screen.
2. Press and hold the screen’s icon in the navigation bar
for approximately 2 s.

RCIL11DSP525BBG 1

3. If the windows on the screen have printable content,

a confirming message displays: “Printing requested.
Are you sure?”

Press the “Yes” button to proceed with printing and clear

the message.
Press the “No” button to cancel the request and clear
the message.
In this example, a file named “Operator Setup” followed
by the date and time stamp is saved to the memory
stick.

RCIL11DSP455BBG 2

If the screen contains no printable content, a different

message displays: “No printable data in the current
screen.”
Press the “OK” button to clear the message.
No file is saved to the memory stick. The screen con-
tents may be recorded manually.

RCIL11DSP456BBG 3

6-4
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

Connect to a printer
The display is capable of printing screen contents to a
portable, thermal dot matrix printer that uses paper rolls.
Printers that are designed to be powered by the vehicle
battery or by a portable battery pack simplify installation
and are ideal.
NOTE: The A630, A631, and A632 series printers from
Axiohm are shown in these examples. Visit www.ax-
iohm.com for more information.

RCPH11DSP024BBG 1

Large combines use a unique implementation for sup-

porting a printer. The Axiohm A630 printer is powered
and connected to the RS-232 port via the diagnostic con-
nector on the right hand control module (1). Kit 84095875
includes the printer (2), printer cable (3), and mount-
ing hardware (4) for this implementation. This kit, with
supporting software, allows the display to communicate
directly with the printer via the Controller Area Network
(CAN).

RCPH11DSP025BBG 2

Other vehicles require a different implementation. An

adapter harness is required to connect the serial (
RS-232) port on the AFS Pro 700 display to the printer.
The adapter harness separates ports A and B on the main
connection to the display. For display-ready vehicles (an
existing display harness connector is in the cab), use
adapter harness 87732647. For all other vehicles, use
adapter harness 87735690.

With this harness installed, Com-A (communication port

A) is the RS-232 port that is integrated into the main con-
nector harness on the back of the display—the 26-pin con-
nector.

RCIL11DSP526BBG 3

6-5
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

The types of ports that are available – parallel, RS-232,

USB – and cables that are available for connecting a
printer to the display will vary with the printer.

A 9-pin (DB9) RS-232 female connector is required to

connect the printer to the display at the display port. The
standard or optional cables for the printer may or may not
support this connector. Acquire any adapters needed –
a 25-pin to 9-pin RS-232, a USB to 9-pin RS-232, etc. –
from a local electronics supplier.

RCPH11DSP027BBG 4

6-6
 6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

Print to a printer
To print any screen when “Printer” is selected in the
“Printing Mode” window,
1. Navigate to the desired screen.
2. Press and hold the screen’s icon in the navigation bar
for approximately 2 s.

If the windows on the screen have printable contents, a

confirming message displays: “Printing requested. Are
you sure?”

3. Press the “Yes” button to proceed with printing and

clear the message.

Press the “No” button to cancel the request and clear

the message.
RCIL11DSP525BBG 1
A text page is created by the printer.
If the screen contains no printable content, a different
message displays: “No printable data in the current
screen.”
Press the “OK” button to clear the message.

6-7
6 - "PRINTER" APPLICATION

6-8
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL

(UT)
Introduction
The “Virtual Terminal” application serves as a Universal Terminal (UT) for ISO 11783 (ISOBUS) implements or working
tools.
NOTE: See http://www.aef-online.org/ for more information about the ISO 11783 standard.

The “Virtual Terminal” application runs in the AFS Pro 700 display along with any other installed applications – e.g.,
the vehicle software, “Precision Farming,” “Autoguidance,” “Task Controller,” etc. This means that an operator only
requires a single display for vehicle reporting, vehicle control, guidance, and UT functionalities.
NOTE: This manual uses the term “Virtual Terminal” or “VT” for direct references to the software application that runs
on the AFS Pro 700 display and uses the term “Universal Terminal” or “UT” for general references to the functionality
described in the ISO 11783 standard.

This chapter explains:

• how to perform basic setup operations for the “Virtual Terminal” application with the “Toolbox” screens
• how the software for an implement or working tool may operate within the display
• the “Run” screen windows that the “Virtual Terminal” application provides
• the purpose of the “Object Browser,” “NVM Browser,” “CAN Counters,” and “About VT” screens
When you use the “Virtual Terminal”
application as the UT for an ISOBUS
implement or tool, the AFS Pro 700 display
receives its control and reporting functions
from the implement or tool.

The implement or tool uploads its objects, windows, and

screens to the display.

Setup requirements for the “Virtual Terminal” application

are minimal in most cases:
• You must enable the “Virtual Terminal” application and
provide basic information about your configuration on
the “VT Setups” screen.
• You must set units of measurement for the ISOBUS RAIL14DSP1359BA 1
software on the “VT Preferences” screen.
• Some software applications that use the vehicle’s con-
trols – cab switches, levers, etc. – require you to map
the functions of the implement or working tool to these
cab controls on the “Auxiliary Controls” screen.

7-1
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Setup the "Virtual Terminal" application

From the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to ac-
cess the “Toolbox” screens.

Press the “VT” icon in the navigation bar to access the “VT
Setups” screen.

Enable the “Virtual Terminal” application

The “VT Enabled” window must be set to “Yes” before you
can configure the “Virtual Terminal” application.

Press the “VT Enabled” window to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

Select the “Yes” option to enable the VT.

NHIL18PLM0315AA 1

Allow the display to reboot, and then return to the “VT

Setups” screen. The selectable options populate the “VT
Setups” screen.

NHIL19PLM0824AA 2

7-2
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Configure the “Virtual Terminal” application

The following options are available to configure from the “VT Setups” screen:
• “VT Compatibility”
• “VT Number”
• “Send ISO Speed?”
• “Soft Keys”
VT Compatibility
Use the “VT Compatibility” window to establish the version
of the ISOBUS standard that your ISOBUS input device
and implement use.
NOTE: Refer to implement manufacturer's documentation
or contact the implement manufacturer to confirm which
version of the ISOBUS standard the implement supports.

To modify the version of the ISOBUS standard:

1. Press the “VT Compatibility” window. The “VT Com-
patibility” options window (2) opens.
2. Press the desired option. The “VT Compatibility” op-
tions window closes. The “VT Compatibility” window
indicates the selected option. NHIL19PLM0824AA 3

If you operate with an auxiliary input device (such as an

ISOBUS joystick or ISOBUS switchbox), then configure
the “VT compatibility” window as follows:
• Select “Version 4” if the auxiliary input device is an
“AUX-N” (new) device and the ISOBUS implement
supports version 4 of the ISOBUS standard.
• Select “Version 3” if the auxiliary input device is an
“AUX-N” (new) device and the ISOBUS implement
supports version 3 of the ISOBUS standard.
• Select “Version 2” if the auxiliary input device is an
“AUX-O” (old) device and the ISOBUS implement
supports version 2 of the ISOBUS standard.

NHIL19PLM0825AA 4

To understand if an ISOBUS implement supports AUX-N Example AEF certification label

or AUX-O, either:
• Refer to the ISOBUS implement operator manual

OR

• View the information for the implement model in

the AEF ISOBUS Database (www.aef-isobus-data-
base.org)
NOTE: If you cannot determine the correct setting by
RAPH14DSP1439AA 5
other means, select “Version 3” and attempt to perform
auxiliary control mapping. If you cannot complete the
mapping process or the mapped controls do not function,
change the setting in this window to “Version 2” and try
again.

7-3
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

VT Number
Use the “VT Number” window (1) to establish whether
more than one terminal is in use. Because the ISO 11783
standard allows more than one terminal to operate simul-
taneously, you must identify which terminal the “Virtual
Terminal” application is.

You should leave this window set to “1” if:

• you are operating with the “Virtual Terminal” application
as your only terminal

OR

• you wish to map the ISOBUS implement functions to

controls on an ISOBUS auxiliary input device NHIL19PLM0824AA 6

NOTE: The “Auxiliary Controls” screen is only available

for the first terminal (number 1). If the “VT Number”
window is set to a value other than “1,” the “AUX” icon
in the navigation bar is inactive and you cannot select
it.

To modify the number terminals in use:

1. Press the “VT Number” window. The “VT Number”
keypad window (2) opens.
2. Use the keypad to enter a number for the “Virtual Ter-
minal” application.
3. Press the “Enter” button. The “VT Number” keypad
window closes. The “VT Number” window indicates
the new value.

NHIL18PLM0317AA 7

7-4
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Send ISO Speed?

The “Send ISO Speed?” window (1) the method used, if
any, to send ground speed information to the ISOBUS im-
plement over the ISOBUS Controller Area Network (CAN)
bus. The display only sends the speed information in the
ISOBUS radar speed format.

On the tractor, the display translates the speed informa-

tion from a radar device or Global Navigation Satellite
System (GNSS) receiver and sends the messages to the
implement via the ISOBUS CAN bus in an ISO-compliant
format.

The setting depends on the ISOBUS implement and your

operating conditions. “Send ISO Speed?” setting must
NHIL19PLM0824AA 8
be set to “No” if your:
• ISOBUS implement is equipped with a wheel speed
sensor.
• Tractor is equipped with a Tractor Electronic Control
Unit (TECU). The TECU automatically sends the speed
information measured by an on-board speed sensor
over the CAN bus for use by the implement.
• Tractor does not have a radar device or is equipped with
a GNSS receiver.
To modify the method of sending ground speed
information:
1. Press the “Send ISO Speed?” window. The “Send ISO
Speed?” options window (2) opens.
2. Press the desired option. The “Send ISO Speed?” op-
tions window closes. The “Send ISO Speed?” window
indicates the selected option.
NOTE: The available options depend on your vehicle
configuration. If your tractor is equipped with dual dis-
plays, then the “GPS” option will only be visible on the
secondary display, which handles the management of
the precision farming and autoguidance functionality.

If you selected “Radar” or “GPS” for the “Send ISO

Speed?” window, then you must also configure the im- NHIL19PLM0827AA 9
plement within the “Virtual Terminal” application to accept
the speed information on the ISOBUS CAN bus.
NOTE: If unclear and given the option, always choose the
selection related to “ISO radar” speed within the imple-
ment software. Even if the tractor is configured to send
GPS speed data, the information will always be trans-
ferred to the implement via the ISO radar format.

See your implement operator’s manual for specific infor-

mation regarding ISO speed configuration.

7-5
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Soft Keys
Use the “Soft Keys” window (1) to select the number of soft
keys available to the ISOBUS implement. The available
options are “6” or “12.”

To modify the number of soft keys:

1. Press the “Soft Keys” window. The “Soft Keys” options
window (2) opens.
2. Press the desired option. The “Soft Keys” options win-
dow closes. The “Soft Keys” window indicates the se-
lected option.

NHIL19PLM0824AA 10

NHIL19PLM0828AA 11

7-6
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

"VT Preferences" screen

On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access
the “Toolbox” screens.

RAIL16DSP0549BA 1

Press the “VT” icon in the navigation bar to access the

“Virtual Terminal” setup screens.
NOTE: The “VT” icon is shaped like a down arrow to in-
dicate that it opens a series of sub-menus for the “Virtual
Terminal” application.

RAIL14DSP1371BA 2

Press the “Pref” icon in the navigation bar to display the

“VT Preferences” screen.

RAIL14DSP1363BA 3

7-7
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Use a button at the top of the “VT Preferences” screen to

select the preferred units of measurement for the imple-
ment software in the “Virtual Terminal” application.

Pressing a button changes all unit window selections on

the screen to the recommended setting for the category:
metric, imperial or USA. The following table below shows
typical measurements for the selection and the window
which controls the various measurements.

RAIL14DSP1368BA 4

Window Metric Imperial USA

Distance millimeter inch inch
centimeter foot foot
meter yard yard
kilometer mile mile
Area square millimeter square inch square inch
square centimeter square foot square foot
square meter square yard square yard
square kilometer square mile square mile
Volume milliliter ounce-UK ounce-USA
centiliter cup-UK cup-USA
liter pint-UK pint-USA
kiloliter quart-UK quart-USA
cubic millimeter cubic inch cubic inch
cubic centimeter cubic foot cubic foot
cubic meter cubic yard cubic yard
Mass milligram ounce ounce
centigram pound pound
gram ton-UK ton-USA
kilogram
Temperature °C (Celsius) °F (Fahrenheit) °F (Fahrenheit)
Pressure kPa (kiloPascal) psi (pound/square inch) psi (pound/square inch)
mmHg (mercury) inHg (mercury) inHg (mercury)
mmH2O (water) inH2O (water) inH2O (water)
Force N lb in lb in
Nm lb ft lb ft
Other:
speed km/h mph mph
horsepower kilo Watt hp hp
application rate kg/ha lb/ac lb/ac
L/ha gal/ac gal/ac

7-8
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

If you press the “Metric” button, all unit windows change

to the “Metric” selection.

If you press the “Imperial” button, all unit windows change

to the “Imperial” selection.

However, if you press the “USA” button, the unit windows

change to a combination of “USA” and “Imperial” selec-
tions. These are the correct settings for the USA.

RAIL14DSP1370BA 5

You can change the setting in any individual unit window

as required.

Press any of the unit windows to access the pop-up op-

tions window.

The options window contains the valid selections for the

unit window; sometimes only two options display.

Press the desired selection in the option window to save

the new setting for the window.

RAIL14DSP1369BA 6

7-9
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

"Auxiliary Controls" screen

Use the “Auxiliary Controls” screen to map functions of the ISOBUS implement or tool to switches or other controls
in the cab.

To perform control mapping, the implement or tool must be connected and the vehicle must be equipped with an
ISOBUS input device such as a joystick or switch box.
NOTE: Auxiliary control mapping is only supported for virtual terminal number 1. If the “AUX” icon is inactive (grayed
out), ensure that the “VT Number” window on the “VT Setups” screen (Home > Toolbox > VT > Setup) is set to “1.”
From the “Home” screen, press the “ ISOBUS” icon to
access the ISOBUS screens.

RAIL19PLM1180AA 1

Press the “AUX” icon in the navigation bar to access the

“Auxiliary Controls” screen.

RAIL19PLM1196AA 2

The appearance and behavior of the “Auxiliary Controls” screen depend on the version of the ISO 11783 standard
that your ISOBUS implement or tool uses.
• When version 2 is in use, you must manually map functions to your controls.
• When version 3 or version 4 is in use, some or all function mapping may occur automatically. For mapping that
does not occur automatically, you can use “Learn” mode or you can manually map functions to controls in the same
manner that you would with a version 2 compatible ISOBUS implement or tool. Version 3 also introduces the ability
of the ISOBUS implement or tool to enforce additional requirements for the mapping of specific functions.

7-10
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

VT auxiliary controls: version 2 compatible (AUX-O)

Auxiliary control mapping for version two
compatible ISOBUS implements or tools is a
manual process.

The following example shows the mapping of the func-

tions of a front-end loader to the buttons on a joystick con-
trol in the cab.

If you wish to view additional information about the func-

tion mapping process, press the “Help” button.

NHIL19PLM0127AA 3

A pop-up message displays: “Version 2 Aux Controls.

This screen is used to assign implement or tool functions
to ISOBUS compliant auxiliary inputs. First, select an im-
plement or tool in the upper left box. You can then man-
ually assign functions to inputs. For each function, se-
lect an input device (i.e. switch box/panel) and an auxil-
iary control (i.e. switch/dial). When finished, remember
to scroll back to the top page and press the SAVE button
to save your edits! The DELETE button can be used to
delete all assignments.”

Press the “OK” button to dismiss the message.

NHIL19PLM0128AA 4

Press the ISOBUS implement/tool selection window to ac-

cess the pop-up icon window.

The pop-up window displays icons for the ISOBUS imple-

ments or tools that are currently connected to the AFS Pro
700.

Press the icon for the implement or tool that you wish to
configure – a front-end loader in this example.

NHIL19PLM0129AA 5

7-11
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

The functions for the tool – raise, lower, hold, float, and
dump – load into the first column on the screen . If nec-
essary, this screen extends downward to display all func-
tions for the tool. Use the scroll bar on the left-hand side
of the “Auxiliary Controls” screen to view any remaining
functions that do not display on the first screen.

A “Save” button and a “Delete” button display at the top of

the screen next to the ISOBUS implement/tool selection
window.

NHIL19PLM0130AA 6

The second column represents the ISOBUS input devices

on the vehicle that are available for mapping.

A blue circle with a white “X” in the second column indi-

cates that no device is currently assigned to the corre-
sponding tool function.

Press the device icon next to the first function – loader

raise in this example – to access the pop-up icon window.

NHIL19PLM0130AA 7

The pop-up window displays icons for the ISOBUS input

devices on the vehicle that are appropriate to this function.
The icon in this example is for an ISO joystick.
NOTE: If no devices are present for this function, the
pop-up window contains no options; a blue circle with an
“X” displays.

Press the joystick icon to assign this ISOBUS input device

to the loader raise function.

The icon for the joystick displays in the device column for
the loader raise function.

NHIL19PLM0131AA 8

7-12
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

The third column represents the controls on the ISOBUS

input device that are available for mapping. A blue circle
with a white “X” in the third column indicates that no control
is currently mapped to the function.

Press the control icon that is adjacent to the loader raise

icon to access the pop-up icon window.

NHIL19PLM0132AA 9

Press the icon for the appropriate control – the joystick

button for loader raise in this example.
NOTE: If no controls are present for this function, the
pop-up window contains no options; a blue circle with an
“X” displays.

The icon for the loader raise button displays in the control
column for the loader raise function.

NHIL19PLM0133AA 10

Continue in this fashion until you have mapped the re-

maining functions to the desired controls.

Press the “Save” button to save the mappings to memory.

NHIL19PLM0134AA 11

7-13
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

A pop-up message displays: ”Auxiliary Control Mappings

for selected implement will be saved. Proceed?”

Press the “Yes” button to save the new auxiliary control

mappings.

Press the “No” button to clear the new auxiliary control

mappings..

After you press the “Yes” button, the controls that you
mapped – joystick buttons in this example – will control
the functions of the ISOBUS implement or tool.

The settings reside in Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) and

persist – even over power cycles – until an operator edits
them or deletes them.
NHIL19PLM0135AA 12
NOTE: If you replace the display or perform a clean install
of the display software without retaining your data, you
must perform auxiliary control mapping again.
If you wish to discontinue use of the ISOBUS implement or
tool for any reason, you can press the “Delete” button on
the “Auxiliary Controls” screen to clear the auxiliary control
mappings.

NHIL19PLM0134AA 13

A pop-up message displays: ”Auxiliary Control Mappings

for selected implement will be deleted. Proceed?”

Press the “Yes” button to clear the auxiliary control map-

pings.

Press the “No” button to keep the current auxiliary control

mappings.

NHIL19PLM0136AA 14

7-14
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

VT auxiliary controls: version 3 and version 4 compatible (AUX-N)

Auxiliary control mapping for version 3 and
version 4 compatible ISOBUS implements
or tools can be entirely automatic, partially
automatic, or manual depending on the
combination of ISOBUS implement and
ISOBUS input device.

You also have the added ability to “teach” the system

which control you wish to use for a function rather than
select the control from a list.

Finally, the “Auxiliary Control” screen includes icons to

provide extra information about the functions that you are
mapping. See the accompanying table for more informa-
tion.

Other aspects of this screen function in the same manner

for both version 2, version 3, and version 4:
• The ISOBUS implement/tool selection window
• The “Save” button RAIL19PLM1182AA 15

• The “Delete” button Icon Meaning

• The “Help” button The function is mapped to a preferred control
• The device selection windows (second column) that you cannot change.

• The control selection windows (third column) The function can only use a dedicated control,
i.e. you cannot map additional functions to the
Manual mapping for version 3 and version 4 compati-
same control.
ble ISOBUS implements or tools is the same as manual
The function is considered critical per ISO
mapping for version 2 compatible ISOBUS implements or
15077 – i.e. when you actuate the control, it
tools. See the above description of version 2 if you wish
can cause an action that could be hazardous
to map the implement or tool functions manually.
to the machine operator or bystanders. You
The following example shows the mapping of the func- must use a critical control for this function.
tions of an aircart to controls on a switch box in the cab. The function is mapped to a control and the
mapping is saved, therefore enabling the
In this example, the ISOBUS implement detects the pre- control.
ferred controls, automatically maps functions to the pre-
ferred controls, and saves the mapping without any oper-
ator input. The green check mark in each row indicates
that the mapping is stored and the control is enabled.

7-15
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

If you wish to view additional information about the func-

tion mapping process, press the “Help” button.

RAIL19PLM1182AA 16

A pop-up message displays: “This screen is used to as-

sign implement functions to ISOBUS compliant auxiliary
inputs. Begin by selecting an implement in the upper left
box. You can then manually assign functions to inputs or
use Learn Mode. To use Learn Mode press the LEARN
button, select a function row, then physically actuate the
switch or dial you want to assign to the function. Remem-
ber to press the SAVE button when all edits are complete!
The DELETE button can be used to delete all assign-
ments.”

Press the “OK” button to dismiss the message.

RAIL19PLM1183AA 17

7-16
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Use the “Learn” button to teach the system which control

you wish to use for a function.

Press the “Learn” button to enter “Learn” mode.

NOTE: The “Learn” button is a latching button that high-
lights when “Learn” mode is active.

RAIL19PLM1184AA 18

With “Learn” mode active, press the icon for the function
that you wish to map.

The row highlights in orange to indicate that the system is

ready to map the function to a control.

Actuate the control that you wish to use for the selected
function.

If the control is valid for the selected function, the icon

for the control displays in the third column. The “Input
Enabled” icon does not display because the new mapping
is not yet saved.

Select other rows to map additional functions as required.

RAIL19PLM1185AA 19

Press the “Save” button to save the mappings.

NHIL19PLM0137AA 20

7-17
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

A pop-up message displays: ”Auxiliary Control Mappings

for selected implement will be saved. Proceed?”

Press the “Yes” button to save the new auxiliary control

mappings.

Press the “No” button to clear the new auxiliary control

mappings.

After you press the “Yes” button, the “Input Enabled” icon
displays in each row that has a valid mapping. The con-
trols that you mapped will now control the functions of the
ISOBUS implement or tool.

The settings reside in the implement and persist – even

over power cycles – until an operator edits them or deletes
them.
NOTE: Because the settings reside in the implement, you
can replace the display or perform a clean install of the
display software without losing the auxiliary control map-
pings. RAIL19PLM1186AA 21

If you wish to discontinue use of the ISOBUS implement or

tool for any reason, you can press the “Delete” button on
the “Auxiliary Controls” screen to clear the auxiliary control
mappings.

NHIL19PLM0142AA 22

A pop-up message displays: ”Auxiliary Control Mappings

for selected implement will be deleted. Proceed?”

Press the “Yes” button to clear the auxiliary control map-

pings.
NOTE: The next time you power ON the display with the
ISOBUS implement or tool connected, the implement or
tool uploads any preferred control mappings to the dis-
play.

Press the “No” button to keep the current auxiliary control

mappings.

RAIL19PLM1189AA 23

7-18
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Auxiliary armrest controls (if equipped)

With the optional ISOBUS Class 2 or Class 3 functions
activated on the tractor and an ISOBUS Class 2 or 3 com-
patible implement connected to the tractor, it is possible
to assign tractor controls on the armrest to specific imple-
ment functions.

The auxiliary armrest controls can be configured within the

“ISOBUS” screen. For more information, see your tractor
operator’s manual.

RAIL19PLM1180AA 24

7-19
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

Working with an application in the Virtual Terminal (VT)

Whenever the display is powered ON and an ISOBUS im-
plement or tool is connected, the implement or tool au-
tomatically uploads its software components to the dis-
play. Two icons display in the status and warning icon
area while the components load.

The object pool icon displays

while an ISOBUS implement or
tool uploads its components to the
display.
The diskette icon displays when
the object pool from an ISOBUS
implement is saved to or loaded
from Non-Volatile Memory (NVM)
in the display.

Once the components are loaded, the applications are

ready for use.

From the “Home” screen, press the “VT” icon to access

the “Virtual Terminal” screens. RAIL16DSP0549BA 1

In this example, the operator has placed the “VT Imple-

ments 1x1” window in the left-hand area. The window
displays an icon for each connected ISOBUS device: the
CNHi switch box, the aircart, and a flow monitoring mod-
ule.

The icon for the selected device is highlighted in green.

The soft keys on the right-hand side of the screen al-

low you to navigate within the application for the selected
ISOBUS device.

The “Virtual Terminal” application provides three ways for

an operator to change the active ISOBUS application:
• Press the icon for an ISOBUS device in the “VT Im-
plements 1x1” window (1) or the “VT Implements 1x2” RAIL14DSP1424BA 2
window
NOTE: Use the “VT Implements 1x2” window if you
have more than three applications loaded.
• Press the “Next Application” button (2) to cycle to the
application for the next ISOBUS device
• Press the “Application Grid Select” icon (3) to view and
choose from a grid of icons for all connected ISOBUS
devices

The text at the bottom of the “VT” screen (4) identifies the
active application.

7-20
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

If you use the “Application Grid Select” button, a grid of

ISOBUS device icons occupies the entire “VT” screen.

Press an icon in the grid (1) to select an application.

To return to the screens for the active application, press

the button that identifies the active application (2).

RAIL14DSP1428BA 3

The “VT Implements 1x1” window (1) updates to indicate

the selected ISOBUS device.

The soft keys on the right-hand side of the display (2)

update to display only functions that are available for the
active application.

RAIL14DSP1432BA 4

Other aspects of usage will vary with the ISOBUS applica-

tions that are loaded. Refer to the operator’s manual for
your ISOBUS implement for complete operating instruc-
tions.

7-21
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

"Run" screen windows for the Virtual Terminal (VT)

Up to seven additional “Run” screen windows are
available whenever the “Virtual Terminal” application is
present:
• “VT 2x6”
• “VT Auxiliary Memory”
• “VT Implements 1x1”
• “VT Implements 1x2”
• “VT NV Memory”
• “VT RAM Memory”
• “VT Upload”

The windows are primarily intended for developers to test

the compatibility of their software with the “Virtual Termi- RAIL19PLM1190AA 1
nal” application. Select the windows for a “Run” screen
using the “Run Layout” screen (Home > Toolbox > Lay-
out).

“VT 2x6”
Placement label: VT 2x6

Placement location: “Run” screens

Rather than use the “Home” screen as a pivot point

between the “Virtual Terminal” screens and the “Run”
screens, you can place the “VT 2x6” window on any
“Run” screen to make navigation quicker. This window
has a two column by six row layout and uses the total
area of the selected “Run” screen.
NOTE: If required, change the layout of the selected “Run”
screen to a 2 column by 6 row layout before you place the
“VT 2x6” window.
RAIL14DSP1436BA 2
The operation of the ISOBUS application is the same
whether you access it with the “VT” screen (Home > VT)
or with the “VT 2x6” window the on the “Run” screens.
Only the content of the bottom navigation bar differs.

“VT Auxiliary Memory”

Placement label: VT Aux Mem.

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

A bar graph visually represents the use of auxiliary mem-

ory by all active implement or tool applications.
NOTE: This window is only available when the “VT Com-
patibility” window on the “VT Setups” screen (Home >
Toolbox > VT > Setup) is set to “Version 2.”

RAIL14DSP1399BA 3

7-22
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

“VT Implements 1x1”

Placement label: VT Implements 1x1

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

This window allows you to select among up to three con-

nected ISOBUS implements or tools. The user interface
for the selected implement or tool displays in the “VT 2x6”
window and on the “Virtual Terminal” screen.

RAIL14DSP1400BA 4

“VT Implements 1x2”

Placement label: VT Implements 1x2

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

This window allows you to select among up to six con-

nected ISOBUS implements or tools. The user interface
for the selected implement or tool displays in the “VT 2x6”
window and on the “Virtual Terminal” screen.

RAIL14DSP1401BA 5

“VT NV Memory”
Placement label: VT NV Mem.

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

A bar graph visually represents the use of Non-Volatile

(NV) memory by all active implement or tool applications.

RAIL14DSP1402BA 6

7-23
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

“VT RAM Memory”

Placement label: VT RAM Mem.

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

A bar graph visually represents the use of Random Ac-

cess Memory (RAM) by all active implement or tool appli-
cations.

RAIL14DSP1403BA 7

“VT Upload”
Placement label: VT Upload

Placement location: “Run” screens or left-hand area

A bar graph visually represents progress as the object

pool for an implement or tool application is uploaded to
the display.

RAIL14DSP1404BA 8

7-24
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

"Diagnostics" screens for the Virtual Terminal (VT)

The “Diagnostics” screens for the “Virtual Terminal” appli-
cation are provided primarily for implement developers to
test their compatibility with the “Virtual Terminal” applica-
tion. The screens are highly technical.
NOTE: Perform actions on these screens under the in-
struction of qualified CASE IH service personnel only.
On the “Home” screen, press the “Diagnostics” icon to
access the “Diagnostics” screens.

RAIL16DSP0549BA 1

Press the “VT” icon in the navigation bar to access the

“Virtual Terminal” setup screens.
NOTE: The “VT” icon is shaped like a down arrow to in-
dicate that it opens a series of sub-menus for the “Virtual
Terminal” application.

• The “Object Browser” screen displays the object pool “Object Browser” screen
for applications stored in non-volatile memory for vari-
ous clients. The screen provides pop-up messages for
compatibility problems.

RAIL14DSP1405BA 2

7-25
 7 - VIRTUAL TERMINAL (VT) OR UNIVERSAL TERMINAL (UT)

• The “NVM Browser” screen enables a developer to “NVM Browser” screen

manually manage the use of non-volatile memory by
an object pool. Each object pool is represented by a
folder with a hexadecimal title and a .iop file with a six
digit name.

RAIL14DSP1406BA 3

• The “CAN Counters” screen displays counters for a va- “CAN Counters” screen
riety of different message types that are sent or received
by the ISOBUS implement on the Controller Area Net-
work (CAN).

RAIL14DSP1407BA 4

• The “About VT” screen provides basic information “About VT” screen
about the “Virtual Terminal” application.
○ Copyright information
○ Version number
○ Build date
○ Current memory usage
○ ISOBUS certification label, if applicable

The “About VT” screen also provides a “Reset” button

that reboots the display and reloads the ISOBUS soft-
ware in the “Virtual Terminal” application.

RAIL14DSP1359BA 5

7-26
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION
"Telematics" screen
When the “Telematics” application is present for use with
the AFS Connect™ telematics service, the “Telematics”
screen is added to the “Toolbox” screens.

On the “Home” screen, press the “Toolbox” icon to access

the “Toolbox” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Tel” tab on the navigation bar to access the

“Telematics” screen.

The ”Telematics” screen displays.

RAIL12DSP1429BA 2

“Telematics Installed”
Use the “Telematics Installed” window to enable the
“Telematics” application on the display.

Press the “Telematics Installed” window to access the

pop-up options window.

NHIL18PLM1365BA 3

8-1
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

Select one of the available telematics options (1).

NOTE: If you have the FieldView® Drive™ module in-
stalled, select the correct modem followed by “and Drive”
option.
NOTE: If you have the FieldView® Drive™ module in-
stalled, your tractor can support the FieldView® Drive™
platform in an iPad® tablet and cloud service. See your
FieldView® Drive™ documentation.
NOTE: For A-B line sharing functionality of the Field-
View® Drive™ module, see the autoguidance software
operating guide.
NOTE: Select the “No” option to disable the “Telematics”
application.
RAIL19PLM1521BA 4

AM53 AM53 PCM

(connected) (not connected)
When the “Telematics” application is enabled, the
“Telematics” icon displays in the status and warning
icon area. The number of bars (0-3) indicates the RAIL19PLM1078AA 5
current strength of the cellular signal. Status and warning icon area: PCM modem
NOTE: For the AM53 only: When the cellular network is
connected, the icon bars are green. When the cellular
network is not connected (e.g., coverage is not available
or your subscription is not valid), the icon bars are gray.

If the “Telematics” application is enabled and

the modem is not detected on the Controller
Area Network (CAN), the “Telematics” icon
flashes in the status and warning icon area.
The bars are red to indicate that the system
is not functional. See “Telematics Not
Detected” window section in Figure 7.
Press the “Telematics” icon at any time to view details of
the cellular connection. A pop-up window reports the net-
work status and cellular Radio Signal Strength Indicator
(RSSI) in decibels.

The AM53 modem displays the details for the Mobile

Country Code (MCC), Mobile Network Code (MNC), and
network operator. Press the “OK” button to dismiss the
message.

RAIL14DSP1622BA 6

8-2
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Telematics Not Dectected” window

A pop-up window displays: “Modem offline. See Opera-
tor’s Manual if problem continues.”

Press the:
• “Ignore” button to suppress further warnings and con-
tinue working without using the “Telematics” applica-
tion.
• “OK” button to close the window and leave the fault ac-
tive.

RAIL14DSP1623BA 7

1. Verify that the setting in the “Telematics CAN Node”

window is correct (see “Telematics CAN Node” section
11).
2. Verify that the green Light Emitting Diode (LED) for
power on the modem is steady ON.
NOTE: If the LED is blinking, the modem firmware is
updating. Do not interrupt this process.
3. If the LED is steady ON, cycle power to the system.
4. If the problem persists, check the CAN connection to
the modem.

RAIL12GEN0174AA 8
AM53 modem

RAIL19PLM1077AA 9
PCM modem

8-3
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

Depending on your vehicle type and modem, additional

windows display when you enable the “Telematics”
application:
• “Telematics CAN Node”
• “File Transfer Enabled” (AM53 and PCM modems only)
• “Fuel Tank Size” (tractors only)
• “Fuel Theft Delta”
• “Fwd Info Alarms”
• “Fwd Warning Alarms”
• “Fwd Stop Danger Alarms”
• “Cell Network mode”

NHIL18PLM1367BA 10

“Telematics CAN Node”

Use the “Telematics CAN Node” window to set the CAN
channel to which the modem is connected.

The default setting for this window is the “CAN A” option.

Press the “Telematics CAN Node” window to access the

pop-up options window.

NHIL18PLM1367BA 11

8-4
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

The following table lists the correct setting by vehicle type.

Vehicle type CAN node

Tractor CAN A
Sprayer CAN B
Combine CAN A
Cane Harvester CAN B
Self-Propelled Windrower CAN A

Press the correct setting option for your vehicle in the

“Telematics CAN Node” window.

NHIL18PLM1370BA 12

“File Transfer Enabled” (AM53 and PCM

modems only)
The modem adds the ability to connect to the AFS Con-
nect server and upload the data from your display.

Because the volume of data is too large for communica-

tion over the CAN, the display transfers the data to the
modem via a serial cable connected to one of the two
RS-232 ports on the display. To enable the file transfer
feature, you must identify to which RS-232 port the mo-
dem is connected.

Press the “File Transfer Enabled” window to access the

“File Transfer Enabled” options window.

NHIL18PLM1367BA 13

8-5
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

Press the correct port for your modem configuration or

press “Disabled” to leave the file transfer feature disabled.

NHIL18PLM1369BA 14

The status and warning icon area display

a cloud icon displays when the modem
establishes communication with the server.
An exclamation point within the cloud icon
indicates there is a conflict with the selected
port (e.g., another software application
needs to communicate on the port). A
pop-up window identifies the conflicting RAIL19PLM1078AA 15
software application and asks if you want to
close the “Telematics” application to allow
the conflicting application to access the port.

An upward arrow within the cloud icon

indicates uploading is currently in process.

A downward arrow within the cloud icon

indicates downloading is currently in
process.

This icon replaces the cloud when new files

are finished downloading and ready for
installation.

Press the cloud icon to view the server connection status

in a pop-up window.

Press the “OK” button to dismiss the message.

NHIL18PLM1374BA 16

8-6
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Data Transfer”
When you enable the file transfer feature, the “Data Trans-
fer” window displays on the “Telematics” screen.

Use the “Sync” button in the “Data Transfer” window to

perform the initial synchronization with the server. You
only need to do this when you set up telematics for the
first time. Thereafter, the display automatically transmits
new or changed data at 30 min intervals and when you
turn the display OFF.

Press the “Sync” button to initiate the file transfer.

NOTE: The initial synchronization may take several min-
utes.
NOTE: The “Telematics Installed” window, “File Trans-
fer Enabled” window, and “Sync” button become inactive
when you initiate the file transfer.
NOTE: The cloud icon contains an arrow while file transfer
NHIL18PLM1371BA 17
is in progress.

“Fuel Tank Size”

Use the “Fuel Tank Size” window to set the size of the fuel
tank on your vehicle. The fuel tank size is required for the
display to calculate an accurate fuel tank level (%).

Press the “Fuel Tank Size” window to access the pop-up

keypad.

NHIL18PLM1376BA 18

Use the keypad to enter a value.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

NHIL18PLM1377BA 19

8-7
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Fuel Theft Delta”

NOTE: The “Fuel Theft Delta” window is only required for
growers who intend to use the fuel theft alarm feature of
the AFS Connect telematics package.

Use the “Fuel Theft Delta” window to set the threshold for
when a fuel theft alarm is triggered.

When the system is powered ON, the “Telematics” appli-

cation compares the current fuel level to the fuel level that
was recorded before the system was powered OFF. The
fuel theft alarm is triggered when the difference (or delta)
between these two measurements exceeds the percent-
age in the “Fuel Theft Delta” window.
NOTE: The fuel theft alarm appears on the NHIL18PLM1375BA 20
AFSMYPLMCONNECT web portal.

The acceptable range of values for the “Fuel Theft Delta”

window is 1 – 20%The default setting is 5%.

Press the “Fuel Theft Delta” window to access the pop-up

keypad.
Use the keypad to enter a value from 1 – 20%.

Press the “Enter” button on the keypad to save the value.

NHIL18PLM1378BA 21

“Fwd Info Alarms”

The “Fwd Info alarms” window allows the operator to en-
able or disable the forwarding of low priority informational
alarms to the AFS Connect™ portal.

Press the "Fwd Info Alarms” window to access the pop-up

options window. The available options are “Enabled” and
“Disabled.”

NHIL18PLM1368BA 22

8-8
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Fwd Warning Alarms”

The “Fwd Warning alarms” window allows the operator to
enable or disable the forwarding of medium priority warn-
ing alarms to the AFS Connect™ portal.

Press the "Fwd Warning Alarms” window to access the

pop-up options window. The available options are “En-
abled” and “Disabled.”

NHIL18PLM1368BA 23

“Fwd Stop Danger Alarms”

The “Fwd Stop Danger alarms” window allows the opera-
tor to enable or disable the forwarding of high priority stop
and danger alarms to the AFS Connect™ portal.

Press the "Fwd Stop Danger Alarms” window to access

the pop-up options window. The available options are
“Enabled” and “Disabled.”

NHIL18PLM1368BA 24

8-9
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Cell Network Mode”

NOTE: The “Cell Network Mode” cell is only available with
the AM53 modem.

The “Cell Network Mode” window allows you to manually

select a different cellular network than the network auto-
matically selected by the modem.

Select the desired cellular network mode, or choose

“Auto” for automatic selection.

NHIL18PLM1368BA 25

Select the desired cellular network mode, or choose

“Auto” for automatic selection.
(1) – 1XRTT / EVDO: Upon selection, the modem will
search for and select the best available 1xRTT/EV-DO
(CDMA) network. If no CDMA network is available, the
modem will NOT automatically search for a GSM net-
work during the current power cycle. After a power cy-
cle, the modem will attempt to reconnect to the last-
used network. If the network is not available, the mo-
dem will revert to AUTO mode and will search for the
strongest CDMA or GSM network.
(2) – Auto: The modem automatically searches for and
selects the strongest network during a power cycle. The
modem may switch between CDMA (Sprint or roaming
partners) and GSM (Vodaphone or roaming partners)
multiple times during a power cycle.

NHIL18PLM1379BA 26

(3) – GPRS/UMTS: Upon selection, the modem will search for and select the best available GPRS/UMTS (GSM)
network. If no GSM network is available, the modem will NOT automatically search for a CDMA network during
the current power cycle. After a power cycle, the modem will attempt to reconnect to the last-used network. If the
network is not available, the modem will revert to AUTO mode and will search for the strongest GSM or CDMA
network.
NOTE: The “Cell Network Mode” window should not require changes on a regular basis. This setting is intended for
troubleshooting scenarios where cellular coverage is suspected to be the cause of field performance issues.

8-10
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

"Text Messages Received" screen

Managers can send text messages from the AFS Connect
web portal to telematics-equipped vehicles in the field. An
incoming text message immediately displays in a pop-up
window on the AFS Pro 700 display when it is received.
NOTE: Text messages are limited to a maximum of 160
characters.

RAIL14DSP1619BA 1

The vehicle operator can use the “Text Messages

Received” screen to:
• View a time-stamped list of incoming text messages
• Determine which text messages have been answered
• Respond to text messages
• Delete text messages that are no longer needed

On the “Home” screen, press the “Data Management”

icon to access the “Data Management” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 2

Press the “Msgs” (messages) tab in the navigation bar to

display the “Text Messages Received” screen.

The “Text Messages Received” screen displays a list of in-

coming text messages. The text messages appear in re-
verse chronological order–the newest message appears
at the top of the list, and the oldest message appears at
the bottom of the list.
NOTE: A maximum of 20 text messages can be stored
on the display. If a message is received after this limit is
reached, the oldest message is automatically deleted to
make space for the incoming message.

RAIL16DSP0676BA 3

8-11
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

An icon displays next to each text message to indicate

whether the operator has responded to the message.

The check mark (1) indicates that the

operator has responded to the message.

The magnifying glass (2) indicates that the

operator has not responded to the message.

RAIL16DSP0676BA 4

Press a button on the “Text Messages Received” screen

to access the pop-up text message window.

RAIL16DSP0676BA 5

Press the “Delete” button to delete the text message. The

message will no longer appear on the “Text Messages
Received” screen.

Press the “View” button to view the text message with

buttons for the responses that were selected by the web
portal user.

RAIL16DSP0677BA 6

8-12
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

If the operator presses the “View” button, the text

message displays with the “Ignore” button and buttons
for up to two response options that were chosen by the
web portal user. The possible responses are:
• “Yes”
• “No”
• “OK”
• “Later”

Press the “Ignore” button to continue without responding

to the message.

Press any other button to send a response to the web

portal user.
RAIL16DSP0678BA 7
NOTE: If the operator has already responded to the text
message, selecting a difference response will update the
response on the web portal.
If the operator responds to a message that was previously
ignored, the icon next to the message updates to indicate
that the operator has responded to the message.

RAIL16DSP0679BA 8

8-13
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

Data download
With File Transfer, CN1 files can be sent from the and
from the Portal to the display. One-way File Transfer is
available for ISO XML files (display to portal).
NOTE: The file size of the uncompressed CN1 folder must
not exceed 2 MB.
NOTE: The file size of the uncompressed TASKDATA
folder must not exceed 3.5 MB.

While the display is downloading the new

data, the cloud icon updates with a down
arrow to indicate that the file transfer is
currently in progress.

RAIL16DSP0800BA 1

When the download is complete, an icon

(1) displays in the status and warning icon
area to indicate that new files are ready for
installation. A pop-up message displays:
“New Files Received. Do you want to
install?”

NOTE: There is no requirement to cycle key power to in-

stall new files. However, the vehicle cannot be in a work
state.

Press the “Yes” button (2) to install the new file.

• If the downloaded data is in the Voyager 2 format or the
ISO XML format, the new data is now available for your
field operation.
RAIL19PLM0589BA 2
• If the downloaded data is in the shapefile format, use
the “Import2” screen (Home > Data Management > Im-
port2) to assign the data to a field on the memory stick.
See 4-34.

Press the “No” button (3) to postpone the file installation.

• The “New File Received” icon (1) remains visible in the
LHA.
• Press the “New File Received” icon (1) in the LHA when
you are ready to install the new file.
If the new data cannot be installed because the machine is
in work, a pop-up message displays when you power ON
the display: “New Files Received. End work to install.”

Press the “OK” button to install the new files.

RAIL19PLM0592BA 3

8-14
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

If you previously declined a file installation, the “New File

Received” icon in the LHA continues to appear in future
power cycles.

Press the “New File Received” icon (1) . A “Server Con-

nection Status” popup appears. The popup states, “New
Files Received. Do you want to install?”

Press the “Yes” button (2) to continue the file installation.

Press the “No” button (3) to cancel the file installation.

RAIL19PLM0590BA 4

If the downloaded data overwrites any existing data on

the memory stick, the display creates a backup copy of
the overwritten data.

If required, use the “Backup Management” screen (Home

> Data Management > Backup) to restore the most recent
backup on the memory stick. See “Backup Management”
screen (8-16).

RAIL16DSP0799BA 5

8-15
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

"Backup Management" screen

Data downloads from the telematics file transfer server
can overwrite existing data on the memory stick. When
new data overwrites existing data on the memory stick,
the “Telematics” application retains a backup copy of the
old data in a .zip archive on the memory stick.

If required, use the “Backup Management” screen to re-

store the most recent data backup.

If needed, press the “Data Management” icon on the

“Home” screen to access the “Data Management”
screens.
NOTE: There is no requirement to cycle key power if the
file was downloaded during this key cycle.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Backup” tab in the navigation bar to display the

“Backup Management” screen.

A list of .zip archives displays.

The name of each archive consists of the date and time

that the “Telematics” application created the archive.

RAIL16DSP0799BA 2

Press the “Restore” button to restore the most recent data

backup.

RAIL16DSP0799BA 3

8-16
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

A pop-up message displays: “Are you sure you want to

overwrite the existing file(s) with this backup?”

Press the “OK” button to overwrite the existing files with

data from the most recent archive.
NOTE: If you press “OK,” the display must reboot to com-
plete the file restoration. After the display reboots, the
restored data is available for your field operation.

Press the “Cancel” button to cancel the file restoration and

continue working with the existing files.

RAIL16DSP0815BA 4

After you restore the backup data, the next newest archive
in the list becomes available for restoration.

RAIL16DSP0816BA 5

8-17
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

"Telematics Status" screen

Use the “Telematics Status” screen to monitor information about your cellular connection and file transfer status, if
applicable.
On the “Home” screen, press the “Diagnostics” icon to
access the “Diagnostics” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

Press the “Tel” tab on the navigation bar to access the

“Telematics Status” screen.

RAIL16DSP0818BA 2

“Cell RSSI”
The “Cell RSSI” window reports the current Received Sig-
nal Strength Indicator (RSSI). The RSSI is best under-
stood as the power of a received radio signal.

The RSSI value is always a negative number.

• A higher value (closer to zero) indicates a received ra-
dio signal with greater power.
• A lower value indicates a received radio signal with less
power.
NOTE: System performance may be poor at values less
than -100 dBm.

RAIL16DSP0818BA 3

8-18
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Network Status”
For the AM53 modem, the “Network Status” window
reports the networking technology that is currently in use.
Possible values are:
• “Not Connected”
• “Connected” - This status may display when the con-
nection is being established.
• “1xRTT” (Single-Carrier Radio Transmission Technol-
ogy)
• “EVDO” (Evolution-Data Optimized)
• “EVDO Rev A” (Evolution-Data Optimized Revision A)
• “GPRS” (General Packet Radio Service)
RAIL16DSP0818BA 4
• “UMTS” (Universal Mobile Telecommunications Sys-
tem)
• “EGPRS” (Enhanced General Packet Radio Service)

For the PCM controller there are two possible values in

addition to those listed above:
• “HSPA” (High Speed Packet Access)
• “LTE” (Long Term Evolution)

“MCC-MNC”
The “MCC-MNC” window reports the Mobile Country
Code (MCC) and Mobile Network Code (MNC) of the
wireless network that is currently in use.

RAIL16DSP0818BA 5

“Network Operator”
The “Network Operator” window reports the operator of
the wireless network that is currently in use.

RAIL16DSP0818BA 6

8-19
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Transfer Mode”
When file transfer is enabled, the “Transfer Mode”
window reports the current data transfer mode. The
possible values are:
• “CN1” - Voyager 2 format only
• “ISO” - ISO XML format only
• “CN1 + ISO” - Voyager 2 format and ISO XML format

RAIL16DSP0818BA 7

“RS-232 Mode”
The “RS-232 Mode” window reports the status of the
RS-232 port of the modem. The possible values are
dependent on the device that is installed and are outlined
in the tables below.

RS-232 port status for AM53 modems

“Port Error”
“Port Open”
“Diag. Log” (diagnostic logging)
“File Transfer”
“NTRIP” (Networked Transport of RTCM via Internet
Protocol)

8
RS-232 port status for PCM modems* RAIL16DSP0818BA

“Open|Open”
“Open|Closed”
“Closed|Open”
“Closed|Closed”

NOTE: * The PCM modem provides two serial ports to

utilize both NTRIP and File Transfer with the same device.
Therefore, the “RS-232 Mode” status window shows the
status of the first serial port (NTRIP – RS232-1) and the
second serial port (File Transfer – RS232-2), separated
by a dividing line.

8-20
 8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

“Upload Status”
When file transfer is enabled, the “Upload Status”
window (1) reports the current status of file uploads. The
possible values are:
• “Idle” - There is no upload activity.
• “Zipping” - The display is building a package for upload
to the modem.
• “File Open” - The display has sent a request to the mo-
dem to open a new file for upload.
• “File Write” - The display is writing data to the new file.
• “File Close” - The display has written the necessary
data to the new file and sent a request to the modem to
close the file. RAIL16DSP0818BA 9

The status bar for uploads (2) provides a visual estimate

of progress (percent complete) for the upload process.

“Download Status”
When file transfer is enabled, the “Download Status”
window reports the current status of file downloads. The
possible values are:
• “Idle” - There is no download activity.
• “File Open” - The display has sent a request to the mo-
dem to open a new file for download.
• “File Write” - The display is writing data to the new file.
• “File Close” - The display has written the necessary
data to the new file and sent a request to the modem to
close the file.
• “New File Rcvd” - A new file has been received and is
waiting for installation. RAIL16DSP0818BA 10

The status bar for downloads (2) provides a visual es-

timate of progress (percent complete) for the download
process.

8-21
8 - "TELEMATICS" APPLICATION

8-22
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

9 - DIAGNOSTICS
Introduction
The “Version,” “CAN Status,” and “Fault Archive” screens are common to all applications on the AFS Pro 700 display.
The information on these screens may be requested by CASE IH dealer personnel to resolve a problem with how
your equipment is performing.
NOTE: The “Resource Status,” “GPS Status,” and “GPS Receiver” screens are discussed as a part of the “Precision
Farming” application. See 3-97.

This chapter explains:

• How to check software versions
• How to check controller status
• How to investigate fault codes
On the “Home” screen, press the “Diagnostics” icon to
access the “Diagnostics” screens.

RCIL11DSP108BBG 1

9-1
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

"Version" screen
Press the “Version” icon in the navigation bar to display
the “Version” screen.

RCIL11DSP148BBG 1

The “Version” screen lists the eight digit part number (1),
the software name (2), and the revision level (3) for every
application that is currently running on the display.
NOTE: Press the arrows on the scroll bar to page down
and page up on the screen.

The list includes applications that are required by the dis-

play, applications that are vehicle-specific, and farming
applications.

Only applications for the vehicle in which the display is

installed appear as active. If the display is installed in
a tractor, only tractor appropriate applications display on
the “Version” screen. When the display is moved to a
combine, only combine appropriate applications display
on the “Version” screen. RCIL11DSP148BBG 2

In the example shown:

• “Framework” and “BSP” belong to the display.
• “Large Tractors” is the vehicle software.
• “VT,” “Precision Farming,” “Trip Computer,” and “Auto-
guidance” are farming applications.

RCIL11DSP150BBG 3

9-2
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

"CAN Status" screen

Press the “CAN” icon in the navigation bar to display the
“CAN Status” screen. This screen reports the status and
source address for every controller on the Controller Area
Network (CAN) bus, including the vehicle controllers.

This example shows the GPS receiver and the NAV II nav-
igation controller used for autoguidance.

The current status for any controller can be one of five

states:

Status Meaning
online The controller is functioning normally.
offline The controller was detected, but is no
longer communicating.
not detected The controller is not detected on the
RAIL12DSP0998BA 1
CAN bus.
degraded The controller is operating in a
degraded state.
disabled The controller has disabled itself and is
reporting its disabled condition.

The vehicle determines whether the serial number, boot-

code, hardware, and software versions for the controller
are communicated to the display.

9-3
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

"Fault Archive" screen

Press the “Fault” icon in the navigation bar to display the
“Fault Archive” screen.

By default, the fault archive for the display is shown.

Display fault codes use a letter prefix to identify the

source of the report:
• “AG” for the “Autoguidance” application
• “PF” for the “Precision Farming” application (including
GPS receiver related items)
• “NAV” for the NAV II/NAV III navigation controller

The vehicle, and in some cases the implement, deter-

mines which controllers report faults through this screen.
The display fault archive is always available on this
RCIL11DSP154BBG 1
screen.
To view the fault archive for other controllers, press the
“Fault Archive” window to access the pop-up options win-
dow.

Press “Select List” to display a list of available fault

archives.

RCIL11DSP156BBG 2

The window shows which fault archives are available by

controller name. If only “Display” is listed, no other con-
trollers on the vehicle report faults to the display through
this screen.

If additional controllers are listed, press a controller to

view its archive. The screen refreshes to display the
archive for that controller.

RCIL11DSP158BBG 3

9-4
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

Each fault occurrence is date and time stamped, with the

most recent faults listed first.

Multiple occurrences of the same fault are considered one

unique code with an ”occurrence count” that is greater
than one. Faults are stored to provide a record of past
fault events which may help troubleshoot a current prob-
lem.
NOTE: If all faults cannot be viewed on a single screen, a
scroll bar is added to the screen to view the fault archive
as needed.

RCIL11DSP154BBG 4

The color of the fault text on the “Fault Archive” screen

indicates the status of the fault:
• red for faults that are active
• green for past faults that are inactive
• gray (dimmed) for faults that are set to be ignored

Pressing the “OK” button on the pop-up message leaves

fault detection for the problem enabled. The pop-up mes-
sage redisplays until the problem is resolved. Enabled
fault codes are color-coded red.

Pressing the “Ignore” button on the pop-up message dis-

ables fault detection for the problem. The fault condi-
tion remains, but no further messages display until power
to the display is cycled OFF and then ON again or until RCIL11DSP160BBG 5
the status is manually changed. Ignored or disabled fault
codes are color-coded gray.

If a fault condition is corrected – self-resolved or corrected

by the operator, the fault code becomes inactive and is
color-coded green.

RCIL11DSP401BBG 6

9-5
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

To change the status of a fault, press the individual win-

dow for the fault to access the pop-up option window.

Press “Enable” to change the fault detection from ignored

to enabled.

Press “Ignore” to change the fault detection from enabled

to ignored.
NOTE: The option in the “Fault Entry” window changes
with the status of the selected fault.

RCIL11DSP162BBG 7

To view more information about a fault:

1. Press the individual window for the fault to access the
pop-up options window.
2. Press “Fault Info” to display the information window.

RCIL11DSP162BBG 8

9-6
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

The information window contains:

• The fault title
• The fault number
• The advisory message
• The number of occurrences for the same fault
• The time and date of the last occurrence
• The time and date for when the fault was last cleared

Press the down arrow on the scroll bar to page down to

the remaining information.

Press the “OK” button at any time to exit the information

window.
RCIL11DSP164BBG 9

RCIL11DSP165BBG 10

RCIL11DSP166BBG 11

9-7
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

Erase faults
To erase all faults in a selected archive:
1. Select the desired controller with the “Fault Archive”
window.
2. Press “Erase All” in the pop-up options window to
erase the fault archive for the selected controller.

RCIL11DSP156BBG 12

Refresh the fault archive

To refresh the screen display for a selected fault archive:
1. Select the desired controller with the “Fault Archive”
window.
2. Press “Refresh List” in the pop-up option window to
refresh the screen display for the selected controller.

RCIL11DSP156BBG 13

9-8
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

“Precision Farming” fault table

Fault Fault title Advisory message Action
number
PF-100 GPS receiver Position data not available until The system has lost communication
communication communication restored. Check display with the GPS receiver. Ensure that
lost “connection type.” Recycle power. If the proper connection type has been
problem continues, contact dealer. selected for the vehicle type (Home >
Toolbox > GPS). Check connections.
Cycle power to the system.
PF-101 GPS receiver GPS Receiver Unable to Determine The GPS receiver is unable to provide
position lost Position. Ensure GPS antenna is not a two-dimensional coordinate position.
obstructed. Check that at least 3 satellites are in
view and that the receiver does not have
an obstructed view of the horizon.
PF-102 Working without An active grower, farm, field, and task The system must have a grower, farm,
task selected must be selected before data can be field, and task defined in order to log
logged. (Home > Performance > Profile) data. Create or select an active grower,
farm, field, and task.
PF-103 Memory device not Data logging disabled. Insert memory If the “Write to Card” window is set to
detected device and recycle power to enable data “Yes” or the GPS Location window is
logging. set to anything but “Not Installed,” the
system checks for the presence of a
memory device at power ON. Insert a
memory device and cycle power to the
system.
PF-104 Memory device Data logging disabled. Insert memory The system detected the presence of a
removed device and recycle power to enable data memory device and then detected that
logging. the device was removed. Data logging
will stop. The memory device must be
reinserted and power to the system
must be cycled to enable logging.
PF-105 Memory device Archive data on memory device and The memory stick has 90% of its usable
90% full remove unwanted files via Home> Data memory used. Data will need to be
Management > Delete screen. removed from the memory stick soon.
PF-106 Memory device full Data logging disabled. Archive data on There is no more memory space
data card and remove unwanted files remaining on the memory stick. Data
via Home > Data Management > Delete will no longer be saved to the device.
screen.
PF-107 Task file is full. The current active task has reached the A new task is automatically created to
maximum file size. ensure that data continues to be logged.
PF-108 Map memory Warning – New data will be recorded but The current on-screen map data size
exceeded not shown on display map. has been exceeded. Data will continue
to log to the removable memory stick
but will not be displayed. A new field
must be selected or created to view new
map data.
PF-109 Area calibration not The area calibration is out of the Perform a new area calibration for the
valid acceptable range. current grower, farm, and field (Home >
Calibration > Area).
PF-114 Swath cannot be The selected swath exceeds one million • If you are using the display to record
recorded points. Please break swath into multiple a swath, record two or more smaller
swaths. swaths for the field.
• If you are using the “Import2” screen
(Home > Data Management >
Import2) to import swath data, use the
desktop software to save the swath
data into two or more smaller swaths.

9-9
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

Fault Fault title Advisory message Action

number
PF-117 Drive not detected Drive offline. See Operator’s Manual if The ClimateFieldView® Drive™
problem continues. module has not detected been on the
Controller Area Network (CAN) for the
power cycle.
1. Verify that the setting in the
“Telematics CAN Node” window on
the “Telematics” screen (Home >
Toolbox > Tel) is correct.
2. If the problem persists, check the
CAN connection to the FieldView®
Drive™ module.
PF-118 Drive Drive offline. See Operator’s Manual if The ClimateFieldView® Drive™
communication problem continues. module has gone offline.
lost
If the problem persists, check the
CAN connection to the FieldView®
Drive™ module.
PF-119 Drive Drive offline. See Operator’s Manual if The ClimateFieldView® Drive™
communication problem continues. module is detected, but messaging from
lost the module has timed out.
If the problem persists, check the
CAN connection to the FieldView®
Drive™ module.

9-10
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

“Telematics” fault table

Device Fault Fault title Advisory message Action
number
TL-100 Modem offline See operator’s manual if problem The modem is not detected on the
continues. Controller Area Network (CAN).
1. Verify that the setting in the
“Telematics CAN Node” window
on the “Telematics” screen
(Home > Toolbox > Tel) is
correct.
2. Verify that the green Light
Emitting Diode (LED) for power
on the modem is steady ON. If
the LED is blinking, the modem
firmware is updating. Do not
interrupt this process.
3. If the LED is steady ON, cycle
AM53 / power to the system.
PCM 4. If the problem persists, check the
CAN connection to the modem.
TL-101 Telematics Please recycle power. See The modem is detected, but
communications operator’s manual if problem messaging from the modem has
lost continues. timed out.
1. Verify that the green Light
Emitting Diode (LED) for power
on the modem is steady ON. If
the LED is blinking, the modem
firmware is updating. Do not
interrupt this process.
2. If the LED is steady ON, cycle
power to the system.
3. If the problem persists, check the
CAN connection to the modem.

9-11
 9 - DIAGNOSTICS

Device Fault Fault title Advisory message Action

number
TL-120 SIM SIM not responding
TL-121 CAN-1 CAN-1 Data Erratic, Intermittent Or
Incorrect
TL-122 CAN-2 CAN-2 Data Erratic, Intermittent Or
Incorrect
TL-123 CAN-3 CAN-3 Data Erratic, Intermittent Or
Incorrect
TL-124 CAN-4 CAN-4 Data Erratic, Intermittent Or
Incorrect
TL-125 Cellular Antenna Cellular Antenna Open Circuit
TL-126 Cellular Antenna Cellular Antenna Short to Ground
TL-127 GNSS Antenna GNSS Antenna Open Circuit
TL-128 GNSS Antenna GNSS Antenna Short to Ground See your CASE IH dealer for
PCM
TL-129 WiFi/BT Antenna WiFi/BT Antenna Open Circuit assistance.
TL-130 WiFi/BT Antenna WiFi/BT Antenna Short to Ground
TL-131 Cellular Diversity Cellular Diversity Antenna Open
Antenna Circuit
TL-132 Cellular Diversity Cellular Diversity Antenna Short to
Antenna Ground
TL-133 Internal Backup Internal Backup Battery Voltage
Battery Above Normal
TL-134 Internal Backup Internal Backup Battery Voltage
Battery Below Normal
TL-135 Internal Backup Internal Backup Battery
Battery Disconnected
TL-136 PCM Internal HW Error

9-12
 10 - THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

10 - THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

Introduction
Four popular product control systems can be directly interfaced to the AFS Pro 700 display:
• Rawson Accu-Rate system
• Raven variable rate system
• HARDI control system
• Flexi-Coil control system

Rawson Accu-Rate system

A Rawson Accu-Rate system can apply seed, liquid, gran-
ular, bulk seed, or other products with the AFS Pro 700
display. Product application is monitored and controlled
with the display.

RCIL11DSP046BBG 1

“As applied” results can be mapped, or products can be

applied with prescription maps.

Two Rawson controllers can be connected to the display

for greater flexibility in section control and multiple product
application.

Required software for the display includes “Rawson Con-

troller,” “Com3 Manager,” “As Applied,” “Precision Farm-
ing,” and vehicle software.

RCIL11DSP414BBG 2

Complete documentation for the Rawson Accu-Rate sys-

tem is available from your dealer.

10-1
 10 - THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

Raven variable rate system

A Raven variable rate control system – SCS Series 100
(440/450/460/660) or SCS Series 1000 (4000/4400/4600/
5000) – can apply liquid, granular, or other products with
the AFS Pro 700 display. Product application is monitored
and controlled with the display.

RCIL11DSP045BBG 1

“As applied” results can be mapped, or products can be

applied with prescription maps.

Two Raven controllers can be connected to the display for

great flexibility in section control and some series support
multiple product application.

Required software for the display includes “Raven Con-

troller,” “Com3 Manager,” “As Applied,” “Precision Farm-
ing,” and vehicle software.

RCIL11DSP415BBG 2

Complete documentation for the Raven variable rate con-

trol system is available from your dealer.

10-2
 10 - THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

HARDI control system

A HARDI control system—the HC 5500—can apply liquid
products with the AFS Pro 700 display. Product applica-
tion is monitored and controlled with the display.

RCIL11DSP549BBG 1

“As applied” results can be mapped, or products can be

applied with prescription maps.

Two HARDI controllers can be connected to the display

for great flexibility in section control.

Required software for the display includes “Hardi Con-

troller,” “Com3 Manager,” “As Applied,” “Precision Farm-
ing,” and vehicle software.

RCIL11DSP550BBG 2

Complete documentation for the HARDI control system is

available from your dealer.

10-3
 10 - THIRD PARTY SYSTEMS

Flexi-Coil control system

A Flexi-Coil rate control system can apply liquid, granu-
lar, or bulk seed products with the AFS Pro 700 display.
Product application is monitored and controlled with the
display.

RCIL11DSP551BBG 1

“As applied” results can be mapped, or products can be

applied with prescription maps.

Two Flexi-Coil controllers can be connected to the display

for greater flexibility in section control and multiple product
application.

Required software for the display includes “Flexi Coil,”

“Com3 Manager,” “As Applied,” “Precision Farming,” and
vehicle software.

RCIL11DSP552BBG 2

Complete documentation for the Flexi-Coil rate control

system is available from your dealer.

10-4
 Index

###_Index_###

A
"AFS AccuSync Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
"Auxiliary Controls" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Add boundaries and swaths to an existing job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Additional windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15
AFS AccuSync™ Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Area calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
Autonomous (raw GPS) setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-94

B
"Backup Management" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Boundary import setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

C
"CAN Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
"Constellation Map" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-112
CenterPoint™ RTX™ setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-71
Change swath and boundary export setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Change the CAN node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
Configure the “Virtual Terminal” application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Connect to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Create a new job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

D
"Delete" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
"Diagnostics" screens for the Virtual Terminal (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25
"Display Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Data download . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Data management best practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45
Desktop software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

E
Enable the “Virtual Terminal” application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2

F
"Fault Archive" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
"Feature Activation" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
"Field Notes" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-204
"Filter List" screen (crop type filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Fault code index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26
Feature activation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Field boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-128
Field marks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-171
Field obstacles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-159
Filter the job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Flexi-Coil control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
Formatting the memory device - Format the memory device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51
From the “Toolbox” screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
From the ”AFS AccuSync” window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

G
"GPS Receiver" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-114
"GPS Setup" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36
"GPS Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-97
GPS setup for the AFS VectorPro receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-95
 H
"Headland" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-144
"Home" screen area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
HARDI control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

I
"Import" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
"Import2" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34
Introduction . . 1-1, 2-1, 2-12, 2-24, 3-1, 3-21, 3-33, 3-97, 3-128, 3-176, 3-203, 4-1, 4-45, 5-1, 6-1, 7-1, 9-1, 10-1

J
Join a job by creating a new task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Join a job from the “Jobs List” screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

K
Keypads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

L
Leave a job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Left-hand area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23

M
"Manual Control Setup" screen (manual product mapping) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
"Map Management" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25
Manual scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Multiple vehicle practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48

O
"Operator Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
OmniSTAR® setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-81
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

P
"Precision Farming Setup" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
"Printer Settings" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
"Profile Setup" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Planning online . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-125
Planning software. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-116
Print to a file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Print to a printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7

R
"Resource Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-115
"Run" screen windows for the Virtual Terminal (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22
"Run Layout" screen ("Run" screen customization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Radar and distance calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21
RangePoint™ RTX™ setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91
Raven variable rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Rawson Accu-Rate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Real Time Kinematic (RTK) setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-49
Rotating memory stick practices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-49

S
Seasonal data management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Setup the "Virtual Terminal" application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
Share swaths and boundaries with the current job. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16
Sort the job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
Status and warning icon area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Status icons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
Swath map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-196

T
"Telematics" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
"Telematics Status" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
"Text Messages Received" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-11
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24

U
User-Defined Windows (UDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

V
"Vehicle Name" window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
"Version" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
"VT Preferences" screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
View Controller Area Network (CAN) status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25
View job and cloud connection status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24
View job list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12
View shared coverage map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22

W
"Weather Notes" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-206
Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS)/European Geostationary Navigation Overlay System (EGNOS) setup3-93
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Working with an application in the Virtual Terminal (VT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20
Work maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-176

X
"Xtra Notes" screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-209
 Dealer’s stamp

CNH Industrial America LLC reserves the right to make improvements in design and changes in specifications
at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold.
Specifications, descriptions, and illustrative material herein are as accurate as known
at time of publication, but are subject to change without notice.

Availability of some models and equipment builds varies according to the country
in which the equipment is being used. For exact information about any particular product,
please consult your Case IH dealer.

© 2021 CNH Industrial America LLC. All Rights Reserved.

Case IH is a trademark registered in the United States and many
other countries, owned or licensed to CNH Industrial N.V.,
its subsidiaries or affiliates.
Any trademarks referred to herein, in association with goods
and/or services of companies, other than owned or licensed
to CNH Industrial N.V., its subsidiaries or affiliates, are the
property of those respective companies.